<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<TEI xmlns="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0">
  <teiHeader>
    <fileDesc>
      <titleStmt>
        <title>Political economy</title>
        <author>
          <persName>
            <forname>Sydney John</forname>
            <surname>Chapman</surname>
          </persName>
        </author>
      </titleStmt>
      <publicationStmt />
      <sourceDesc>
        <bibl>
          <msIdentifier>
            <idno>867647221</idno>
          </msIdentifier>
        </bibl>
      </sourceDesc>
    </fileDesc>
  </teiHeader>
  <text>
    <body>
      <div>
        <pb n="1" />
        ...  .  '

'  -  V'.V  :

:  :

■■■■■

y.

r/.y/.
        <pb n="2" />
        i  n
        <pb n="3" />
        ;  :  •■■■■  -  -  ••  '  :
        <pb n="4" />
        HOME  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY
OF  MODERN  KNOWLEDGE

POLITICAL  ECONOMY
BY
S.  J.  CHAPMAN,  M.A.,  M.Com.

London
WILLIAMS  &amp;amp;  NORGATE
HENRY  HOLT  k  Co.,  New  York
Canada:  WM.  BRIGGS,  Toronto
India  :  R.  k  T.  WASHBOURNE,  Ltd.
        <pb n="5" />
        HOME
UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY

OF

MODERN  KNOWLEDGE

Editors  :
HERBERT  FISHER,  M  A.,  F.B.A.
PROF.  GILBERT  MURRAY,  D.LJTT,
LL.D.,  F.B.A.
PROF.  J.  ARTHUR  THOMSON,  M.A.
PROF.  WILLIAM  T.  BREWSTER,  M.A,
(Colombia  Univbríitv,  U.S.A.)

NEW  YORK
HENRY  HOLT  AND  COMPANY
        <pb n="6" />
        L'i//

POLITICAL
ECONOMY

BY
S.  J.  CHAPMAN,  M.A.,  M.Com.
PiofeFsor  of  Political  Economy  and  Dean
cf  the  Facul  y  cf  Commerce  and
Administration  in  the
University  of  Manchester  ;
Author  of
"  T  he  Lancashire  Cotton  Industry.”
“  Wages  and  Employment,"  etc.

LONDON
WILLIAMS  AND  NORGATE
        <pb n="7" />
        a

PRINTED  BY
TUE  LONDON  AND  NORWICH  PRESS,  LIMITED
LONDON  AND  NORWICH

fts&amp;amp;eet,

a

was

P

•&amp;gt;
        <pb n="8" />
        CONTENTS

»HARTER  _  TAGE
I  Introductory  7
II  Demand  33
III  Supply  and  Its  Relation  to  Demand  .  63
IV  Monopoly  93
V  Money  115
VI  International  Trade  .  .  .  .145
VII  Wages,  Profits&amp;gt;and  Interest  .  .  167
VIII  Rent  124
IX  Problems  of  Distribution  .  .  .  219
Note  on  Books  254
Index  256
        <pb n="9" />
        PREFACE

POLITICAL  Economy  Is,  and  has  been  for  some  years,  in  a
transitional  state,  which  is  proof  of  its  vitality.  On  the
one  side  it  is  becoming  more  abstract,  and  on  the  other  side
it  is  becoming  more  realistic.  The  two  movements  are
not  in  the  least  opposed,  unless  in  the  sense  that  they  act
and  react  on  each  other  incessantly  to  the  great  advancement ­
  of  the  study.  Much  modern  Economic  science
is  being  increasingly  assimilated  in  form  and  method  to
the  Natural  sciences.  In  chemical  and  physical  laboratories ­
  which  can  pretend  to  any  distinction  realistic
researching  never  stops  ;  but  speculation  as  regards  the
fundamentals  of  chemistry  and  physics  continue  and
must  continue.  In  the  great  laboratory  of  the  world  a
multitude  of  realistic  researches  remain  to  be  made  by
economists,  and  it  is  only  as  they  are  made  that  the
science  of  economics  will  develop  satisfactorily  ;  but  to
attack  the  ultra-abstract  and  mathematical  economists
on  that  account,  in  the  supposed  interests  of  realism,
is  suicidal.  Of  this  book  speculative  results  of  a  very
general  kind  are  the  substance.
I  have  to  thank  Mr.  A.  Fingland  Jack,  Lecturer  on
Economics  and  Commerce  in  the  University  of  Manchester
for  his  kind  assistance  with  the  proofs,
The  University,
Manchester,  June,  1912
        <pb n="10" />
        7

POLITICAL  ECO]

CHAPTER  I

INTRODUCTORY

This  book  is  in  no  sense  historical  or  concerned
with  social  development.  Its  scope  is  confined
to  things  as  they  are  in  communities  which
have  reached  a  certain  stage  of  civilisation  ;
and  its  purpose  is  to  offer  general  explanations
of  these  things,  so  far  as  they  are  economic,
without  tracing  their  evolution.  Such  explanations ­
  make  up  the  elements  of  political
economy,  according  to  the  commonest  conception ­
  of  that  study.  Business  affairs  will
not  be  handled  in  this  work  in  any  great
detail,  but  the  fundamental  characteristics
of  economic  generalising  of  the  kind  indicated
will  be  pretty  thoroughly  explored.
The  explanations  that  will  be  presented  are
those  which  became  current  after  the  exact
analysis  begun  by  devons  and  Léon  Walras
had  been  perfected  and  applied  to  the  whole
field  of  economic  phenomena  by  later  writers,
        <pb n="11" />
        8

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

particularly  by  Dr.  Marshall.  Though  the
new  generalisations  were  suggested  at  many
points  by  mathematics,  it  is  perfectly  easy  to
represent  them  in  simple  language  which
implies  no  mathematical  knowledge  ;  and
I  shall  try  so  to  do.  Indeed  the  fundamental
ideas  in  modern  economic  theory  are  by  no
means  difficult  to  understand  ;  and  if  therefore ­
  I  should  fail  in  my  object  it  will  be  my
fault  and  not  the  fault  of  the  subject.  Far
from  confusing  simple  issues  the  new  work
has  clarified  what  was  previously  obscure
and  rendered  economic  theory  easier  for
everybody  to  grasp  ;  but  at  the  same  time  it
must  be  admitted  that  it  puts  a  greater
strain  on  the  reader’s  powers  of  concentration,
inasmuch  as  it  rejects  all  vague  conceptions
and  loose  reasoning  and  insists  on  exactness.
Whatever  be  the  method  of  treatment
adopted,  the  scope  or  nature  of  economic
studies  calls  first  for  discussion.  The  substance
of  economics  consists  in  all  economic  facts.
Economic  facts  may  be  described  as  any  facts
which  have  relation  at  the  same  time  to  man
on  the  one  hand  and  wealth  on  the  other  ;
and  for  our  present  purpose  it  is  sufficient  to
think  of  wealth  as  made  up  of  all  the  things
desired  by  man  which  can  be  attained  only
with  the  expenditure  of  human  effort.  Now
        <pb n="12" />
        INTRODUCTORY

9

economic  studies  are  not  by  any  means
exhausted  by  economic  theory.  In  order
to  comprehend  of  what  distinguishable  parts
economic  studies  are  constituted  it  will  be
desirable,  perhaps,  to  consider  how  Economics
began  and  how  it  has  developed.
Economic  studies  originated,  as  so  many
other  studies,  in  practical  needs  on  the  one
hand  and  speculative  curiosity  on  the  other.
In  the  conduct  of  business,  and  particularly
in  the  relation  of  the  State  to  the  business
activities  of  the  community,  problems  which
could  not  be  solved  offhand  were  met  with  ;
and  many  of  these  problems  led  to  lengthy
controversy.  I  may  instance  in  particular  the
matter  of  the  currency,  and  what  the  policy
of  the  State  should  be  with  reference  to  its
regulation  ;  the  matter  of  foreign  commercial
intercourse,  involving  the  question  as  to
whether  a  country  is  necessarily  benefited  or
the  reverse  by  every  species  of  commerce
with  its  rivals  ;  and  the  awkward  matter  of
obtaining  resources  for  the  State’s  activities,
involving  the  question  of  the  incidence  of  the
burden  imposed  under  different  methods  of
securing  them.  It  is  comprehensible,  therefore, ­
  that  writings  which  could  be  classified
as  economic  were  not  very  late  in  appearing
in  the  history  of  civilisation.
        <pb n="13" />
        10

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

Now,  if  early  economic  writings  be  examined
as  a  whole  it  will  be  found  that  considerations
of  quite  different  classes  are  included.  We
find  in  them  questions  of  an  ethical  or  moral
character,  concerned  with  the  application  of
the  ideas  of  the  good  and  the  just  in  social
affairs  ;  and  questions  of  somewhat  the  same
order,  though  they  are  not  strictly  ethical  but
rather  political,  relating  to  the  matter  of  prudency
  and  expediency  as  regards  State  action.
And  besides  these  ethical  and  political  questions ­
  yet  others  of  different  orders  are  met
with.  Controversy  has  arisen,  for  instance,
with  respect  to  the  business  policy  which  is
most  conducive  to  the  wealth  of  individuals
or  the  community  ;  and  again,  quite  apart
from  practice,  writers  have  sought  the  causes
of  certain  effects.  After  noticing  the  various
problems  which  are  merged  in  unsystematic
economic  discussions  taken  in  the  mass,  we
shall  find  it  convenient  to  make  a  division  of
economic  studies  somewhat  like  the  following  :
1.  Economic  Ethics.
2.  Economic  Politics  or  Public  Economics.
3.  Economic  Arts.
4.  Positive  Economic  Science.
A  short  definition  of  each  of  these  groups
may  now  be  offered.  Economic  ethics  is
        <pb n="14" />
        INTRODUCTORY

II

concerned  with  what  human  actions  should  be
in  relation  to  wealth.  Economic  politics  is
all  that  part  of  politics,  whether  ethical  or  not,
which  has  reference  to  economic  facts.  An
economic  art  consists  in  a  systematic  exposition ­
  of  the  methods  by  which  a  given  end
may  be  attained.  Positive  economic  science
—which  I  call  “  positive  ”  in  order  to  make
plain  that  its  inquiries  do  not  proceed  from
the  ethical  point  of  view—takes  as  its  object
neither  more  nor  less  than  the  explanation
of  economic  data  in  the  manner  of  the  natural
sciences,  or,  as  we  may  put  it,  the  tracing  of
cause  and  effect  in  the  economic  universe.
This  book  will  be  confined  to  matters  which
lie  unmistakably  within  the  sphere  of  positive ­
  economic  science  ;  but  it  goes  without
saying  that  it  has  not  been  possible  to  do  more
than  indicate  the  broad  scientific  results
which  have  hitherto  been  achieved  within
this  sphere.
A  systematic  treatise  on  economics  was
comparatively  late  in  presenting  itself.  In
England  the  first  work  of  this  kind  which
was  at  all  satisfactory  and  approximately
complete  was  Adam  Smith’s  Wealth  of  Nations,
but  before  its  publication  much  valuable
economic  writing  had  appeared  in  this
country  from  the  pens  of  Mun,  North,  Child,
        <pb n="15" />
        :  .  -,  •  ;  ■  .  •  .

12  POLITICAL  ECONOMY
Locke,  and  Petty  in  the  seventeenth  century,
and  in  the  next  century  from  the  pens  of
Hume  and  Steuart,  not  to  speak  of  Defoe.
Nobody  who  desires  to  become  familiar  with
political  economy  should  neglect,  if  not  to
scan  minutely,  at  least  to  skim  and  taste  the
Wealth  of  Nations.  In  this  great  classic  an
intermixture  of  different  aims  and  points
of  view  will  be  met  with,  which  is  only  to
be  expected  when  it  is  borne  in  mind  that
Adam  Smith’s  position  was  at  the  beginning
of  modern  social  philosophy.  Divergencies
in  point  of  view  and  aim  had  not  then  been
clearly  distinguished.  So  in  Adam  Smith’s
stupendous  treatise  on  political  economy  the
ethics  in  the  discussion  of  value,  the  maxims
of  conduct  and  the  partly  metaphysical
defence  of  self-interested  action  kept  astir
by  competition—the  providential  effects  of
which  are  never  established—need  not  excite
astonishment.  The  astonishing  thing  is  that
the  portions  of  the  Wealth  of  Nations  which
are  positive  science  proper  are  as  good  as  they
are.  And  nothing  that  is  said  here  must  be
taken  to  imply  that  economic  studies  which
cannot  be  classified  as  positive  science  are  of
little  worth.  On  the  contrary,  I  should  hold
that  the  time  devoted  to  the  positive  science
of  economics  is  largely  justified  by  the  value

:
        <pb n="16" />
        INTRODUCTORY

13

of  its  results  to  these  other  studies  and  to
practice.  My  point  rather  is  that  Adam
Smith  had  not  clearly  envisaged  a  positive
science  of  economics,  and  possibly  had  not
sufficiently  severed  in  his  mind  the  purpose  of
natural  science  from  other  purposes  to  enable
him  to  avoid  confusion  of  issues.  It  is  only,
however,  when  the'  mind’s  eye  is  kept  fixed
on  one  aim,  at  one  time  at  any  rate,  that
rapid  progress  in  knowledge  can  be  looked  for.
The  pure  scientist  generally  leaves  the  practical ­
  application  of  his  discoveries  to  others  ;
and  practical  application  may  hang  years
behind.
It  was  left  to  Ricardo  to  unravel  from  the
tangle  in  which  he  found  them  the  portions
of  political  economy  which  treated  of  cause
and  effect,  and  to  give  to  many  of  them  a
more  scientific  finish.  But  even  Ricardo,
despite  the  cold  light  of  his  purely  scientific
interest,  was  not  entirely  successful.  And
there  followed  others  who  were  amazingly
successful  in  confounding  the  dry  scientific
point  of  view  with  a  conception  of  society  as
a  system  of  unemotional  atoms,  or  worse,  with
the  idea  that  a  soulless  mechanism  driven  by
self-interest  as  the  motive  power  was  the  right
thing  to  aim  at.  By  the  doctrines  of  these
blundering  teachers—for  whose  mistakes,
        <pb n="17" />
        14

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

however,  the  masters  of  the  new-born  science
were  in  some  measure  responsible—political
and  social  sentiments  were  contaminated  ;
and  the  country  was  condemned  to  pass
through  one  of  the  greatest  crises  in  its
history,  that  occasioned  by  mechanical
invention  and  the  introduction  of  steampower,
  without  benefit  of  much  mutual  helpfulness ­
  and  sympathy.  Said  the  Duke  in
Coningsby,  “  Supposing  a  case  of  outdoor
relief  “  I  could  not  suppose  anything
so  absurd,”  replied  his  son-in-law,  who  was
chairman  of  one  of  the  newly-constituted
Boards  of  Guardians.  Nobody  can  feel  quite
confident  in  passing  sweeping  judgments  on
bygone  events  ;  and  it  may  have  been  that
grave  errors  in  resisting  progress  were  avoided
in  consequence  of  the  austere  teaching  of  the
dominant  political  economy,  and  that  men
were  made  hard  enough  and  pushing  enough
to  win  their  way  through  when,  in  accordance
with  its  maxims,  they  were  left  to  depend  on
themselves  alone—
“Stem,  rugged  nurse,  thy  rigid  lore
With  patience  many  a  year  they  bore  !  **
But  that  much  of  the  reason  for  which
laisser  faire  was  recommended  and  practised ­
  originated  in  mental  confusion  must
        <pb n="18" />
        INTRODUCTORY

15

be  sadly  confessed.  It  is  significant  that
Dickens  felt  called  upon  to  defend  the  crime
of  poverty  in  the  Chimes,  and  to  attack  the
economic  man  in  Hard  Times.  By  many
readers  to-day  these  tales  may  be  ranked
among  his  inferior  works  by  reason  of  their
exaggeration,  but  had  such  critics  lived  in  his
day  it  is  possible  that  the  exaggeration  would
have  seemed  but  legitimate  artistic  emphasis.
Ruskin  was  another  writer  who  felt  sure  that
there  were  wrongs  to  be  righted  ;  but,  while
Dickens  appealed  to  human  emotions,  he  for
his  part  set  himself  to  the  task  of  searching
out  the  errors  of  reason  wherein  social  wrongs
found  their  source.  Unfortunately  for  political
economy,  Ruskin  in  his  generous  enthusiasm
was  for  root  and  branch  destruction.  Falling
into  the  same  fundamental  error  as  the
popular  political  economists,  in  confounding
precepts  with  laws,  and,  while  brilliantly
suggestive,  adding  to  the  confusion  by  overlaying ­
  the  positive  with  the  ethical  point  of
view,  he  denounced  not  merely  the  appalling
economic  maxims  which  were  passing  current
as  political  economy  but  also  the  scientific
generalisations  relating  to  the  causes  of
economic  phenomena,  the  truth  and  serviceableness ­
  of  which  should  have  been  apparent.
In  the  above  paragraph  events  have  been,
        <pb n="19" />
        16

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

somewhat  anticipated.  Before  the  assault  on
political  economy  came  to  a  head,  Senior
and  the  younger  Mill  had  succeeded  Ricardo.
The  elder  Mill  and  Malthus—in  part  discoverer,
in  part  inventor  of  the  “  revolting  ratios  ”
between  food  and  population,  the  fundamental
notion  of  which,  nevertheless,  contained  “  a
very  valuable  discovery,  or  ‘  like  the  toad,
ugly  and  venomous,  had  yet  a  precious  jewel
in  its  head,’  ”  as  Hazlitt  unflatteringly  put
it—these  two  had  worked  contemporaneously,
partly  in  collaboration  and  partly  in  rivalry
with  Ricardo,  on  the  general  principles  of
economic  science  ;  and  to  them,  as  well  as  to
him,  an  important  step  in  its  development
must  be  attributed.  John  Stuart  Mill  improved
wonderfully  on  Ricardo  and  wrote  a  treatise
to  which  little  exception  could  be  taken  on
humanitarian  grounds,  but  the  public  notion  of
what  political  economy  taught  had  already  been
created  and  its  dissemination  was  continuing.
Nevertheless  we  can  hardly  ascribe  anything
path-breaking  in  the  progress  of  economics
to  Mill.  His  most  important  contribution,
perhaps,  was  to  put  together,  develop,  extend
and  combine  in  a  coherent  system  the  ideas
of  the  school  in  which  he  had  been  brought
up,  and  at  the  same  time  somewhat  to  soften
their  outlines.  But  to  do  this  a  master  mind
        <pb n="20" />
        B

INTRODUCTORY

17

was  needed,  capable  of  viewing  things  in  the
mass,  and  at  the  same  time  of  grasping  details
and  bringing  them  into  harmonious  relations
with  one  another.
In  the  works  of  John  Stuart  Mill  the  old
political  economy  draws  very  near  its  end,
and  much  of  the  new  political  economy  is
foreshadowed  and  inspired  if  not  actually
begun.  For  the  crystallisations  of  the  old
school  Bentham  was  in  no  small  degree
responsible  ;  a  man  of  whom  Hazlitt  wrote  :
—“  Mr.  Bentham  turns  wooden  utensils  in  a
lathe  for  exercise,  and  fancies  he  can  turn  men
in  the  same  manner.  He  has  no  great  fondness ­
  for  poetry  and  can  hardly  extract  a
moral  out  of  Shakespeare.  His  house  is
warmed  and  lighted  by  steam.  He  is  one  of
those  who  prefer  the  artificial  to  the  natural
in  most  things,  and  think  the  mind  of  man
omnipotent.  He  has  a  great  contempt  for
out-of-door  prospects,  for  green  fields  and
trees,  and  is  for  referring  everything  to
utility.  .  .  .  It  is  indeed  the  great  fault
of  this  able  and  extraordinary  man,  that  he
has  concentrated  his  faculties  and  feelings
too  entirely  on  one  subject  and  pursuit,
and  has  not  ‘  looked  enough  abroad  into
universality.’  ”  Making  “  the  mind  of  man
omnipotent,”  while  conceiving  of  the  reason-
        <pb n="21" />
        18

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

able  too  narrowly  and  too  superficially,  was
the  characteristic  vice  of  the  age.  Even
the  opponents  of  the  political  economists
fell  victims  to  it  :  Godwin,  the  visionary,
attempted  (in  vain)  “  to  pass  the  Arctic
Circle  and  Frozen  Regions,  where  the  understanding ­
  is  no  longer  warmed  by  the  affections, ­
  nor  fanned  by  the  breeze  of  fancy.”
But  Bentham,  nevertheless,  by  his  abstractions, ­
  though  they  represented  human  nature
as  far  too  simple—indeed,  one  might  say,
because  they  did  so—gave  to  economic  science
an  impulse  which  has  endured  up  to  the
present  time.  The  data  of  the  science  were
rendered  manageable  ;  and  when  its  fundamental ­
  ideas  were  revised  it  was  happily  found
that  not  demolition  and  reconstruction  of
the  science,  but  rather  adaptation,  re-facing
and  extension  were  involved.  It  is  nothing
new  in  the  history  of  thought  that  a  study
founded  on  false  hypotheses  should  embody  a
framework  of  permanent  value.  Physics  so
frequently  alters  its  hypotheses  that  physicists ­
  themselves  may  be  left  behind.  But
on  each  occasion  the  science  of  physics  does
not  collapse  ;  on  the  contrary  little  has  to
be  sacrificed;  and  in  its  unchecked  building
up  "we  are  presented  with  the  spectacle  of
scholars  working  on  different  hypotheses,  but
        <pb n="22" />
        INTRODUCTORY

19

working  nevertheless  harmoniously,  perhaps
in  collaboration,  and  achieving  together  results
that  stand.  Little  serious  and  sustained  reflection ­
  by  men  of  judgment  has  been  productive ­
  of  results  which  are  wholly  or  mainly
ephemeral.
After  John  Stuart  Mill  the  progress  of
economics  bifurcates.  On  the  one  hand  the
analytical  method  was  perfected  and  on  the
other  hand  induction  and  history  began  to
play  a  distinctive  part.  We  shall  first  notice
the  improvements  in  analysis  ;  for  it  is
chiefly  to  the  broad  results  of  these  that  the
present  volume  will  be  devoted.  Finally  some
consideration  must  be  given  to  the  claims  of
induction  and  history.
Duly  to  assign  credit  with  regard  to  the
discovery  and  development  of  new  ideas  is
a  difficult  and  thankless  task,  which  will  not
be  essayed  here.  Suffice  it  to  remark  that
among  the  most  original  workers  in  connection
with  the  advance  of  analytical  economics
devons  and  Léon  Walras  stand  out  prominently, ­
  and  that  to  Dr.  Marshall  belongs  the
distinction  of  having  realised  the  far-reaching
application  of  the  new  ideas,  of  having  refined
them  and  brought  out  unsuspected  implications, ­
  and  of  having  presented  economic
phenomena  unified  for  the  first  time  in
        <pb n="23" />
        20

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

an  all-embracing  theory.  The  method  developed ­
  by  Dr.  Marshall  may  be  called  the
marginal  method  ;  and  associated  with  it  in
the  most  convincing  modern  speculations  is
the  conception  of  individual  experience,  and
even  of  society,  as  an  organic  whole.  The  two
chief  notions  in  economic  theory  to-day  consist
in  seeing  each  item  of  experience  as  in  continuous ­
  relation  with  the  rest  of  experience,  and
in  explaining  the  definite  results  reached  in
economic  affairs—the  consequences  of  demand
and  supply,  to  use  the  expression  sanctified
by  long  usage—as  largely  brought  about  by
the  differences  made  to  the  totality  of  experience ­
  by  the  final  activities  of  producing  and
consuming.  It  is  difficult  to  expound  these
notions  in  brief,  but  their  import  will  be
brought  out  in  each  of  the  succeeding  chapters
of  this  book.  On  completing  his  perusal  of
what  follows,  the  reader  who  returns  again
to  this  page  will  see  on  the  instant  what  its
vague  phrases  mean.  In  the  technical  language ­
  of  mathematics  the  chief  part  of  the
explanation  of  economic  value,  whether
revealed  in  the  prices  of  goods  or  the  rates
of  international  exchange,  or  the  level  of
wages  or  the  amount  of  interest,  is  to  be  found
in  the  differentiation  of  economic  experience
—in  observing  the  differences  made  to  the
        <pb n="24" />
        INTRODUCTORY

21

value  of  goods  by  small  changes  in  their
supply,  the  differences  made  to  the  worth
of  capital  by  slight  accessions  to  its  quantity, ­
  the  differences  made  to  the  burden  of
labour  by  some  lengthening  of  the  hours  of
work,  and  so  forth.  The  marginal  theory  has
been  caustically  described  as  the  theory  that
the  tail  wags  the  dog.  There  is  a  certain
truth  in  the  remark;  but  the  intended  jibe,
instead  of  nailing  a  fallacy  to  the  counter,
draws  attention  to  a  highly  significant  fact.
In  the  determination  of  value  it  is  the  last
steps  that  count—the  last  step  on  the  side
of  demand,  and  the  last  step  on  the  side  of
supply.
Foreshadowings  and  even  partial  applications ­
  of  the  marginal  theory  may  be  discovered ­
  in  the  old  economics  ;  but  it  is
one  thing  to  understand  the  essential  nature
of  a  particular  kind  of  causation  and  detect
its  workings  in  apparently  dissimilar  actions
and  reactions,  and  another  thing  to  give  now
and  then  a  reason  for  phenomena  implying  the
same  kind  of  causation,  without  being  alive
to  its  peculiarity  and  far-reaching  influence.
“Demand”  and  “supply”  used  to  be  the
magic  wands  for  solving  all  economic  problems,
—and  in  the  worst  days  of  error  they  were
indiscriminately  applied  to  everything  “from
        <pb n="25" />
        22

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

religion  to  a  shoe-black,”  as  Leslie  Stephen
expressed  it—but  the  conceptions  of  demand
and  supply  were  seldom  precise,  and  were  not
infrequently  erroneous.  They  proved  as
treacherous  to  the  inexpert  as  the  conception
of  evolution  has  proved  since  to  shallow
thinkers  in  the  biological  and  mental  sciences.
Theories  tend  to  crystallise  into  formulae
expressing  half-truths,  and  these  get  to  be
fitted  unthinkingly  to  facts  to  which  they  are
alien.  In  this  connection  it  behoves  us  to
bear  in  mind  that  the  marginal  theory,  like
the  old  notions  of  demand  and  supply,  will
increasingly  cease  to  be  an  exception  to  the
rule.  Already,  indeed,  instances  could  be
recorded  of  pontifical  pronouncements,  made
on  the  strength  of  mechanical  resort  to  the
marginal  theory,  where  a  penetrating  study
of  the  living  facts  could  alone  justify  even
the  least  dogmatic  of  utterances.  To  the
limitations  of  the  use  of  the  marginal  theory
and  the  need  of  supplementing  it  invariably
with  direct  observation,  reference  will  be  made
again  and  in  more  detail.
It  must  now  be  our  aim  to  get  a  grasp
of  the  nature  and  difficulties  of  scientific
explanation  within  the  economic  domain.
It  has  been  declared  by  some  that  society
        <pb n="26" />
        INTRODUCTORY

23

as  an  organic  whole  does  not  lend  itself
to  analysis.  By  the  statement  that  society
is  an  organic  whole  is  meant  that  no  one
set  of  human  actions  can  be  regarded  as
wholly  unconnected  with  any  other  set
of  human  actions  taking  place  in  the  same
community.  Each  society,  it  is  asserted—
and  we  may  allow  at  once  rightly  asserted—
presents  an  organized  system  of  activities
covering  all  that  happens  at  one  time  and
reaching  backwards  into  the  past  and  forwards ­
  into  the  future.  A  simple  illustration
can  readily  be  furnished.  My  demand  for  a
particular  ^  book  to-day—say,  for  Pareto’s
Cours  cTEconomie  Politique,  which  at  the
time  that  I  write  is  out  of  print—is
dependent  (a)  upon  my  possession  of  other
things,  which  gives  to  this  want  the  opportunity ­
  of  expressing  itself,  or  may  even  be
partially  responsible  for  its  existence  ;  (b)
upon  my  education  and  circumstances  in
the  past  ;  (c)  upon  my  ideas  and  determinations ­
  as  regards  my  future  ;  and
(d)  upon  the  tastes,  acquirements  and
possessions  of  my  fellows.  This  being
so,  to  take  out  the  demand  in  question
and  try  to  study  it  as  an  independent
specimen  is  to  imply  an  atomistic  view  of
social  functioning  which  is  in  conflict  with
        <pb n="27" />
        24

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

experience,  and  is  bound  to  lead  to  error
—so  it  is  alleged.  It  is  no  less  mistaken
than  to  think  of  the  brain  as  related  to  the
lungs  and  heart  as  one  stone  is  related  to
another  in  a  heap  by  the  road-side.  The
only  possible  social  law,  it  is  asserted,  must
be  of  such  a  form  as  to  connect  the  whole
state  of  society  at  one  time  with  its  whole
state  at  another  time.
This  line  of  argument  is  so  plausible  and
embodies  so  much  truth  that  those  who  are
converted  by  it  may  well  be  excused.  But
the  more  persistent  of  those  who  are  predisposed ­
  to  believe  that  a  rationalistic  account
—which  may  not  be  the  whole  account—
of  all  experience  is  possible  will  more  closely
scrutinise  what  is  supposed  to  block  their  path.
On  doing  so  they  will  detect  first  that  the
arguments  opposed  to  them  prove  too  much.
If  they  are  through  and  through  sound  all
the  biological  sciences  are  in  a  quandary  ;
but  we  know  they  have  been  successful  in
framing  convincing  generalisations  relating  to
the  facts  of  life.  The  reason  for  their  success
is  that  the  mental  abstraction  of  one  thing
from  another  is  possible  even  when  the  physical ­
  separation  of  the  one  thing  from  the  other
is  not  feasible  ;  and  experience,  which  is  the
ultimate  test  of  the  correctness  of  all  laws,
        <pb n="28" />
        INTRODUCTORY

25

shows  that  the  results  reached  on  the  basis
of  a  discriminating  mental  abstraction  (that
is  the  imagined  separation  of  things  that
may  be  inseparable)  hold  with  approximate
accuracy.  A  brain  specialist  may  study  the
brain  alone,  broadly  speaking,  though  no  brain
could  survive  when  severed  from  the  body  with
which  it  was  united.  Similarly  we  may  study
the  economic  activities  of  a  group  of  people,
ignoring  their  religious  and  political  instincts
as  such,  that  is,  so  far  as  they  are  not  expressed
economically,  though  these  instincts  are  an
integral  part  of  human  nature  ;  or,  again,  we
may  study  the  economic  activities  of  one
person,  mentally  separating  him  from  the
community  of  which  he  forms  a  part.
We  may  go  even  further  in  our  defence
of  analytical  economics,  for  there  is  this  very
important  point  to  bear  in  mind,  that  many
of  the  mental  abstractions  that  we  make
as  economists  do  not  assume,  even  for  the
sake  of  argument,  the  isolated  existence
of  things  that  cannot  exist  in  isolation.
Marginal  abstractions  merely  confine  us  to
noticing  how  changes  in  relation  to  a  thing
affect  that  thing.  In  other  words,  thinking
now  of  the  marginal  method  in  economics
merely,  our  abstractions  consist  merely  in
focusing  attention  on  a  thing  and  difieren-
        <pb n="29" />
        26

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

tiating  the  experiences  relating  to  it,  as  I
have  put  it.  In  the  case  of  demand,  for
instance,  we  do  not  say,  if  we  are  careful
scientists,  that  this  book,  taken  as  an  isolated
fact,  is  worth  so  much  to  a  given  person,
because  it  cannot  be  thought  of  as  an  isolated
fact.  We  merely  say  that  this  book  makes  a
certain  difference  to  the  person  in  question
which  he  values  at  so  much.
Finally,  let  it  be  clearly  understood  that
we  are  not  treating  of  things  as  they  would
happen  in  a  community  of  thoroughly  selfish
people  who  thought  only  of  their  own  material
circumstances—in  short,  we  do  not  now  begin
our  economics  by  postulating  the  scarecrow
known  as  the  economic  man,  as  some  early
economists  did—unless  we  are  aiming  at  the
roughest  of  approximations.  On  the  contrary, ­
  we  take  people  as  they  are,  with  their
mixture  of  meanness  and  nobility,  but  in
studying  them  from  the  economic  point  of
view  we  ignore  everything,  for  the  time  being,
which,  as  a  cause,  is  not  economic,  or,  as  an
effect,  is  not  an  economic  reflex.  In  brief,
we  abstract  not  motives  and  impulses  of  a
particular  kind,  but  only  activities  or  aspects
of  activities  of  a  particular  kind.  So  when
a  recent  writer  exhorted  economists  “  once
and  for  ever  to  abolish  the  feverish,  over-
        <pb n="30" />
        INTRODUCTORY

27

strained,  intolerably  efficient  spectre  called
the  economic  man,”  “  the  standard  popinjay
of  science,”  who  had,  he  imagined,  “  been
so  little  injured  by  the  criticism  of  half  a
century,”  he  was  addressing  an  audience  in
bulk  as  spectral  as  the  spectre  that  he  abjured.
There  is  another  difficulty  of  which  much
has  occasionally  been  made,  namely,  that
we  are  dealing  not  merely  with  living  creatures
but  with  living  creatures  who  seemingly  direct
their  own  lives.  The  fact  that  human  beings
have  volition—“  free  will,”  broadly  understood—is ­
  supposed  to  militate  against  any
attempt  to  frame  laws  relating  to  their  actions.
They  could  always  choose,  if  they  liked,  to
break  the  supposed  laws.  A  complete  examination ­
  of  this  difficulty  would  carry  us  too
deeply  into  psychology,  but  it  may  be
remarked  here  (1)  that  much  human  experience, ­
  at  any  rate,  is  not  a  matter  of  choice—
for  instance,  that  connected  with  our  bodily
needs—and  (2)  that  reason  governs  us  and
that  as  reasonable  we  act  in  a  uniform  way.
Side  by  side  with  this  defence  of  deduction
from  the  results  of  minute  analysis,  something
must  be  said  of  the  method  which  has  sometimes ­
  been  opposed  to  it,  namely,  induction
from  historical  facts  or  every-day  happenings.
Of  the  fecundity  of  this  induction,  that  is,
        <pb n="31" />
        28

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

the  method  of  watching,  directly  or  in  records,
multitudes  of  facts  with  a  view  to  discovering
their  causal  relationships,  whether  it  is
applied  to  existing  conditions  or  historically,
everybody  is  fully  convinced  in  these  days.
But  pure  induction  is  not  a  flawless  method.
It  labours  under  the  limitation  that,  though
it  can  declare  what  is,  it  cannot  unaided
explain  why  it  is.  To  explain  why  a  law  holds
we  must  always  have  recourse  to  analysis.
Nevertheless,  induction  is  indispensable,  and
no  more  subordinate  than  deduction.  The
former  indicates  what  needs  to  be  explained  ;
and  to  discover  what  needs  explanation  is
sometimes  far  more  difficult  than  to  explain.
Moreover,  by  separating  from  the  seeming
chaos  of  economic  phenomena  the  sequences
and  co-existences  which  are  repeated,  it
suggests  uniformities,  and  thus  gives  birth
to  the  soul  of  scientific  explanation,  the
hypothesis.  Further,  its  aid  must  be  enlisted
in  the  testing  of  hypothesis.
The  broad  generalisations  of  economics,
as  those  of  every  other  science,  are  concerned
with  tendencies.  We  are  not,  therefore,
trying  to  discover  exactly  what  happens
at  any  moment  of  time,  and  it  would  not  be
of  much  value  merely  to  describe  the  economic
world  to  those  gifted  with  powers  of  observa-
        <pb n="32" />
        INTRODUCTORY

29

tion.  Our  object  is  to  bring  out  the  stresses
and  strains  which  broadly  account  for  things
as  they  are.  We  only  fully  explain  a  thing
when  we  have  completely  isolated  all  relevant
and  appreciable  tendencies  at  work,  and
estimated  their  several  influences.  But  behind
many  of  the  things  to.be  explained  we  discover
a  complicated  system  of  tendencies  within
tendencies,  some  of  which  are  long  in  bringing
about  their  effects,  and  some  of  which  would
produce  their  effects  in  a  short  time  were
they  not  counteracted.  In  economics  it  is
convenient,  therefore,  to  distinguish  between
immediate  tendencies,  short  period  tendencies,
and  long  period  tendencies.  The  first  are
predominantly  effective  as  regards  immediate
results.  The  second  are  those  which  are  comparatively ­
  speedy  in  their  operation.  The
third  are  the  tendencies  remaining.  When
in  economics  we  ask  what  is  the  effect  of  a
given  cause  we  may  mean  by  the  effect,  the
immediate  effect,  the  short-period  effect,  or
the  long-period  effect.  Let  us  take  to  illustrate ­
  the  distinction  a  particular  example.
If  the  demand  for  steel  increased,  the
immediate  effect  on  price  would  be  the
resultant  rise  in  the  price  of  steel  while
the  agents  in  production  were  left  exactly
as  they  were.  The  short-period  effect  would
        <pb n="33" />
        30

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

mean  the  price  attained  after  the  employer
had  taken  every  possible  step  to  increase
his  output,  on  the  assumption  that  meanwhile
no  new  machinery  had  been  constructed,  no
new  mines  had  been  opened  up,  and  no  new
labour  had  been  specialized.  The  long-period
effect  on  price  would  be  the  alteration  in  price
ultimately  reached  after  full  time  had  been
given  for  the  change  to  work  out  its  complete
consequences,  provided  that  no  other  change
bearing  upon  the  situation  took  place  meanwhile. ­

The  three  ends  distinguished  above  are
not  found  in  independent  existence  in  the
actual  world,  because  all  the  tendencies  to
which  we  have  referred  are  unceasingly  acting ­
  together.  The  ends  actually  met  with
are  the  intermixed  effects  of  compounded
forces  with  shorter  or  longer  time  periods.
It  is  in  particular  true  of  the  long-period
tendencies  that  their  full  economic  results  arc
never  actually  attained.  Other  changes,  setting ­
  on  foot  other  tendencies,  are  bound  to
intervene  before  a  given  change  can  eventuate
in  its  final  outcome.  We  may,  therefore,  be
led  to  question  whether  a  study  of  long-period
phenomena  fulfils  any  useful  purpose  ;  but
a  brief  deliberation  should  lead  us  to  an
affirmative  answer.  The  study  is  of  value
        <pb n="34" />
        INTRODUCTORY

81

for  two  reasons.  It  is  of  value,  in  the  first
place,  because  what  actually  happens  frequently ­
  approximates  to  the  long-period
theoretical  result  though  it  never  exactly
corresponds  with  it  ;  and  in  the  second
place,  because  no  movement  can  be  understood
till  the  forces  producing  it  are  understood,
whether  a  force  is  ever  left  in  unrestrained
freedom  for  as  long  as  it  lasts  or  not.
The  economics  of  this  book  will  be  concerned
almost  exclusively  with  long-period  results.
These  results  are  known  as  normal.  In
contrast  with  them  short-period  results  are
sometimes  described  as  the  sub-normal.  The
reader  must  be  particularly  careful  not  to
fall  into  the  error  made  by  a  writer  who
complained  that  the  assumption  of  the  longperiod
  expresses  a  “  theory  of  perfectibility,”
and  implies  a  “  possible  state  of  perfection
in  the  material  world.”  He  judged  that
“  it  is  difficult  to  be  so  confident  about  the
present  trend  of  our  social  and  economic
strivings  as  to  continue  to  use  the  words
‘  in  the  long  run  ’  with  any  boisterous  hopefulness.” ­
  The  reader  will  understand  that
the  phrase  “  in  the  long  run  ”  expresses
neither  optimism  nor  pessimism,  but  simply
that  use  is  being  made  of  the  kind  of  hypothesis ­
  on  which  all  deductive  science  is  based.
        <pb n="35" />
        ■i-  t

32  POLITICAL  ECONOMY
The  long-period  result  may  be  overlaid,  so
to  speak,  as  the  surface  of  the  sea  is  by
waves  ;  but  even  when  storm  waves  make
the  ocean  a  tumult  tides  still  rise  and  fall.
Finally,  it  is  to  be  remarked  that  the
tendencies  to  be  studied  are  measurable,  and,
indeed,  are  actually  measured  in  the  course
of  our  every-day  doings,  in  terms  of  money.
Owing  to  this,  more  precise  generalisations
can  be  laid  down  than  would  be  possible
otherwise.
        <pb n="36" />
        CHAPTER  lî

DEMAND
We  all  know  that  ordinarily  the  lower  the
price  of  a  thing  the  larger  is  the  quantity  of
the  thing  that  can  find  purchasers.  The
economist  tries  to  state  precisely  the  truths*
with  their  limitations,  underlying  this  superficial ­
  knowledge.  It  is  usual  in  elementary
works  on  economics  to  trace  the  relation
between  price  and  purchases  to  the  relation
between  the  utility  of  things  and  their
supply  ;  but,  before  proceeding  to  bring  out
the  exact  connection  between  utility  and  the
consumption  of  articles  and  services,  we
must  make  up  our  minds  as  to  the  implications
with  which  the  term  “  utility  "  is  to  be
invested  in  this  work.
The  term  “  utility  ”  used  to  have  ineconomics ­
  a  meaning  far  different  from  that
which  is  customarily  assigned  to  it  to-day.
In  the  mouths  of  the  philosophers  known  as
Utilitarians,  the  utility  of  a  thing  meant  its
power  to  excite  pleasurable  feeling  which
33

c
        <pb n="37" />
        34

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

was  regarded  as  measurable.  The  so-called
Psychological  Utilitarians  used  to  hold  that
we  were  impelled  to  our  actions  by  this
feeling  element  as  motive  force,  and  by  its
opposite  ;  and  the  Ethical  Utilitarians  maintained ­
  in  addition  that  it  was  right  to  allow
ourselves  so  to  be  governed  provided  that
the  distribution  of  pleasure  corresponded
with  the  then  conceptions  of  equity.  To-day
cautious  psychologists  shun  dogmatising  about
the  impulses  which  set  on  foot  human  action  ;
and  the  economist  has,  therefore,  learnt,  or
should  have  learnt,  so  to  lay  the  foundations
of  his  science  in  demand  that  no  special
views  on  the  determination  of  human  action
are  implied,  and  his  science  is  not  left  in
compromising  company.  The  only  thing  of
which  we  can  be  quite  sure  is  that  people
choose  one  course  of  action  to  the  rejection
of  another,  and  choose  to  buy  one  thing
rather  than  another.  When  people  select
in  this  way,  we  may  say  that  they  exercise
preference.  Preference  is  the  fundamental
fact  with  which  the  economist  begins  the
construction  of  his  Science  of  Consumption.
And  it  must  be  firmly  grasped  that  the
existence  of  preferences  does  not  imply  that
people  always  seek  self-gratification.  We
work  for  others  as  well  as  ourselves,  and
        <pb n="38" />
        DEMAND

35

frequently,  for  the  best  of  motives,  choose
to  do  what  we  do  not  like.
It  happens,  however,  that  it  is  exceedingly
inconvenient  to  speak  of  demand  in  terms
of  preferences,  because  bare  preferences  are
expressible  only  in  ratios,  which  are  more
awkward  to  handle  than  simple  whole  numbers. ­
  It  is,  therefore,  customary  to  write
of  the  utilities  of  things  instead  of  the  preferences ­
  for  things,  and  to  say,  when  one  thing
is  preferred  to  another,  that  the  thing  preferred
has  greater  utility  than  the  other.  For  the
sake  of  brevity  I  shall  hereafter  write  invariably ­
  about  utilities,  but  I  shall  understand
by  them  merely  the  quantitative,  objective
expressions  of  preference  ;  and  the  student
would  act  prudently  if  he  got  into  the  habit,
on  reading  about  utilities,  of  registering
a  mental  note  to  the  effect  that  they  do  not
convey  any  particular  doctrine  with  regard
to  the  determination  of  human  action,  but  are
merely  symbols  standing  for  the  facts  of  choice.
We  may  now  proceed  to  amplify  and
qualify  the  statement  that  the  utility  of
things  diminishes  as  we  get  additional  supplies
of  them.  We  had  better  begin  by  carefully
scrutinizing  the  management  of  income  as  a
whole,  and  afterwards  concentrate  on  a
microscopic  analysis  of  the  relation  between
        <pb n="39" />
        36

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

utility  and  the  possession  of  individual
goods.  We  are  in  danger  of  slipping  into
making  baseless  assumptions,  and  therefore
of  reaching  unwarranted  conclusions,  when
we  rashly  skip  examining  experience  in  the
mass  and  hasten  to  deal  at  once  with  questions
of  detail.  Let  us  ask  then,  What  is  the
relation  between  utility  and  income  ?  bearing
in  mind  that  utility  is  to  be  taken  simply  as
a  label  objectively  representative  of  choice.
There  can  be  no  doubt  that  in  all  ordinary ­
  cases  the  utility  which  we  get  out  of
our  incomes  increases  at  a  diminishing  rate
as  income  increases,  at  least  after  a  time.
We  know  this  directly  from  our  every  day
experiences,  and  it  is  not  difficult  to  find
subjective  reasons  for  it.  We  always  try
instinctively  to  assuage  our  most  rgent
cravings  first  ;  consequently  when  fortune
brings  us  an  augmentation  of  income  we
realise,  if  we  have  not  realised  it  before,  that
the  desires  left  to  be  appeased  are  less  intense
than  those  which  received  prior  attention.
There  are  cases  to  which  the  generalisation
does  not  apply,  for  instance,  cases  in  which  the
whole  character  of  a  person’s  life  is  altered
when  his  income  has  reached  a  certain  figure,
but  such  exceptions  may  be  neglected  for
present  purposes.  The  declaration  that  an
        <pb n="40" />
        DEMAND

37

enlarged  income  is  not  accompanied  by  a
proportional  access  of  utility  may  be  called  the
law  of  the  diminishing  utility  of  income.
Our  first  step  in  analysis  having  been  completed, ­
  we  may  now  pass  on  to  inquire  whether
any  propositions  can  be  laid  down  connecting
the  utility  of  individual  things  with  the  quantity ­
  of  them  that  a  person  possesses.  It  will  be
discerned  at  once  that  this  enquiry  can  be  conducted ­
  on  three  different  assumptions.  It  may
be  supposed  (1)  that  the  person’s  possession  of
other  things  remains  as  before  ;  (2)  that  the
person’s  income  remains  as  before,  except
for  the  addition  of  further  increments  of  the
article  in  question,  but  that  the  person  is  at
liberty  to  rearrange  the  expenditure  of  his
income  laid  out  on  other  things  if  he  so  desire,
or  (3)  that  his  income  and  the  way  in  which
it  is  spent  may  vary.
In  the  first  case  it  is  unquestionable  that  the
utility  enjoyed  by  the  person  can  only  increase,
if  it  increases  at  all,  at  a  diminishing  rate  very
soon  after  consumption  begins.  Minute  supplies ­
  of  a  thing  might  at  first  simply  whet
the  individual’s  appetite  if  they  had  any
effect  at  all,  but  as  supplies  increased  they
would  take  from  the  keenness  of  its  edge.
'  The  same  conclusion  holds  of  the  second  case.
But  about  the  third  case  there  is  some  doubt.
        <pb n="41" />
        38

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

The  utilities  of  certain  things  are  closely
dependent  upon  the  supplies  that  we  possess
of  other  things,  and  as  the  supplies  of  these
other  things  become  more  abundant  the
value  of  the  first  things  might  appreciate  or
depreciate.  Consequently  we  must  not  affirm
that  to  any  individual  so  much  of  a  given
article  means  so  much  utility  quite  regardless
of  the  degree  and  nature  of  his  opulence.
Finally  it  must  be  remarked  that  the
generalisation  known  as  the  law  of  diminishing ­
  utility  is  commonly  understood  to  apply
to  the  second  case  considered  above  and  to
allege  that,  income  being  constant,  additional
supplies  of  one  article  add  to  satisfaction  at
a  diminishing  rate.
It  is  very  necessary  that  the  distinction
implied  above  between  total  utility  and
marginal  utility  should  be  made  explicit.
With  reference  to  income,  total  utility  is  the
sum  of  satisfaction  which  we  derive  from  our
aggregate  outlay,  while  marginal  utility  is
the  addition  made  to  total  utility  by  the
addition  of  another  unit  of  income,  say,  by
supplementing  income  to  the  extent  of  a
shilling  or  a  sovereign.  Any  unit  of  income
that  we  please  may  be  taken,  provided  that
we  make  it  very  small  in  relation  to  the  sum
total  of  income.  With  reference  to  particular
        <pb n="42" />
        DEMAND

89

articles  or  services,  total  utility  means  the
loss  of  satisfaction  which  would  be  sustained  by
the  complete  withdrawal  of  that  commodity
or  service,  while  the  marginal  utility  means
the  addition  made  to  our  total  satisfaction
by  the  acquisition  of  the  last  increment  of
the  commodity  or  -service.  The  diminution
spoken  of  in  the  law  of  diminishing  utility
refers  to  marginal  and  not  to  total  utilities;
though  total  utilities  may  themselves  contract
when  people  are  encumbered  with  things  of
which  they  want  no  more,  in  which  case
marginal  utilities  are  said  to  have  become
negative.
We  are  now  in  a  position  fully  to  grasp
the  conception  of  demand.  We  are  said  to
demand  a  thing  when  we  are  prepared  to  offer
something  of  value  for  it.  When  the  offer
is  made  in  terms  of  money  the  offer  is  said  to
be  a  demand  price.  Now  it  will  be  apparent
that  a  person  will  buy  more  of  a  thing  when
the  price  falls.  In  ordinary  circumstances,
since  the  marginal  utility  of  a  thing  drops
when  a  person  gets  more  and  more  of  it,
price  must  be  diminished  if  he  is  to  be  induced
to  purchase  larger  quantities.  Thus,  were  the
price  of  tea  18s.  a  pound,  I  would  buy  only
one  pound  a  year,  say  ;  but  if  the  price  were
        <pb n="43" />
        POLITICAL  ECONOMY

40

12s.,  I  would  buy  two  pounds  ;  if  9s.,  four
pounds  ;  if  6s.,  five  pounds,  and  so  on.  We
therefore  realize  that  there  is  one  almost
universal  law  of  demand,  namely,  that  the
lower  the  price  of  a  thing  which  can  be  bought
in  any  quantity,  large  or  small,  the  more  will
any  person  buy  of  it  if  he  buys  any  at  all.
In  framing  this  law  we  must  be  particular
to  bear  in  mind  that  demand  does  not  indicate
just  a  quantity  of  the  thing  demanded,  nor
just  a  price,  but  on  the  contrary,  many
quantities  and  many  prices,  and  even  more,
namely,  the  relations  between  quantities  and
prices.  And  we  must  be  equally  particular
to  remember  (if  we  care  about  secure  foundations) ­
  what  has  been  said  a  few  pages  back
concerning  utility,  and  bear  in  mind  that
demands  simply  measure  the  ratios  between
preferences.  So  I  should  feel  inclined  to  repeat
my  description  of  demands  as  “quantitative
objective  definitions  of  preferences,”  had
not  one  or  two  critics  opined  that  the  unsophisticated ­
  would  be  unlikely  to  understand  what
the  statement  means.
At  this  point  the  distinction  may  be  drawn
between  private  or  individual  demand  on  the
one  hand  and  public,  collective,  compound  or
market  demand  on  the  other  hand.  The
latter  means  the  demands  of  all  the  people  who
        <pb n="44" />
        DEMAND

41

buy  a  thing,  considered  together.  It  is  compounded, ­
  of  course,  of  individual  demands
and  obeys  the  same  law.  The  lower  the
price  the  larger  will  be  the  amount  bought.
Those  who  purchased  before  will  purchase  more
because  of  the  law  of  diminishing  utility  ;  and
some  who  previously  found  the  price  too  high
for  them  will  be  enabled  to  buy  a  little.
In  the  study  of  many  economic  problems
it  will  be  found  that  the  so-called  elasticity  of
demand  is  an  exceedingly  fruitful  conception.
It  applies  both  to  individual  demand  and
compound  demand.  Demand  is  said  to  be
very  elastic  when  a  small  drop  in  price
causes  a  large  addition  to  the  amount  sold.
It  is  said  to  be  only  slightly  elastic  when  a
small  drop  in  price  means  a  small  addition
to  the  amount  sold.  Because  of  the  law  of
demand  formulated  above,  when  price  drops
sales  are  bound  to  be  augmented  to  some
extent.  In  order  to  enable  us  to  distinguish
unhesitatingly  between  a  comparatively  elastic
demand  and  a  comparatively  inelastic  one,
it  is  usual  to  adopt  a  conventional  definition
of  the  point  at  which  the  one  becomes  the
other.  This  point  plays  the  same  part  as
freezing  point  with  reference  to  temperature.
Degrees  of  heat  or  coldness  can  be  measured
with  reference  to  freezing  point.  So  degrees
        <pb n="45" />
        42

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

of  elasticity  in  demand  can  be  measured  with
reference  to  the  elasticity  which  is  termed
“  unity.”  Demand  is  said  to  have  elastic
unity  when  a  fall  in  the  price  involves  such
increase  of  sales  that  the  total  amount  paid
for  the  aggregate  of  the  thing  sold  remains
the  same.  Beneath  is  represented  a  demand
with  an  elasticity  at  first  greater  than  unity,
then  equal  to  unity  and  finally  less  than
unity.  Let  us  suppose  that  the  article
referred  to  is  some  kind  of  soap.

Price  per  lb.  Total  sal  os  in  Total  receipts  in
in  pence.  lbs.  per  month.  pence  per  month.
10  ..  ..  30  ..  ..300
9  ..  ..  40  ..  ..  360
8  ..  ..  50  ..  ..  400
7  ..  ..  60  ..  ..420
6  ..  ..  70  ..  ..420
5  ..  ..  84  ..  ..  420
4  ..  ..  100  ..  ..  400
2  .  .  ..  150  ..  ..  300
1  ..  ..  250  ..  ..250
demand  is  greater  than
prices  lOd.  and  7d.,  less
than  unity  between  the  prices  5d.  and  Id.,
and  equal  to  unity  between  the  prices  7d.
and  5d.

The  elasticity  of
unity  between  the

One  of  the  simplest  generalisations  in
        <pb n="46" />
        DEMAND

43

economics  is  that  which  is  known  as  the  law  of
substitution,  indifference,  or  equi-marginal
returns.  It  is  simple—so  simple,  indeed,  that
one  might  at  first  feel  inclined  to  refuse  it  the
dignified  title  of  “  law  ”—but  its  recognition,
nevertheless,  has  led  to  the  most  far-reaching
consequences  in  economic  analysis.  In  a
spirit  of  some  exaggeration,  one  might  liken
its  role  to  that  of  the  law  of  the  survival
of  the  fittest  in  biology—another  absurdly
obvious  generalisation.  In  fact,  the  two  laws
are  not  merely  alike  but  akin  ;  as  is  apparent
when  we  take  any  example  of  substitution,
say,  substitution  in  consumption,  which  means
the  survival  in  choice  of  the  things  fittest  to
satisfy  some  direct  or  indirect  demand.  It
frequently  happens  in  science  that  the  profoundest
  truths  at  first  strike  one  as  selfevident
  and  unimportant.
The  law  of  substitution,  indifference,  or
equi-marginal  returns,  applies  not  merely  to
consumption  but  to  every  branch  of  economics.
For  the  present,  however,  I  shall  define  it  in
its  application  merely  to  consumption.  With
reference  to  consumption,  the  law  points  out
that  income  will  be  expended  in  such  a  way
that  the  marginal  utilities  of  different  things
to  any  person  will  be  made  the  same,  when
marginal  utilities  are  reckoned  with  respect
        <pb n="47" />
        44

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

to  a  common  unit  of  expenditure.  It  declares
that  I  shall  so  disburse  my  income  over  a
given  period  on  bread  and  tea  and  milk  and
clothes,  that  the  marginal  shillings  laid  out  in
acquiring  each  class  of  these  things  will  be
productive  of  the  same  utility.  The  truth  of
the  law  is  easily  established.  Its  proof
proceeds  (1)  by  showing  that  when  a  person’s
income  is  expended  according  to  the  law  the
utility  derived  from  it  is  maximised,  and  (2)
by  arguing  that  each  individual  will  try  to
maximise  the  satisfaction  derived  from  his
income.  People  are  not  compelled  to  do  the
best  for  themselves  with  the  means  at  their
disposal,  but  in  the  degree  in  which  they  are
reasonable  will  they  attempt  to  do  so  and
succeed  in  doing  so.
To  demonstrate  that  the  utility  of  income  is
maximised  when  the  law  of  substitution  is
observed  is  a  trifling  task.  Suppose  that  I
so  spend  money  on  milk  and  bread  that
the  last  penny  spent  on  bread  yields  more
utility  than  the  last  penny  spent  on  milk.
In  that  case  it  would  evidently  be  to  my
material  well-being,  other  things  being  equal,
to  reduce  my  outlay  on  milk  and  increase  my
outlay  on  bread,  because  by  so  acting  I  should
secure  a  utility  larger  than  the  one  sacrificed.
Gain  could  be  reaped  in  this  way,  by  transfer-
        <pb n="48" />
        DEMAND

45

ence  of  income  from  the  one  line  of  expenditure
to  the  other,  so  long  as  the  two  marginal
utilities  differed.  Hence,  I  should  try  to  get
the  two  marginal  satisfactions  equal.  What  is.
true  in  this  matter  of  two  things  is  evidently
true  of  any  number.
There  is  a  reason  for  most  things,  even
for  this  law’s  profusion  of  names.  Each  name
is  appropriate  and,  in  the  absence  of  any
fixation  of  terminology  by  convention,  some
writers  have  favoured  one  name  and  some
another.  The  law  is  called  the  law  of  equimarginal ­
  returns  because  when  it  is  observed
equi-marginal  returns  result.  It  is  called  the
aw  of  substitution  because  the  end,  equimarginal ­
  returns,  is  attained  by  the  process,
of  substitution  already  described.  It  is  called
the  law  of  indifference  because,  when  it  is
observed,  a  person’s  scheme  of  expenditure
is  so  devised  that  it  is  a  matter  of  indifference
to  him  whether  he  spends  a  minute  accession
of  income  on  any  one  thing  or  on  any  other.
Before  concluding  our  study  of  demand  and
expenditure,  a  few  words  are  needed  to  indicate
the  extent  to  which  the  laws  of  demand  and
expenditure  hold  in  actual  practice.  It  may
have  been  gathered  from  the  exposition  above
that  the  individual  is  unceasingly  engaged
in  balancing  the  utilities  of  different  courses
        <pb n="49" />
        46

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

of  action  against  one  another.  It  would
seem  to  imply  the  conception  of  a  person
simply  as  an  economic  registering  machine
which  automatically  reacts.  This  would  be
an  altogether  incorrect  conception.  In  the
first  place  the  individual  does  not  merely
register  utilities  objectively  presented  to  him  ;
on  the  contrary  he  creates  the  utilities  of
which  he  takes  account.  It  is  his  disposition
and  his  purpose  in  life  which  determine  what
things  shall  have  much  value  to  him  and
what  things  little  value.  In  the  second  place
the  registration  of  utilities,  which  are  to  be
regarded  as  the  product  of  a  person’s  character
and  his  contact  with  external  nature,  takes
place  to  a  large  extent  implicitly.  Of  much  of
our  balancing  of  utilities  we  are  unconscious  ;
the  operation  only  becomes  a  deliberate  one
when  the  expenditure  of  comparatively  large
sums  is  involved.  And  in  the  third  place  this
qualification  of  our  doctrine  must  be  admitted,
that,  as  regards  things  which  are  very  cheap  in
relation  to  our  incomes,  no  doubt  we  make
no  attempt  to  bring  their  marginal  utilities
into  relation  with  the  marginal  utilities  of
more  expensive  things.
We  must  always  remember,  not  only  that
an  individual’s  demands  are  the  outcome  of
his  upbringing  and  his  surroundings  as  well
        <pb n="50" />
        DEMAND

47

as  of  his  independent  individuality,  but  also
that  an  individual’s  system  of  demand,  taken
as  a  whole,  tends  to  settle  into  a  particular
form.  Some  appreciable  shock  is  needed  to
shake  it  out  of  this  form.  Hence  it  is  common
to  say  that  expenditure  is  settled  by  standards
of  life.  By  a  standard  of  life  is  meant  the
common  form  which  expenditure  tends  to
assume  in  any  given  class  of  the  community,
or  the  modes  of  disposing  of  income  which  are
typical  of  a  class.  For  some  purposes  it  is
convenient  to  distinguish  between  the  individual’s ­
  standard  of  living  and  the  standard
of  living  of  the  class  to  which  he  belongs.  The
former  is  usually  a  species  of  the  latter—the
latter  modified  by  his  idiosyncrasies.  It  is
only  in  exceptional  cases  that  the  standard
of  any  person  is  actually  in  conflict  with
the  standard  of  his  class.  The  individual’s
standard  is  largely  settled  by  his  habits,  and
habitual  action  is  universally  more  difficult
to  modify  than  action  which  is  not  habitual.
I  intend  now,  despite  its  alleged  difficulty,
to  introduce  a  conception  about  which  there
has  been  much  controversy,  but  one  which,
nevertheless,  in  my  opinion,  is  likely  to  play  in
the  future  a  leading  part  both  in  the  development ­
  of  economic  theory  and  in  the  practical
application  of  economic  teaching.  It  is  one
        <pb n="51" />
        48

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

of  the  subtlest  generalisations  wrung  by
Dr.  Marshall  out  of  the  facts  of  experience
after  analysing  them  to  the  last  dregs  by  the
marginal  method.  The  conception  is  known
as  that  of  consumers’  surplus.
Consumers’  surplus  has  been  used  in  two
ways  :  to  indicate  on  the  one  hand  a  surplus
of  utility  and  on  the  other  hand  the  expression
of  this  in  terms  of  money.  The  “  surplus  ”
in  utility  obtained  by  an  individual  from
anything,  consists  in  the  utility  which  he
obtains  from  that  thing  over  and  above  the
product  of  its  marginal  utility  and  the  quantity
of  it  that  he  consumes.  It  is  called  a  surplus
because  it  represents  a  gain  which,  so  to
speak,  the  individual  gets  for  nothing.  Let
us  take  a  particular  example.  Suppose  a
person  consumes  a  dozen  apples  a  week.
The  price  he  pays  for  apples  measures  the
difference  between  the  utility  to  him  of
twelve  apples  and  the  utility  to  him  of  eleven
apples,  in  short,  the  marginal  utility  of  the
apples.  He  buys  the  twelfth  apple  because
he  thinks  it  is  just  worth  his  while  to  do
so.  For  the  sake  of  clearness  of  statement
let  us  say  that  the  marginal  utility  of  apples
contains  ten  units  of  utility—carefully  bearing ­
  in  mind  at  the  same  time  that  there  are
no  such  things  as  units  of  utility.  Then,  if
        <pb n="52" />
        DEMAND

4£)

the  person  pays  a  Id.  for  each  apple,  for  the
last  penny  which  he  is  induced  to  spend  on
apples  he  obtains  ten  units  of  utility.  So  it  is
reasonable  to  affirm  that  the  marginal  utility
of  money  to  him  contains  ten  units  of  utility.
Because  of  the  law.of  equi-marginal  returns
another  penny  spent  by  him  in  anything  else
would  buy  only  ten  units  of  utility.  For  the
twelve  apples  he  pays  twelve  pennies,  which
consequently  represent  a  sacrifice  of  12  x  10
units  of  utility,  that  is  120  units  of  utility.
We  may  think  of  the  12  pence  as  withdrawn
from  expenditure  on  twelve  other  things,
involving  a  marginal  loss  in  respect  of  each
of  them  amounting  to  ten  units  of  utility.
Now  the  total  utility  of  twelve  apples  must
be  something  considerably  greater  than  twelve
times  their  marginal  utility,  owing  to  the  law
of  diminishing  utility.  If  their  total  utility
amounts  to  210  units,  the  person  whose  case  we
are  considering  would  enjoy  a  consumer’s  surplus ­
  of  90  units  of  utility,  that  is  210  minus  120.
Another  way  of  bringing  out  the  meaning
of  this  consumer’s  surplus  is  to  say  that  it
represents  the  clear  loss  which  would  be
sustained  by  the  individual  in  question  if  he
could  have  no  apples.  In  such  a  case  he
would  lose  their  total  utility,  210  units,  but
against  this  he  would  have  the  utility  got  by
        <pb n="53" />
        50

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

buying  other  things  with  the  twelve  pence,
namely  120  units.  The  clear  loss  is  90  units.
Most  psychologists  (who  are  scientists
devoted  to  the  study  of  mental  phenomena)
would  maintain  that  you  cannot  add  the
consumer's  surplus  of  one  person  to  the  consumer’s ­
  surplus  of  another  person,  because  no
relations  subsist  between  the  utilities  enjoyed
by  different  persons.  There  is  no  common
denominator  to  connect  my  preference  for
golf,  when  the  alternative  is  cricket,  with  the
preference  of  somebody  else  for  pictures  as
compared  with  statuary.  Utility  in  economics,
it  is  argued,  should  be  regarded  simply
as  an  objective  representation  of  the  fact  of
choice  and  not  as  implying  that  a  choice  of
mine  can  be  brought  into  preferential  relationship ­
  with  a  choice  expressed  by  anybody  else.
We  must  not  assume  that  choice  is  measurable
in  units  of  utility  that  are  the  same  for  all.
This  consideration  affords  sure  foothold  for
the  opinion  commonly  held  that  price,  while  it
measures  the  marginal  utilities  of  things  to  one
individual,  does  not  measure  marginal  utilities
as  between  different  individuals.  But,  in
support  of  this  opinion,  considerations  can
also  be  adduced  from  the  utilitarian  point
of  view  which,  given  that  point  of  view,
are  unassailable.  Even  were  there  such
        <pb n="54" />
        DEMAND

51

things  as  units  of  utility  the  same  for  me
as  for  any  other  person,  the  marginal  utility
of  a  thing  for  which  he  and  I  paid  the  same
price  would  not  necessarily  be  the  same  for
both  of  us  since  we  might  differ  in  respect  of
tastes  and  intensity,  of  wants  and  he  might
be  the  wealthier.  As  a  person  gets  wealthier,
the  marginal  utility  of  money  to  him  falls,
other  things  being  equal.  The  conclusion
to  which  the  argument  of  this  paragraph
meanders  is  that  the  surplus  in  utility  enjoyed
by  a  group  of  consumers  of  a  commodity  is
an  assemblage  of  diverse  things  which  cannot
be  added  to  one  another  to  make  up  a  thinkable ­
  whole.
Consumer’s  surplus  is  more  easily  comprehensible ­
  when  we  think  of  it  in  terms  of  money.
We  may  then  define  it  as  the  difference  between
what  a  person  does  give  for  a  thing  and  what
he  would  give  rather  than  be  deprived  of  the
thing  altogether.  If  I  would  give  £45  for  a
piano  upon  which  I  have  set  my  heart,  and
am  able  to  buy  it  for  £20,  I  enjoy  a  consumer’s
surplus  of  £25  on  my  acquisition.  The  £25
stands  for  what  I  have  saved  in  view  of  the
fact  that  I  was  not  compelled  to  give  as  much
for  the  piano  as  I  was  prepared  to  give.  Similarly ­
  we  may  interpret  the  surplus  in  the  case
of  the  apples  already  treated  in  terms  of  utility.
        <pb n="55" />
        52

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

For  the  twelve  apples  a  week  I  give  Is.  a
week,  but  rather  than  do  without  any  apples
I  would  give  for  the  twelve  Is.  9d.  My
consumer’s  surplus  reckoned  in  money  is,
therefore,  ninepence  on  the  apples.  For
convenience  let  us  call  this  expression  of  the
surplus  in  terms  of  money  monetary  consumer’s ­
  surplus.
To  make  the  notion  with  which  we  have
been  dealing  of  substantial  practical  value,  we
have  to  conceive  of  an  aggregate  monetary
surplus,  with  reference  to  any  commodity,
which  is  made  up  of  the  surpluses  of  a  number
of  different  individuals.  There  is  no  difficulty
in  doing  this,  as  it  is  perfectly  possible  to  add
together  sums  of  money  which  belong  to
different  people,  though  it  is  not  possible  to
conceive  of  the  addition  of  the  things  (preferences) ­
  to  which  these  sums  of  money  refer.
After  performing  the  operation  of  adding
together  consumer’s  surpluses  in  money,
we  must  not,  however,  fall  into  the  error
of  thinking  that  £1  worth  of  one  person’s
consumer’s  surplus  is  the  same  thing  as  £l
worth  of  another  person’s  consumer’s  surplus.
But  this  reservation  notwithstanding,  the
conception  of  a  consumers’  (in  the  plural,
observe)  monetary  surplus  is  of  value  because
it  is  not  unreasonable  to  suppose  that,  other
        <pb n="56" />
        DEMAND

53

things  being  equal,  the  destruction  of  a  large
monetary  surplus  connected  with  one  commodity ­
  is  likely  to  mean  greater  real  loss
than  the  destruction  of  a  smaller  surplus
connected  with  another  thing.  In  the  “  other
things  being  equal  is  impounded  such  a
proviso  as  the  following,  that  each  of  the  two
things  is  consumed  in  bulk  by  the  same
class  or  by  different  classes  in  about  the  same
proportions.
This  conclusion  will  instantly  suggest  some
of  the  uses  that  can  be  made  of  the  doctrine  of
consumers’  surplus.  In  taxation,  for  a  given
gain  on  the  part  of  the  Government,  one  tax
may  wipe  out  more  consumers’  surplus  than
another  tax.  The  one  that  wipes  out  least  is,
of  course,  to  be  preferred,  other  things  being
equal.  Hence  we  may  deduce  that  it  is  well,
in  the  absence  of  strong  reasons  to  the  contrary,
to  avoid  the  taxation  of  things  the  demand
for  which  is  highly  elastic,  because,  when
demand  is  of  this  kind,  a  small  tax  will  largely
reduce  the  consumption  and  so  the  consumers’
surplus.  It  is  an  equally  legitimate  inference
that  the  taxation  of  things  strongly  subject  to
increasing  returns  (which  will  be  explained  in
the  next  chapter)  is  to  be  avoided,  because  the
taxation  of  such  things  raises  price  by  substantially ­
  more  than  the  amount  of  the  tax,
        <pb n="57" />
        54

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

inasmuch  as  the  supply  price  (apart  from  the
tax)  of  the  smaller  quantity  is  higher  than
that  of  the  larger  quantity.  The  price  being
thus  doubly  elevated,  consumers’  surplus  is
doubly  sacrificed.
One  minor  difficulty  arising  out  of  the
conception  that  a  surplus  as  above  explained
is  met  with  in  consumption,  may  be  at  once
stated  and  removed.  It  is  derived  from  the
fact  that  the  initial  demands  for  absolute
necessities  of  life  are  indefinitely  high.  Anybody, ­
  for  example,  would  be  ready  to  give
all  that  he  had  for  a  little  water  rather  than
die  of  thirst.  In  cases  of  this  character,  in
reckoning  consumers’  surplus  we  must  leave
out  initial  demands  ;  but  only  very  few  of
the  particular  things  that  we  purchase  happen
to  be  strictly  essential  to  the  maintenance  of
life.
The  reader  will  not,  of  course,  allow  himself
to  fancy  that  consumer’s  surplus  exists
anywhere  as  a  separable  sum  of  something
which  can  be  pointed  to  as  the  surplus  and
labelled  as  such.  The  bare  idea  is  ridiculous  ;
and  did  it  in  any  sense  correspond  with  fact
consumer’s  surplus  would  have  been  discovered
ages  ago.  It  is  on  the  contrary  hidden  in
experience  as  the  ether  around  us—if  it  exist
—is  hidden  in  everything.  The  consumer’s
        <pb n="58" />
        DEMAND

55

surplus  got  from  a  thing,  regarded  as  a
saving  of  a  part  of  what  would  have  been
paid  for  the  thing  had  the  payment  of  its  full
value  been  unavoidable,  is  spent  on  other
things  and  so  becomes  merged  in  real  income,
that  is  income  not  in  money  but  in  goods.  And
it  is  true,  admittedly,  that  we  must  not
thoughtlessly  add  up  the  surpluses  got  by  an
individual  from  different  things  and  call  the
sum  his  total  consumer’s  surplus.  Take
away  one  article  from  a  person  and  his
demand  for  certain  other  articles  will  be
increased,  while  his  demand  for  certain
other  articles  will  be  decreased.  Some
articles  are  so  closely  related  in  demand  that
their  utilities  are  commingled—and  in  some
degree  the  utilities  of  all  things  are  commingled. ­
  One  thing  helps  to  create  the  utility
of  another  thing,  as  milk  does  that  of  tea  ;  in
which  case  they  are  said  to  be  complements.
Again  one  thing  undermines  the  utility  of
another  thing,  as  tea  does  that  of  coffee—-without
  tea  we  should  prize  coffee  more  highly
—in  which  case  they  are  called  substitutes.
Nevertheless  where  it  is  possible  to  make
due  allowance  for  the  actions  and  reactions
of  things  on  one  another’s  value  and  get  at
the  aggregate  consumer’s  surplus  with  reference ­
  to  some  individual  there  would  be  a
        <pb n="59" />
        56

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

meaning  in  the  conception.  What  is  it  ?
What  is  the  sense,  it  has  been  asked,  of
saying  that  an  income  of  £100  a  year  is  worth
£1,000  ?—for  that  is  in  effect  what  we  should
say.  Dr.  Marshall’s  answer  is  to  my  mind
complete  and  convincing  :—
“  Of  what  avail  is  it  to  say  that  the  utility
of  an  income  of  (say)  £100  a  year  is  worth
{say)  £1,000  a  year  ?  There  would  be  no  avail
in  saying  that.  But  there  might  be  use,  when
comparing  life  in  Central  Africa  with  life  in
England,  in  saying  that,  though  the  things
which  money  will  buy  in  Central  Africa  may
on  the  average  be  as  cheap  there  as  here,  yet
there  are  so  many  things  which  cannot  be
bought  there  at  all,  that  a  person  with  a
thousand  a  year  there  is  not  so  well  off  as  a
person  with  three  or  four  hundred  a  year  here.
If  a  man  pays  a  penny  toll  on  a  bridge,  which
saves  him  an  additional  drive  that  would  cost  a
shilling,  we  do  not  say  that  the  penny  is  worth
a  shilling,  but  that  the  penny  together  with
the  advantage  offered  him  by  the  bridge  (the
part  it  plays  in  his  conjuncture)  is  worth  a
shilling  on  that  day.  Were  the  bridge  swept
away  on  a  day  on  which  he  needed  it,  he  would
foe  in  at  least  as  bad  a  position  as  if  he  had
been  deprived  of  elevenpence.”
        <pb n="60" />
        DEMAND

57

The  reader  can  judge  for  himself  whether
the  alleged  fecundity  of  the  marginal  method
is  borne  out  by  its  application  to  demand.  We
have  strictly  observed  the  limitations  which
render  analysis  of  social  facts  so  difficult.
We  have  taken  the  experiences  of  a  person  in
respect  of  his  wanting  or  demanding  as  an
indivisible  whole,  as  we  are  told  that  we  must
by  the  most  competent  psychologists.  And
we  have  made  no  suspicious  assumptions  about
the  basis  of  these  experiences  ;  for  indeed  we
have  made  no  assumptions  at  all  as  regards
their  basis,  but  have  on  the  contrary  accepted
as  our  data  the  bare  facts  of  wanting  and
demanding  as  they  are  directly  revealed.
But  the  door  has  not  thereupon  been  shut
against  our  scientific  aspirations.  By  the
marginal  method,  the  simple  device  in  this
case  of  watching  the  differences  made  to  the
totality  of  a  person’s  experience—by  differentiating ­
  experience,  as  it  is  expressed  in  the
first  chapter—we  have  reached,  under  the
guidance  of  Dr.  Marshall  in  particular,  generalisations, ­
  which  are  adequately  explanatory  of
demand  for  economic  purposes  and  illuminating ­
  (particularly  the  doctrine  of  consumer’s
surplus)  from  the  point  of  view  of  a  philosophy
of  life,  and  which,  as  will  transpire  later,  in
conjunction  with  other  generalisations  having
        <pb n="61" />
        58

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

equally  a  one-sided  aspect,  enable  the  social
scientist  to  lay  bare  the  ramified  system  of
law  inherent  in  the  economical  functioning
of  communities.
At  this  point,  despite  the  chance  of  confusion, ­
  a  new  idea  must  be  attached  to  the
results  of  our  analysis  of  demand  by  the
marginal  method.  The  term  “  marginal  ”  is
constantly  employed  with  a  meaning  different
from,  though  related  to,  that  ascribed  to  it
above.  It  is  applied  not  merely  to  the
final  increment  of  a  class  of  things  but  also
to  any  particular  thing  in  the  class  which  is
only  just  good  enough  to  be  used.  When  the
second  meaning  is  intended,  it  would  save
misapprehension  if  the  expression  “  marginal
quality  ”  were  used.  Let  me  illustrate  the
distinction.  If  I  pick  twenty  roses  the
twentieth  is  the  marginal  rose,  and  the  addition ­
  made  by  the  twentieth  to  the  satisfaction
derived  by  me  from  the  roses  is  called  the
marginal  utility  of  twenty  roses  to  me  at  the
time.  Now  the  twenty  roses  are  not  equally
perfect.  The  least  perfect  of  the  twenty,  the
one  on  the  margin  of  being  rejected,  is  also
loosely  designated  the  marginal  rose,  or,  as  we
had  better  say,  the  rose  of  marginal  quality.
Similarly,  of  one  hundred  workmen  employed
on  a  job,  any  individual  who  is  only  just
        <pb n="62" />
        DEMAND

59

good  enough  to  get  employment  is  called  the
marginal  workman  or  the  workman  of  marginal
quality.  Also  the  employer  in  an  industry
whose  capacity  only  just  attains  the  level
which  enables  him  to  make  a  living  in  the
industry  is  the  employer  of  marginal  quality.
It  is  exceedingly  important  that  the  distinction ­
  between  these  two  uses  of  marginal  should
be  firmly  grasped.
We  are  now  adequately  equipped  to  define
wealth  and  value.  Broadly  understood  all
that  people  want  is  wealth.  But  sometimes
the  conception  is  narrowed  to  exclude  things
that  are  accessible  to  all  and  unlimited  in
quantity  such  as  air  ;  and  sometimes  in
addition  the  qualification  is  introduced  that
desirable  things  to  be  wealth  must  have
been  produced  by  labour.  Value  may  mean
value  in  use  or  value  in  exchange.  By  the
former  is  meant  the  utility,  as  above  defined,
of  things  that  are  wanted  ;  and  by  the  latter
is  meant  the  quantity  of  other  things  that
the  thing  in  question  will  exchange  for.  The
value  in  exchange  of  an  article  or  service  is
evidently  dependent  upon  its  marginal  utility
to  would-be  purchasers  and  the  marginal
utilities  of  the  things  offered  for  it.  When
what  is  offered  is  money,  value  in  exchange  is
        <pb n="63" />
        «o

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

called  demand  price.  It  is  important  that
ethical  ideas  should  not  be  read  into  the
conceptions  of  wealth  and  value  when  they
are  being  employed  in  their  everyday  sense.
If  our  aim  is  to  indicate  what  people  ought  to
want  instead  of  what  they  do  want,  we  had
better  speak  of  ethical  wealth  and  ethical
value.
The  introduction  of  the  notion  of  wealth
conceived  from  the  ethical  point  of  view  raises
issues  which,  though  they  are  not  primarily
economic,  if  they  are  economic  at  all,  need  not,
I  think,  be  shirked,  particularly  as  their
examination  will  serve  to  clarify  ideas  vaguely
hinted  at  in  Chapter  I.  In  opposition  to  the
popular  economics  of  his  day,  Ruskin  wrote
as  follows  :—“  There  is  no  wealth  but  Life—
Life,  including  all  its  powers  of  love,  of  joy,
and  of  admiration  ”  ;  and  again,  “  To  be
valuable  is  to  avail  towards  life  ”  ;  and  again,
“  Wealth  is  the  possession  of  the  valuable  by
the  valiant  ”—and  in  the  highest  sense  he  was
right.  All  that  we  call  wealth  is  only  of
value  because  it  conduces  to  the  great  ultimate
value  which  means  conscious  living  properly
conceived—“  valiant  ”  living.  The  former  is
economic  value  and  is  relative  to  the  end  which
it  subserves  ;  the  latter  we  may  call  absolute
value.  Now  the  curious  thing  is  that  absolute
        <pb n="64" />
        DEMAND

6i

value  is  not  conceivable  as  a  quantity,  or  at
most  is  barely  conceivable  as  a  quantity,
whereas  economic  values  are  conceivable  as
quantities  and  are  moreover  measurable. 1
It  is  true  that  the  thorough-going  Utilitarians
thought  of  absolute,  value  as  a  quantity—
as  a  simple  sum  of  economic  values  viewed  as
atoms  of  pleasure,  or  whatever  else  they  liked
to  call  the  feeling  elements  which  in  their
philosophy  they  treated  arithmetically—but
once  the  atomistic  view  of  experience  is
departed  from,  and  economic  value  becomes
merely  the  expression  of  preferential  relations,
absolute  value  is  shifted  on  to  a  plane  of  its
own  where  measurement  may  be  impossible.
For  what  after  all  are  the  economic  values  ?
It  has  been  laid  down  above  that  they  represent ­
  no  more  than  preferences.  Now  these
preferences  have  their  origin  in  our  implicit
notions  of  absolute  value  and  mean  no
more  than  relative  degrees  of  imagined
conduciveness  to  this  absolute  value.  And
evidently  the  thing  to  which  economic  goods
conduce  cannot  be  measured  against  the
means  by  which  it  is  brought  about,  if  these
1  My  colleague,  Professor  Unwin,  suggested  to  me
the  significance  of  this  point,  particularly  in  relationto
  the  seeming  conflict  between  economic  and  idealistic
points  of  view,
        <pb n="65" />
        POLITICAL  ECONOMY

62
means  are  not  measurable  absolutely  but
only  in  relation  to  one  another.  Here,  it
may  be  pointed  out,  is  to  be  found  an  explanation ­
  of  the  indeterminate  value  of  initial
increments  of  indispensable  goods.  Whenever ­
  a  means  to  the  end  which  gives  the
impulses  measured  in  demand—the  end  consisting, ­
  as  has  been  said,  in  harmonious
living  according  to  some  standard—whenever
such  a  means  is  absolutely  indispensable,  it
ceases  to  have  the  property  of  relative  conduciveness ­
  and  its  measurement  becomes
impossible.  These  points  are  worth  a  fugitive
notice  for  the  sake  of  the  student  with  a
philosophical  bent,  but  it  must  be  understood
that,  inasmuch  as  the  economist  qua  economist
need  not  go  behind  preferences,  no  dogmatic
pronouncements  on  philosophical  issues  are
here  intended.
        <pb n="66" />
        CHAPTER  III

SUPPLY  AND  ITS  RELATION  TO  DEMAND
It  has  become  a  commonplace  to  say  that  the
price  of  things  is  settled  by  demand  and
supply.  The  statement,  though  true,  gives
little  information  so  long  as  the  meanings  of
demand  and  supply  remain  unexplained.
Demand  has  already  been  dissected.  We  have
discerned  that  it  expresses  the  relation  between
prices  and  quantities  bought,  declaring  that
so  much  will  be  bought  at  one  price  and  so
much  at  another  price,  and  that  it  is  derived
from  the  marginal  utilities  of  things  to  consumers. ­
  We  have  now  to  interpret  supply.
It  too  expresses  a  relation  and  declares  that
at  one  price  one  quantity  will  be  produced
and  at  another  price  another  quantity.
This  statement  must  be  expanded.
Let  us  think  of  an  industry  as  constituted
of  half  a  dozen  businesses  or  firms.  Each  of
these  producing  units  has  its  own  cost  of  production ­
  (meaning  cost  of  production  per  unit
of  output),  and  it  is  exceedingly  unlikely  that
03
        <pb n="67" />
        64

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

the  cost  of  production  of  one  firm  will  be  identical ­
  with  that  of  another,  because  all  employers
do  not  possess  the  same  ability  and  application, ­
  workmen  are  not  indistinguishable  from
one  another  in  respect  of  capacity,  and  there
are  differences  as  regards  productive  value
between  the  several  units  of  other  agents  in
production.  The  business  which  has  the
misfortune  to  function  with  the  highest  cost
of  production  is  known,  as  we  have  seen,  as
the  marginal  business,  or  business  of  marginal
quality.
With  a  view  to  trimming  the  ragged  edges  of
our  ideas,  let  us  take  a  particular  case.  Let
us  imagine  an  industry  engaged  in  the  manufacture ­
  of  some  kind  of  braid.  Let  there  be
four  firms,  A,  B,  C,  D,  and  let  their  costs
of  production  per  yard  of  braid  be  6d.,  7d.,
6&amp;amp;d.,  and  6|d.  respectively.  Then  B  is  called
the  marginal  firm  because  it  has  the  highest
cost  of  production,  namely,  7d.  Let  us
imagine  that  the  output  of  the  four  firms  taken
together  is  100,000  yards  of  braid  per  year
Then,  if  100,000  yards  are  to  be  sold,  the
price  must  be  at  least  7d.,  because,  if  it  were
not,  it  would  not  pay  the  firm  B  to  produce.
In  its  cost  of  production  of  7d.  we  have  included ­
  adequate  remuneration  for  all  the
factors  in  production,  including  the  employer.
        <pb n="68" />
        E

SUPPLY  AND  DEMAND

65

Were  it  to  receive  continuously  less  than  7d.
a  yard  for  its  output  the  pay  of  some  at  least
of  its  agents  would  have  to  be  reduced  to  an
inadequate  level,  and  they  would  consequently ­
  be  disposed  to  seek  some  other
occupation,  and  even  if  they  did  not  the  gaps
in  their  ranks  created  by  time  would  wait  in
vain  to  be  filled  up.  Hence,  we  may  conclude
at  once  that  the  supply  price  for  a  given  output ­
  must  tend  in  the  long  run  to  equal  at  least
the  highest  of  the  costs  involved  in  the  attainment ­
  of  that  output.  And  it  cannot  for  long
be  more.  Were  the  demand  price  for  100,000
yards  of  braid  per  year  more  than  7d.,  and
were  the  price,  under  the  influence  of  the
competition  of  the  buyers,  forced  up  to  the
demand  price,  as  it  would  be,  productive  agents
would  be  attracted  to  the  industry  because  in
such  circumstances  producers  and  capital
in  the  industry  would  be  receiving  more  than
normal  remuneration.  So  we  may  suppose
that  another  firm  would  be  added  to  the
four  already  in  existence.  Premise  that  the
cost  of  production  of  the  fifth  firm  is  7|d.
If  this  were  the  highest  cost  under  the  new
conditions,  the  new  firm,  which  we  shall  call
E,  would  be  the  marginal  firm  under  the  new
conditions  and  the  supply  price  would  reach
7£d.  for  an  output  of  five  firms.  Let  us  take
        <pb n="69" />
        66

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

it  for  the  sake  of  argument  that  the  output
of  the  five  firms  is  120,000  yards.  Then  the
supply  price  for  an  output  of  120,000  yards
would  be  7jd.  Continuing  this  line  of  reasoning ­
  we  could  construct,  in  theory  at  any  rate,
a  schedule  of  supply  prices  for  all  possible
outputs.  The  highest  cost  of  production  (as
above  defined)  for  a  given  output  is  loosely
called  the  marginal  cost  of  production.  With
a  view  to  avoiding  an  ambiguity  that  will
appear  later,  it  is  better  to  call  it  the
cost  of  production  (per  unit  of  output)  of
the  marginal  firm  when  there  is  any  chance
of  a  misunderstanding  of  the  shorter  expression. ­

So  far  our  course  has  been  plain  sailing,
but  we  now  reach  troubled  waters.  We  have
assumed  above  that  the  new  firm  E  will
have  a  cost  of  production  higher  than  that
reached  by  any  of  the  firms,  A,  B,  C,  and  D,
under  the  old  conditions.  But  this  would  not
necessarily  be  the  case.  The  new  firm  might
conceivably  have  a  cost  of  production  lower
than  the  old  marginal  cost,  and  yet  the  highest
of  all  the  costs  under  the  new  conditions.
After  the  new  firm  had  appeared  and  the
industry  had  been  made  larger,  greater  specialism—of ­
  labour,  machinery  and  businesses—
would  be  likely  to  pervade  the  industry  event-
        <pb n="70" />
        SUPPLY  AND  DEMAND

67

ually,  and  all  specialism  means  economy  in
production.  Moreover  the  augmented  industry
would  offer  a  larger  market  to  the  subsidiary
industries,  which  are  the  industries  engaged
in  meeting  its  wants  for  appliances  and  accessories, ­
  and  they  would,  therefore,  be  able  to
supply  it  with  its  requirements  more  cheaply.
Moreover  it  is  possible  that  transportation
in  connection  with  the  industry  would  so
develop  that  the  cost  of  carriage  in  relation  to
the  industry  would  be  reduced.  Enough  has
been  said  to  suggest  the  possibility,  which  will
frequently  be  found  borne  out  by  fact,  that
with  the  expansion  of  an  industry  marginal
cost  might  fall.
But  just  as  a  new  firm  may  have  beneficial
effects  upon  existing  firms  and  depress
their  expenses,  so  it  may  have  deleterious
effects  upon  them  and  force  up  their
expenses.  Consider  the  case  of  farming  in
a  densely  packed  country.  An  increased
demand  for  farm  products,  meaning  an  increase ­
  of  the  farming  classes  and  of  the
capital  devoted  to  farming,  would  compel
cultivators  to  work  the  old  land  more  intensively ­
  and  bring  new  land,  inferior  to  the
worst  of  the  old,  under  the  plough.  So  costs
would  rise.  Of  course  these  tendencies  to  an
enhanced  supply  price  might  be  counteracted
        <pb n="71" />
        68

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

to  some  extent  by  the  greater  scope  afforded
for  specialism.
We  are  here  in  touch  with  the  conceptions  of
increasing  and  decreasing  returns.  When  the
enlargement  of  an  industry  is  accompanied  by
a  rise  in  marginal  cost  it  is  usual  to  say  that
the  industry  is  subject  to  decreasing  returns.
But  when  the  enlargement  of  an  industry  is
accompanied  by  a  fall  in  marginal  cost,  it  is
usual  to  say  that  it  is  subject  to  increasing
returns.  When  marginal  costs  remain  the
same  it  is  said  that  the  industry  is  subject  to
constant  returns.  Why  these  phrases  “  increasing ­
  returns,”  “  decreasing  returns,”  and
“  constant  returns  ”  are  employed  in  the
cases  imagined  will  be  readily  grasped.  If
the  cost  of  production  of  the  new  marginal
firm  is  beneath  that  of  the  old  marginal  firm,
the  output  per  unit  of  cost  of  the  former  firm
must  be  greater  than  the  output  per  unit  of
cost  of  the  latter.  The  outputs  or  returns  of
the  industry  at  the  margin  will,  therefore,  have
increased  with  an  extension  of  the  industry.
Hence  the  use  of  the  term  “  increasing
returns,”  and  the  equal  appropriateness  of  the
terms  “  decreasing  returns  ”  and  “  constant
returns  ”  in  the  cases  to  which  they  apply.
The  conceptions  of  increasing,  decreasing,
        <pb n="72" />
        SUPPLY  AND  DEMAND

69

and  constant  returns  must  not  be  confounded
with  the  so-called  laws  of  increasing,  decreasing, ­
  and  constant  returns.  Let  us  confine
our  attention  for  the.  moment  to  increasing
returns  and  remember  that  all  that  is  affirmed
about  it  applies  mutatis  mutandis  to  decreasing
and  constant  returns.  The  conception  of
increasing  returns  has  been  explained.  Now
the  law  of  increasing  returns  is  best  interpreted,
in  my  opinion,  as  defining  the  conditions  under
which  increasing  returns  with  reference  to
industries  are  met  with.  There  is  not  yet
among  economists  complete  agreement  upon
this  matter  ;  but  in  a  brief  introduction  to
economic  theory  I  must  be  content  to  put  forward ­
  my  own  views,  which  are  those  of  others
also,  as  regards  the  most  appropriate  interpretation, ­
  while  warning  the  reader  that  they
are  not  universally  accepted  I  should  take  it,
then,  that  the  law  of  increasing  returns  defines
the  conditions  under  which  increasing  returns
are  met  with  in  industries.  These  conditions
can  be  easily  formulated,  but  we  may  formulate ­
  them  at  different  levels  of  abstraction  ;
and  it  goes  without  saying  that  the  more
complete  the  abstraction  the  more  universal
will  the  law  be.  It  will  probably  be  a  convenience ­
  to  recognise  two  laws,  namely,  the
abstract  law  and  the  realistic  law.  I  shall
        <pb n="73" />
        70

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

first  enunciate  the  abstract  law  and  the
corresponding  abstract  law  of  decreasing
returns  and  briefly  justify  them,  and  afterwards ­
  proceed  to  enunciate  and  explain  the
realistic  uniformities.
Abstractly  the  law  of  increasing  returns
affirms  that  when  an  industry  enlarges  there
must  be  increasing  returns  (that  is  to  say,  the
marginal  cost  of  production  must  fall),  provided—and ­
  this  is  a  significant  point—that
there  is  no  dearth  of  agents  in  production  at
least  equal  in  quality  to  those  engaged  at  the
old  margin.  The  truth  of  this  generalisation
will  be  immediately  apparent.  When  the
industry  enlarges  all  parts  of  its  working  will
tend  to  become  more  specialised,  and  specialism ­
  will  tend  more  thoroughly  to  interpenetrate
the  industries  subsidiary  to  it.  Specialising
is  economical,  so,  if  nothing  happens  to
counteract  its  effects,  the  marginal  cost  of
production  must  fall.  Now  the  only  thing
which  could  counteract  its  effects  would  be
a  limitation  of  suitable  agents  in  production
at  least  equal  in  economic  value  to  those  at
the  old  margin  ;  and  the  possibility  of  this
has  been  rejected.  Hence  the  inevitable
tendency  to  increasing  returns  in  the  circumstances ­
  described.  But  we  must  not,  of
course,  jump  to  the  conclusion  that,  when-
        <pb n="74" />
        SUPPLY  AND  DEMAND

71

ever  there  is  a  limitation  of  agents  in  production ­
  of  a  high  quality,  increasing  returns  is
impossible.  Were  the  limitation  not  serious,
or  were  the  gains  from  the  new  specialism
considerable,  it  might  still  be  that  costs  in  the
new  marginal  firm  would  be  beneath  those  in
the  old  marginal  firm.
The  abstract  law  of  decreasing  returns  is  the
correlative  of  the  abstract  law  of  increasing
returns.  It  declares  that  when  the  supply
of  some  agent  in  production  is  narrowly
restricted,  and  an  industry  absolutely  depending ­
  upon  it  enlarges  nevertheless,  decreasing
returns  must  eventually  supervene.  On  any
practical  example  being  taken,  it  will  be
perceived  that  it  must  be  so.  Suppose  that
the  population  on  an  island  of  100  square
miles  has  to  feed  itself  from  the  produce  of  its
own  land.  Sooner  or  later,  were  the  population ­
  to  grow  steadily,  there  would  be  such  a
relatively  inadequate  area  from  which  to
obtain  the  food  of  the  people  that  every  addition ­
  to  population  would  result  in  additions
to  the  produce  which  constantly  became  less
in  amount,  and  the  cost  of  food  would  rise.
For  a  time  the  tendency  to  decreasing
returns  might  be  counteracted  by  the  advantages ­
  of  specialism,  but  the  counteraction
at  some  time  would  cease  and  the  tendency
        <pb n="75" />
        72  POLITICAL  ECONOMY
to  decreasing  returns  would  pass  into
actuality
The  realistic  laws  of  increasing  and  decreasing ­
  returns  are  derived  from  observation
of  actual  economic  conditions  ;  in  short,  they
are  inductively  established  ;  but  at  the  same
time,  as  in  the  case  of  other  inductive  generalisations, ­
  for  their  complete  explanation  deduction ­
  must  be  enlisted.  The  realistic  law  of
increasing  returns  declares  that  an  enlargement ­
  of  a  manufacture  is  usually  accompanied ­
  by  increasing  returns.  The  law  holds
generally  because  manufacture  is  seldom
confronted  with  a  dearth  of  any  essential
agents  which  play  a  part  in  settling  the  cost
of  production.  The  new  labour,  the  new
machines,  the  new  employers  are  not  likely  to
prove  inferior  in  any  marked  degree  to  those
already  incorporated  in  the  industry.  Material
may  be  an  exception,  but  in  most  manufacturing ­
  the  cost  of  material  forms  a  small  part  of
the  cost  of  production.  It  is  not  probable,
therefore,  that  in  manufacture  the  economies
of  specialism  associated  with  expansion  will
meet  with  any  serious  counteracting  influences.
The  realistic  law  of  decreasing  returns  proclaims ­
  that  efforts  to  obtain  larger  supplies  of
natural  products  are  usually  accompanied  by
decreasing  returns.  Obviously,  in  the  deter-
        <pb n="76" />
        SUPPLY  AND  DEMAND

73

ruination  of  the  results  of  such  efforts,  nature
plays  a  predominant  part,  and  the  best  and
most  conveniently  situated  natural  resources
are  strictly  limited  in  quantity.
It  is  hardly  needful  to  say  that  the  realistic
laws  of  returns  and  the  abstract  laws  of  returns
supplement  one  another.  They  both  relate
to  the  same  facts,  broadly  speaking;  but
while  the  realistic  laws  have  a  more  practical
value  in  adding  directly  to  our  information
about  economic  affairs,  as  the  latter  immediately ­
  present  themselves  to  us,  it  is  the
abstract  laws  which  have  the  greater  speculative ­
  value  in  satisfying  our  minds  as  to  the
causes  of  things.  One  defect  of  the  realistic
laws  is  that  they  cannot  be  universally
affirmed.  We  have  to  introduce  such  qualifying ­
  phrases  as  “usually”  or  “generally.”
The  abstract  laws  attain  absolute  universality,
but  only  at  the  sacrifice  of  immediate  applicability. ­

All  this  is  a  digression,  though  a  necessary
digression.  We  may  now  pick  up  the  main
thread  of  our  argument,  and  at  once  hasten  to
unite  it  with  our  earlier  exposition  of  demand.
The  supplies  of  reproducible  things  we  have
seen  depending  upon  ruling  prices.  When
constant  returns  is  found  there  is  one  supply
        <pb n="77" />
        74

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

price  only  at  which  as  much,  or  as  little,  as  is
wanted  will  be  produced.  But  when  decreasing ­
  returns  rules  for  the  larger  output  a  higher
price  must  be  paid,  and  when  increasing
returns  rules  the  larger  output  brings  such
economies  that  the  supply  price  falls.  Supply
prices  in  conjunction  with  demand  prices
settle  the  market  prices  of  reproducible  things.
And  they  also  settle  the  prices  of  nonreproducible
  things,  but  in  this  latter  case
“supply  prices”  have  no  reference  to  cost
of  production.  They  must  be  taken  to  mean
merely  the  prices  at  which  owners  will  part
with  different  quantities  of  the  non-reproducible ­
  things  in  question  in  their  possession.
Let  us  put  the  relations  between  demand
prices  and  supply  prices  in  a  table  relating
to  some  industry  or  other.
Output  in  Demand  Supply
tons.  price.  price.

In  this  case,  to  which  decreasing  returns  has
been  supposed  to  apply,  price  would  be  16s.  6d.,

1,000
1,100
1,200
1,300
1,400
1,500

17/6
17/-16/8

16/6
16/4
16/-16/2


16/3
16/5
16/6
16/7
16/9
        <pb n="78" />
        SUPPLY  AND  DEMAND

75

and  the  amount  sold  would  be  1,300  tons.
Were  the  output  to  increase  to  1,400  tons
the  supply  price  of  the  marginal  firm  would
be  3d.  a  ton  above  the  market  price,  and,
as  this  would  mean  that  productive  agents,  or
some  of  them  at  any  rate,  were  working  for
inadequate  remuneration,  the  output  would
contract.  But,  were  the  output  1,200  only,
and  the  market  price  16s.  8d.  in  consequence,
all  producers  would  be  doing  exceptionally
well,  and  others,  together  with  capital,  would
be  attracted  into  the  industry  so  that  the
output  would  expand.  By  “  output,”  of
course  is  intended  output  in  some  unit  of
time,  say  a  year.
Generalising  we  may  say  that  the  price  of
a  commodity  will  be  the  price  at  which  equal
quantities  are  demanded  and  supplied,  provided ­
  that  a  slight  addition  to  the  supply
would  mean  a  supply  price  above  the  demand
price,  and  a  slight  reduction  of  the  supply
would  mean  a  supply  price  below  the  demand
price.  There  may  be,  but  there  is  not  likely
to  be,  more  than  one  such  price.  It  is  only
possible  when  increasing  returns  rules,  and,
if  it  does,  is  least  likely  when  demand  is
highly  inelastic.
A  difficulty  may  have  suggested  itself  to  the
reader.  It  would  appear  to  follow  from  the
        <pb n="79" />
        76

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

foregoing  that  the  way  to  get  larger  supplies
when  increasing  returns  rules  is  to  offer  lower
prices—which  seems  absurd  and  is  absurd.
Larger  outputs  are  always  induced  by  higher
and  never  by  lower  prices.  The  explanation
of  the  seeming  absurdity  is  this,  that  when
price  has  risen,  and  a  larger  output  is  got,
price  will  begin  to  subside  until  a  level  lower
than  the  old  is  reached.  Our  generalisations
relate,  not  to  immediate  consequences,  nor
to  such  as  appear  soon,  but  to  the  consequences ­
  which,  other  things  being  equal,
must  be  brought  about  in  the  long  period.
The  exact  scientific  implications  of  the  long
period  have  been  laid  bare  in  our  first  chapter.
This  will  be  the  most  suitable  break  in  our
exposition  to  introduce  a  qualifying  idea,
relating  to  all  the  foregoing  and  much  that
follows,  an  idea  which  has  hitherto  been
reserved  in  order  to  avoid,  in  the  first  instance,
a  certain  complication  in  the  theory  of  price.
The  idea,  which  needs  only  to  be  stated  to  be
admitted,  is  that  cost  of  selling,  as  well  as
cost  of  producing  proper,  governs  price.
When  therefore  I  speak  of  cost  of  production,
in  relation  to  the  settlement  of  supply  prices,
I  must  be  taken  to  include  in  production
all  those  processes,  whether  industrial  or  commercial, ­
  which  are  antecedent  to  the  receipt
        <pb n="80" />
        SUPPLY  AND  DEMAND

77

of  the  thing  produced  by  the  person  whose
consequent  disbursement  makes  the  price  that
we  are  studying.
The  theory  of  which  the  presentment  is
now  finished,  concerning  the  determination  of
the  prices  of  things,  is  unquestionably  sound
in  substance  and  moreover  sufficient  as  a
rough  working  engine.  But  it  will  not  do,
in  the  form  in  which  it  has  been  presented,  as
a  final  account  of  the  matter.  It  is  incomplete. ­
  It  ascribes  the  settlement  of  the  price
of  a  reproducible  thing  to  tendencies  for
demand  price  on  the  one  hand,  and  the
average  cost  of  production  (meaning  cost  of
production  per  unit  of  output)  of  the  marginal
firm  on  the  other  hand,  to  attain  equivalence  :
but  it  leaves  unexplained  the  position  of  the
margin  so  conceived  and  the  determination  of
the  output  of  the  marginal  firm  which  helps
to  settle  its  average  cost  of  production.  Why,
for  example,  in  the  case  of  the  braid  industry,
taken  at  the  beginning  of  this  chapter,  should
there  be  four  firms  producing  braid  ?  Why
not  three  firms,  each  firm  producing  more,  so
that  the  marginal  firm  would  be  the  third  in
efficiency  instead  of  the  fourth  ?  In  this
event,  there  being  greater  efficiency  in  the
marginal  firm  presumably,  would  not  mar-
        <pb n="81" />
        78

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

ginal  cost  be  lower  ?  In  the  theory,  as  we
have  put  it,  no  answer  is  found  to  these
questions  ;  demonstrably,  then,  the  theory  is
leaky.  To  answer  these  questions  must  be
our  next  task  if  our  aim  is  completeness  of
theory.
Our  primary  objective  must  be  to  bring  to
light  the  influences  governing  the  sizes  of
businesses  or  firms.  We  shall  take  for  study
a  firm  which  is  not  cramped  for  want  of
capital  and  which  can  obtain  all  the  orders
that  it  is  capable  of  carrying  out  at  a  sufficiently ­
  low  cost.  Let  us  try  to  imagine  how
the  employer  at  the  head  of  such  a  firm  would
be  determined  in  laying  down  the  limits  of
his  business  Though  many  firms  are  not
organised  on  a  private  basis,  but  have  been
constructed  as  companies,  or  transformed
into  companies,  or  organised  in  the  co-operative ­
  form,  I  speak  of  the  “  employer  ”  at
the  head  of  the  business,  because  the  more
complicated  types  of  business  organisation
introduce  no  new  elements  which  affect  the
character  of  the  problem  with  which  we  are
concerned,  and  it  is  a  convenience  to  speak
as  if  every  business  functioned  under  the
direction  or  control  of  a  single  employer.
The  first  thing  to  which  attention  must  be
summoned  is  the  way  in  which  the  employer’s
        <pb n="82" />
        SUPPLY  AND  DEMAND  79
expenses,  apart  from  his  own  remuneration,
would  vary  with  the  variation  in  the  extent
of  his  firm’s  operations.  The  firm,  suppose,
produces  boots  of  one  sort.  If  it  turned  out
very  few  pairs  a  year  the  expenses  of  production ­
  would  certainly  be  high,  because  for  a
tiny  output  very  little  machinery  could  be
used  and  very  little  division  of  labour  could  be
introduced.  Successive  enlargements  of  output ­
  by  equal  increments  would,  therefore,
entail  additions  to  the  total  expenses  of
production  which  for  a  time  would  become
continuously  less  and  less.  These  additions
to  the  total  expenses  of  a  business  (involved
in  its  expansion)  may  be  called  the  marginal
expenses  of  a  business;  which  are  to  be
distinguished  from  marginal  expenses,  socalled,
  meaning  the  expenses  per  unit  of
output  of  the  marginal  firm.
Let  us  have  figures  to  prevent  any  misapprehension. ­
  Say  1000  pairs  of  boots  a
year  are  manufactured  and  that  the  aggregate
expenses,  including  interest  on  capital,  wages,
cost  of  material,  and  everything  with  the
exception  of  the  employer’s  earnings  for  himself, ­
  amount  to  £1000.  Let  the  size  of  the
business  increase  so  that  the  output  becomes
1001  pairs  of  boots,  and  let  the  addition  to
the  total  expense  be  15s.  This  may  be  called
        <pb n="83" />
        so

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

the  marginal  expense  in  the  business,  for  it
is  the  addition  made  to  the  total  expense  in
the  business  when  the  output  is  increased  by
one  pair  of  boots.  Let  the  output  of  the
business  continue  to  increase  by  increments
of  one  pair  of  boots  each  ;  then  there  would
be  corresponding  additions  to  total  cost
(called  marginal  costs  or  expenses  as  we  have
seen)  say,  14s.  lid.,  14s.  10d.,  14s.  8d.,
14s.  9d.,  and  so  on  successively.
If  we  watched  such  a  gradual  growth  of  a
business  or  firm  from  an  insignificant  size  it
would  be  found  that  marginal  costs  would  fall
at  first,  for  reasons  already  advanced.  Now,
can  this  fall  in  marginal  expense  go  on  indefinitely ­
  ?  The  obvious  and  correct  answer
is  that  it  cannot  ordinarily.  If  it  did,  the
chances  are  that  by  this  time  each  industry
would  have  become  the  monopoly  of  a
single  firm,  which  owed  its  position  to  the
fact  that,  having  once  got  a  start,  it  was
enabled  to  undersell  its  competitors  until
there  were  no  competitors  left  to  undersell.
The  fall  in  marginal  cost  cannot  ordinarily
continue  without  end,  because  the  scope  for
further  specialism  and  use  of  machinery
afforded  by  further  extensions  of  the  business
would  tend  to  be  neglected  by  the  over-taxed
brain  of  the  ultimate  head  ;  and  any  economy
        <pb n="84" />
        SUPPLY  AND  DEMAND

81

got  out  of  them,  nevertheless,  would  almost
certainly  be  counteracted  by  losses  in  other
directions,  due  to  the  fact  that  the  firm  became ­
  too  large  to  be  effectively  directed  and
properly  controlled  by  the  one  employer,  or
the  one  Board  of  Directors.  Delegation  of
authority,  implying  the  creation  of  departmental ­
  responsibility,  might  for  a  time  prevent
any  serious  rise  in  the  cost  of  production  with
increased  growth  ;  but  a  limit  is  to  be  expected, ­
  though  a  wider  examination  of  human
nature  and  of  the  industrial  system  than  can
be  attempted  here  would  be  required  fully  to
justify  this  conclusion.  We  may  take  it,
then,  that  there  comes  a  time  when  marginal
costs  begin  to  rise,  because  there  comes  a
time  when  the  business  attains  dimensions
too  vast  for  the  strength  of  its  central  organs.
The  question  to  put  to  ourselves  at
this  particular  stage  of  our  discussion
may  be  phrased  thus  :  At  what  point  is  it
decided  to  attempt  no  further  extensions  ?
The  notion  of  marginal  expense  having  been
brought  in,  this  question  is  not  a  puzzling
one.  We  may  take  it  for  granted  that  a
small  extension  of  a  firm’s  output  does  not
add  appreciably  to  the  employer’s  work.
Consequently  it  pays  the  employer  to  allow
his  business  to  grow  until  his  marginal
        <pb n="85" />
        82

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

outgoings  equal  price  ;  but  it  does  not  pay
him  to  allow  it  to  assume  greater  proportions ­
  after  this  limit  has  been  reached.  We
may,  then,  lay  it  down  as  an  economic  law
that  in  every  industry,  be  it  agricultural,
manufacturing,  distributing  or  what  not,  the
marginal  expenses  of  each  economic  unit
known  as  a  business,  or  firm,  would  tend  to
equal  the  price  of  the  commodity  or  service
supplied.  We  need  not  trouble  to  enter  here
into  the  side  complications  which  would  have
to  be  introduced  into  this  exposition  to  meet
the  case  of  businesses  producing  things  of
several  sorts,  particularly  as  they  raise  no
fresh  theoretic  issues  of  outstanding  significance. ­

Let  us  go  back  for  illustration  to  our
boot-making  industry  and  imagine  that  it
comprises  half  a  dozen  firms.  Let  us  suppose
that  it  turns  out  in  the  aggregate  12,000
pairs  of  boots  a  year,  for  which  output  the
demand  price  and  the  cost  of  production
of  the  marginal  firm  are  both  14s.  Then  if
the  industry  is  in  a  position  of  perfect  equilibrium, ­
  which  implies  that  every  one  of  its
constituent  parts  is  in  a  position  of  perfect
equilibrium,  each  business  must  be  of  such
a  size  that  its  marginal  expenses  are  14s.,  and
its  total  expenses  are  less  than  its  marginal
        <pb n="86" />
        SUPPLY  AND  DEMAND

83

expenses  multiplied  by  its  output.  The  last
part  of  this  proposition  must  hold  because  the
employer’s  remuneration,  apart  from  payment ­
  for  his  capital,  is  represented  by  the
excess  of  his  aggregate  receipts  over  his  aggregate ­
  outgoings.  At  "a  position  of  perfect
equilibrium,  it  may  be  remarked  incidentally,
this  difference,  in  the  case  of  the  marginal
firm,  must  be  an  amount  just  sufficient  to  have
induced  the  employer  of  marginal  capacity  to
embark  on  production  in  the  industry.  If  it
were  more,  more  employers  would  be  attracted  ;
if  it  were  less  there  would  eventually  be  fewer
employers.  Super-marginal  employers,  owing
to  their  greater  ability,  may  be  getting  more
than  they  would  have  worked  for,  but  they
will  not  produce  more  than  they  do  because  it
would  not  pay  them,  whatever  they  are
earning,  to  manufacture  an  extra  pair  of  boots
for  sale  at  14s.  when  the  addition  to  their
aggregate  costs  would  exceed  14s.
In  order  that  no  link  may  be  missing  in
the  chain  of  reasoning,  the  above  exposition
may  be  supplemented  by  a  brief  survey  of
the  changes  which  occur  when  demand  rises.
Demand  having  risen,  more  than  14s.  a  pair
would  be  paid  for  boots,  were  only  12,000
pairs  obtainable,  and  our  six  firms  would  be
induced  to  extend  their  operations  if  it  were
        <pb n="87" />
        81-POLITICAL

  ECONOMY

feasible  to  do  so,  because  after  the  supposed
change  in  demand  it  would  be  profitable  for
them  to  do  so.  But  at  the  same  time  the
rise  in  price  would  render  it  possible  for  the
would-be  employer  just  excluded  previously
to  make  sufficient  in  the  industry  to  induce
him  to  venture  his  capital  in  it.  So  a  new
position  of  equilibrium  would  ultimately
be  attained  with  seven  firms  instead  of  six,
all  having  a  marginal  cost  higher  than  the  old
marginal  cost,  in  the  absence  of  effective
tendencies  to  increasing  returns  ;  and  there
would  be  a  new  marginal  firm  with  a  surplus
left  over  for  its  employer  which  was  just  about
adequate  from  his  point  of  view  to  make  it
worth  his  while  to  manufacture.  The  new  output, ­
  we  may  imagine,  would  be  15,000  pairs  of
boots,  and  the  price,  say  14s.  3d.,  would  tend
to  be  the  marginal  expense  in  every  one  of  the
seven  firms.
One  possibility  reviving  a  consideration
advanced  earlier  in  the  present  chapter  must
be  allowed  for,  and  this  exposition  is  complete. ­
  Marginal  business  costs  have  been
represented  as  rising  with  a  growth  of  the
industry.  Such  a  representation  is  entirely
right  as  regards  what  would  immediately
happen.  But,  as  we  have  already  learnt,  the
appearance  of  a  new  firm  might  ultimately
        <pb n="88" />
        SUPPLY  AND  DEMAND

85

render  the  functioning  of  the  industry  as  a
whole  not  merely  more  economical  but  more
economical  to  such  an  extent  that  the  new
marginal  cost  of  a  business  would  be  beneath  its
old  marginal  cost.  To  admit  this  qualification
is  simply  to  admit  that  industries  may  be
subject  to  increasing  returns.
The  significance  of  the  theory  of  supply  as
thus  refined  may  have  already  dawned  upon
the  reader.  It  involves  us,  as  it  now  stands,
in  the  conclusion  that  by  the  supply  price
of  a  given  output  of  an  industry  we  ought
logically  to  mean  in  highly  abstract  theory
the  marginal  expense  entailed  in  the  several
businesses  of  the  industry  when  such  an
output  is  aimed  at.  Of  course  this  marginal
expense  comes  to  the  same  thing  as  the  cost
of  the  marginal  firm  per  unit  of  output  under
the  assumed  conditions.  This  follows  as  a
corollary  from  the  above  reasoning.  Our
new  view  results  from  a  thorough  and  unreserved ­
  application  of  the  marginal  method  to
supply.  My  marginal  demand  and  the  marginal ­
  demand  of  every  other  purchaser  equally
settle  price  on  the  side  of  demand,  according
to  finished  theory.  We  have  drawn  from
industrial  experience  by  close  analysis  that
a  corresponding  assertion  can  be  made  as
regards  supply  ;  that,  according  to  strict
        <pb n="89" />
        86

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

theory,  in  an  exaggerated  long  run  it  is  the
marginal  cost  of  every  producer,  as  it  is  the
marginal  demand  of  every  consumer,  which
settles  price.
But  there  is  a  difficulty  in  our  new  view.
Does  abstract  theory  hold  with  such  precision
of  the  facts  on  the  side  of  supply  as  of  the  |
facts  on  the  side  of  demand?  The  latter
may  be  co-ordinated  in  systems  as  nonviscous
  as  water  but  the  former  in  systems  as
viscous  as  tepid  tar.  Before  he  has  made
any  tests  an  employer  cannot  accurately
guess  at  what  is  the  most  economical  size
of  business  for  him  to  aim  at,  and  once
businesses  are  established  their  elasticity  may
be  checked  by  cramped  space  in  their  premises
and  in  the  vicinity  and  the  limited  horsepower ­
  of  the  engines  originally  installed.
Again,  though  it  may  be  worth  while  to
attempt  a  large  expansion,  the  trouble  of
making  a  little  expansion  may  quite  outweigh
the  gains.  Moreover  it  is  indubitable  that  a
certain  size  of  business  is  likely  to  become
typical  of  certain  industries  despite  the
differences  between  employers  in  respect  of
capacity.  Consequently  we  cannot  allege
that  the  tendency  for  the  marginal  cost  of  a
firm  to  equal  price  will  be  as  a  rule  triumphant.
In  numerous  instances  it  may  be  indefinitely
        <pb n="90" />
        SUPPLY  AND  DEMAND

87

counteracted.  For  practical  purposes,  therefore, ­
  it  is  probably  safer  to  say  that  supply
prices  are  settled  by  the  cost  per  unit  of
output  of  marginal  firms  ;  remembering,
however,  that  some  theory  of  the  sizes  of
businesses  must  be  brought  in  to  supplement
this  statement.  Cost  per  unit  of  output  in
the  marginal  firm  is,  of  course,  less  likely
than  the  marginal  cost  of  any  business  to
diverge  widely  from  the  results  which  theory
would  lead  us  to  expect  in  a  frictionless
economic  system.
We  must  be  on  our  guard  against  making
our  working  theories  niggling  and  going  to  the
extreme,  so  to  speak,  of  using  a  razor  to  cut
turf.  Nevertheless  it  is  worth  while  taking
notice  of  a  tendency  even  if  it  is  overborne
before  it  attains  its  end.  Its  recognition  may
enable  us  to  account  for  otherwise  puzzling
swells  on  the  surface  of  economic  fact  ;  and
more  important  still,  perhaps,  its  recognition
may  enable  us  to  detect  a  single  law  in  seemingly ­
  disparate  causal  relationships,  a  law
which  is  none  the  less  real  because  in  part  it
is  invariably  counteracted.  These  considerations ­
  apply  to  the  tendency  which  we  have
been  discussing.  It  is  fully  worth  while
knowing  that  a  tendency  exists  which  when
effective  renders  it  possible  to  explain  value
        <pb n="91" />
        88

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

on  the  side  of  supply  by  differentiating  the
experiences  of  businesses—their  experiences
as  a  whole—to  use  the  phrase  previously
employed,  just  as  it  is  possible  to  explain
value  on  the  side  of  demand  by  differentiating
the  experiences  of  consumers.
The  necessity  of  taking  experience  as
a  whole  in  our  theorising  may  be  emphasised
again,  now  that  we  deal  with  it  on  the  side
of  supply.  Neither  demand  nor  supply  can
be  atomistically  conceived.  I  do  not  know
the  utility  of  sugar  when  it  is  in  my  cup  of
coffee,  but  I  do  know  the  difference  that  it
makes  to  the  utility  of  the  cup  of  coffee  ;
as  a  producer  of  steel  I  could  not  separate
the  cost  of  a  particular  ton  of  steel  from  the
costs  of  other  tons  of  steel  made  by  me
(because  many  tons  of  steel  are  made  at  a
time  by  groups  of  productive  factors  working
as  a  whole),  but  it  would  be  theoretically
feasible  to  calculate  what  difference  its  production ­
  made  to  my  total  costs.  However,
it  happens,  as  we  have  seen,  that  the  cost
per  unit  of  output  in  a  business  comes  on  to
the  stage  among  the  supply  forces,  and  that,
in  relation  to  the  marginal  business,  when
supplemented  in  the  manner  already  indicated, ­
  it  serves  the  purpose  (the  settlement
of  supply  prices)  which  would  be  served  in  a
        <pb n="92" />
        SUPPLY  AND  DEMAND

89

delicately  adjusted  economic  system  by  the
marginal  cost  of  any  normal  business  which
was  in  a  position  of  perfect  equilibrium.  In
Chapter  VII  we  shall  meet  again  with  the
differentiation  of  business  experience  in  the
matter  of  business  organisation  and  of  the
action  of  the  law  of  equi-marginal  returns  in
settling  it  ;  and,  since  the  analogies  between
the  laws  of  demand  and  supply  have  been
touched  upon,  it  may  further  be  remarked
here  that  we  shall  find  in  Chapter  IX  that
the  marginal  method  discloses  on  the  supply
side  of  value  a  surplus  analogous  to  that  on
the  demand  side  known  as  consumer’s  surplus.
To  conclude  this  chapter  a  few  remarks  may
be  made  as  regards  the  agents  in  production.
Production  consists  in  making  utilities  out  of
the  material  and  forces  at  our  disposal—
utilities  being  defined  as  laid  down  in  the
previous  chapter.  The  agents  are  commonly
classified  as  land,  labour,  capital  and  organising. ­
  Land  means  not  only  land  but  all  the
forces  of  nature  (apart  from  human  nature)
which  are  an  aid  to  man’s  productive  activities, ­
  including  animal  life  and  winds  and  rivers
and  seas.  Organising  and  labour  are  of  the
same  general  class,  and  to  a  large  extent  they
interpenetrate  one  another,  but  for  purposes
        <pb n="93" />
        90

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

of  analysis  the  distinction  between  them  has
a  certain  value.  Capital  is  not  an  original
agent  in  production.  It  is  the  product  of
land,  labour,  organising  and  saving.  Immense
discussion  has  taken  place  over  the  question
of  what  it  is  most  appropriate  to  regard  as
capital.  For  our  requirements  it  is  sufficient
to  think  of  it  as  wealth  which  is  not  consumed
to  afford  immediate  gratification  but  is  on
the  contrary  applied  to  further  production.
Its  value  in  the  form  of  ships,  factories,
engines  and  machinery  will  not  be  questioned.
The  efficiency  of  labour  is  of  fundamental  importance, ­
  not  merely  with  a  view  to  the  creation
of  wealth,  but  also  with  regard  to  intangible
social  well-being.  The  efficiency  of  labour  is
governed  by  natural  and  social  conditions,
the  duration  of  work,  wages,  and  labour’s
prospects.  A  bracing  climate  makes  a  lusty
and  active  population.  Work  which  is  monotonous, ­
  or  excessively  exhausting,  is  bound
to  cause  all-round  deterioration  of  a  people’s
vital  forces.  Dreariness  in  one’s  environment ­
  breeds  general  listlessness,  and  a  foul
atmosphere  and  other  insanitary  conditions
undermine  strength  and  generate  disease.
Wages  and  their  spending  have  obviously  a
direct  bearing  upon  efficiency  and  so  also  has
the  outlook  of  people.  Divested  of  all  chances
        <pb n="94" />
        SUPPLY  AND  DEMAND

91

of  improving  his  position,  the  ambitious
operative  is  not  likely  to  work  with  much
enthusiasm.
When  all  this  has  been  said,  however,
every  aspect  of  the  problem  of  the  efficiency  of
labour  has  not  been  presented.  A  community
is  only  rendered  most  efficient,  in  the  broadest
sense  of  the  term,  when  the  most  valuable
productive  potentiality  of  each  person  has
been  rendered  actual.  To  bring  out  the
highest  powers  of  the  individual  and  place
him  at  work  suited  to  his  capacity  implies  an
educational  system  which  is  successful  both
in  disclosing  and  training  ability  and  a  social
system  wherein  an  individual,  whatever  the
grade  of  his  birth,  finds  no  difficulty  in  making
his  way  into  the  economic  ranks  for  functioning ­
  in  which  he  is  well  endowed  naturally
and  properly  prepared.  Given  these  conditions
and  a  sufficiency  of  initiative  and  perseverance
in  the  individual,  the  vertical  mobility  of
labour  (by  which  is  meant  the  recruiting  of  one
economic  class  from  another)  is  said  to  be
high.
The  end  of  production,  we  must  bear  in
mind,  is  not  to  secure  the  greatest  volume  of
goods,  but,  other  things  being  equal,  the
greatest  volume  when  they  consist  in  the
articles  and  services  most  in  demand.  Exactly
        <pb n="95" />
        92

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

speaking,  society  is  rendered  more  productive
when  its  productive  activities  are  made  more
responsive  to  the  needs  of  the  community.
Such  responsiveness  can  only  be  secured  when
the  population,  either  directly  or  through  the
disposal  of  the  rising  generation,  is  mobile
geographically  and  as  between  trades.  Finally
let  us  not  forget,  particularly  when  studying
economics,  that  too  great  a  sacrifice  of  real
but  intangible  goods  may  easily  be  made  to
get  greater  tangible  possessions.
        <pb n="96" />
        CHAPTER  IV

MONOPOLY
The  theory  of  value  under  conditions  of
monopoly  is  naturally  a  good  deal  different
from  the  theory  of  value  under  conditions  of
competition,  but  it  is  not  different  in  the  sense
that,  with  a  view  to  its  construction,  a  complete ­
  re-analysis  of  economic  facts  must  be
made.  All  the  generalisations  concerning
value  which  have  been  laid  down  so  far  apply  to
monopoly  excepting  only  those  which  imply
the  existence  of  rivalry  among  suppliers  of
the  same  thing.  When  competition  is  absent,
as  when  it  is  present,  price  is  determined  by
demand  and  supply,  only  in  the  two  cases
demand  and  supply  play  different  parts.  In
the  latter  case,  competition  being  a  driving
force,  price  is  settled,  so  to  speak,  automatically. ­
  In  the  former  case,  however,  the  constraint ­
  imposed  by  competitive  forces  upon
the  will  of  the  supplier  having  been  abstracted,
demand  and  supply  only  enter  into  the  settlement ­
  of  price  in  the  sense  that  they  are  the
93
        <pb n="97" />
        94

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

data  upon  a  consideration  of  which  the
monopolist  forms  his  decision.  The  monopolist ­
  is  in  the  fortunate  position  (fortunate  from
his  own  point  of  view)  of  being  able  to  decide
what  the  market  supply  shall  be.  When  he
has  so  decided,  price  gets  fixed  by  the  mechanics ­
  of  the  market  set  in  action  by  demand.
Of  course  an  employer  who  is  competing  with
others  is  just  as  much  at  liberty  as  a  monopolist ­
  to  decide  upon  producing  a  limited
quantity  only  of  the  article  that  he  furnishes
to  the  market,  but,  as  his  works  are  not  the
sole  source  of  the  supply,  his  decision  does
not  affect  the  total  market  supply  in  the  long
run.  Other  employers  would  eventually  fill
up  any  gap  created  by  his  restriction  of  his
output  if  it  were  normally  profitable  to  do  so.
We  shall  proceed  at  first  on  the  assumption
that  the  monopoly  that  we  are  studying  is  a
rigid  one,  or  in  other  words  that  the  control
over  the  supply  is  complete  ;  and  for  the  sake
of  brevity  of  statement  I  shall  write  as  if
a  monopoly  were  always  in  the  hands  of  a
single  individual,  though,  as  a  matter  of  fact,
a  monopoly  may  be  a  company  managed  by
directors  or  a  group  of  combined  employers.
Now  the  object  of  the  monopolist,  other
things  being  equal,  will  be  to  maximise  his
net  takings,  that  is  the  difference  between
        <pb n="98" />
        MONOPOLY

95

his  receipts  and  his  expenses  when  we  include
in  the  latter  a  remuneration  just  sufficient
to  induce  him  to  do  the  amount  of  work  that
he  does.  This  difference  between  his  expenses,
thus  widely  regarded,  and  his  gross  receipts
may  be  called  monopoly  revenue.  His  object
is  to  maximise  monopoly  revenue,  and  this
is  maximised  when  the  product  of  the  amount
sold  and  the  difference  between  the  price  and
the  monopolist’s  average  costs  is  the  greatest
possible.  The  theory  may  be  illustrated  with
the  aid  of  the  following  table  :—

Demand
Output  price
in  tona,  per  ton.
90  £50
100  £49
110  £48
120  £46

Aggregate  Aggregate

receipts.
£4,500
£4,900
£5,280
£5,520

costs.
£4,000
£4,350
£4,700
£5,000

Monopoly
Revenue.
£500
£550
£580
£520

In  the  case  represented  in  the  table  the
output  would  be  110  tons,  at  which  output
monopoly  revenue  is  maximised.
It  looks  as  if  the  subject  of  monopoly  were
drawing  us  away  from  the  high  ground  of
pure  theory  where  the  effect  of  trifling  variations—of ­
  differentiating  experience—explains
everything.  It  is  true  that  the  consequences
of  such  variations  in  demand  prices  and
supply  prices  furnish  the  monopolist  with
        <pb n="99" />
        96

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

the  data  from  which  he  calculates  at  what
output  maximum  gains  can  be  reaped  ;
but,  according  to  the  exposition  above,  the
comparisons  which  determine  his  action  are
comparisons  of  aggregates—of  total  gains  at
different  outputs—not  of  margins,  or,  in  other
words,  of  the  differences  made  to  gains  by
small  variations  of  output.  This,  however,
is  not  an  altogether  correct  account  of  the
matter.  The  monopolist  aims  at  an  aggregate,
a  maximised  revenue,  but  in  order  to  attain
it  he  can  be  guided,  and  is  not  unlikely  to
be  guided,  by  the  marginal  effects  of  variations ­
  of  his  output  on  his  net  gains.  He
need  not  make  his  supply  leap  about
bewilderingly  in  the  hope  of  fortuitously
hitting  upon  the  one  most  favourable  to  his
interests.  On  the  contrary,  if  he  is  wise,
he  will  decide  on  some  output  which  seems
to  offer  reasonable  prospects  of  yielding  a
high  monopoly  revenue  and  then  proceed
scientifically  by  making  small  variations  in  it
and  watching  their  effect  on  his  profits.  When
an  effect  is  favourable  he  will  naturally
make  another  variation  in  the  same  direction
and  so  on,  but  when  it  is  otherwise  he
will  retrace  his  steps.  When  monopoly
revenue  is  the  greatest  possible,  marginal
costs  equal  what  might  be  termed  differential
        <pb n="100" />
        G

MONOPOLY

97

receipts,  provided  that  an  addition  to  the
output  at  this  point  would  cause  marginal
costs  to  exceed  differential  receipts,  and  a
reduction  of  the  output  would  cause  differential ­
  receipts  to  exceed  marginal  costs.
By  marginal  costs  is  to  be  understood  the
addition  made  to  aggregate  costs  by  the
production  of  the  last  increment  ;  and  by
differential  receipts  is  to  be  understood  the
addition  made  to  the  aggregate  gross  receipts
by  the  sale  of  the  last  increment.  We  must
not  call  the  latter  “  marginal  receipts,”
because  that  term  might  mean  the  marginal
demand  price.  It  is  necessary  to  remark  that
there  may  be  outputs  other  than  that  yielding
the  greatest  monopoly  revenue  of  which
the  above  statement  holds.  Any  position  of
which  it  holds  may  be  called  a  position  of
monopoly  equilibrium.  When  there  is  more
than  one  position  of  monopoly  equilibrium,
so  defined,  the  monopolist  naturally  selects
that  one  which  yields  him  the  highest
monopoly  revenue,  provided  that  he  knows
of  its  existence.
Thus  far  we  have  taken  for  granted  that
the  commodity  can  be  sold  for  one  price  only,
but  as  we  shall  see  later  there  are  circumstances ­
  in  which  it  is  feasible  to  impose
differential  or  discriminative  charges.  How-
        <pb n="101" />
        98

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

ever,  before  taking  up  the  consideration  of  the
problem  of  monopoly  in  these  circumstances
something  must  be  added  to  the  theory  under
the  simpler  conditions  already  explained.
The  question  naturally  arises  as  to  what
will  be  the  effect  upon  price  and  supply  of
the  monopolisation  of  an  industry  which  used
to  be  carried  on  competitively.  The  answer
is  that  price  is  certain  to  rise  and  supply  to
be  reduced  if  the  integration  of  the  industry
does  not  bring  about  any  economies  in
production.  To  suppose  otherwise  is  to
suppose  that  for  no  output  can  the  average
expenses  be  less  than  price,  broadly  speaking.
It  may  be,  however,  that  concentrating  the
control  of  an  industry  to  the  extent  which
renders  it  a  monopoly  will  have  substantial
effects  in  reducing,  for  a  time  at  any  rate,  the
average  costs  of  production.  In  this  event
it  is  conceivable  that  the  monopoly  price
would  be  less  than  the  competitive  price  ;  but
there  is  a  good  deal  to  be  said  for  the  view
that  any  saving  immediately  effected  in  cost
of  production  might  finally  be  counteracted,
or  more  than  counteracted,  in  consequence
of  the  fact  that  efficiency  might  be  undermined ­
  when  monopoly  suppressed  the  process
of  natural  selection  (which  operates  through
the  agency  of  the  survival  of  the  fittest
        <pb n="102" />
        MONOPOLY

99

under  competition)  and  relieved  the  pressure
which  competition  exerts  upon  individuals,
compelling  them  to  be  alert  and  act  with
energy.  Whether  competition  may  not  also
have  its  bad  side  in  driving  the  bare  survivors
to  resort  in  desperation  to  sharp  or  positively
dishonest  practices,  such  as  lying  advertising
and  thievish  adulterating,  it  is  not  for  us  to
inquire  at  present.
It  is  possible  to  lay  down  certain  probable
generalisations  which  enable  one  roughly
to  forecast  what  the  effect  of  monopoly  will
be  in  different  circumstances.  When  demand
is  highly  elastic,  a  large  restriction  of  supply
under  monopoly  is  less  likely  than  it  is  when
demand  is  inelastic,  because  a  substantial
curtailment  of  supply  is  needed  to  lever  up
price  appreciably  when  demand  is  very
elastic.  When  a  slight  limitation  of  supply
sensibly  raises  price,  it  is  practically  certain
that  a  shrinkage  of  output  and  a  considerable
percentage  elevation  in  price  would  follow
the  creation  of  a  monopoly,  other  things  being
equal.  The  phrase,  “  other  things  being
equal  ”  is  inserted  here  because  it  may  be
essential  to  the  success  of  a  monopoly  to
conciliate  the  public,  which  is  not  likely  to
prove  amiable  if  extortionate  charges  are
imposed  upon  it  Another  generalisation
        <pb n="103" />
        100

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

is  that  material  curtailment  of  output  is  less
to  be  apprehended  in  industries  functioning
under  increasing  returns  than  in  those  functioning ­
  under  decreasing  returns,  because
in  the  former  the  smaller  supply  while  it
resulted  in  higher  price  would  result  also  in
the  loss  of  the  economies  previously  reaped
from  producing  on  a  large  scale.  Yet  another
generalisation  may  be  laid  down,  namely,
that  if  monopolisation  is  to  bring  about  a
lower  price  it  is  most  likely  to  do  so  (1)  in
industries  in  which  much  of  the  supply  price
under  competition  is  made  up  of  the  expenses
of  securing  as  customers  for  particular  firms
persons  who,  in  any  event,  would  buy  the
commodity,  and  (2)  in  industries  in  which
monopolisation  lowers  the  cost  of  producing
proper.
We  pass  next  to  the  cases  in  which  discriminative ­
  prices,  or  differential  prices,  as
they  are  sometimes  called,  are  possible.
It  may  be  said  at  once  that  discriminative
charges  cannot  be  imposed  where  competition
is  untrammelled,  because  the  existence  of  these
charges  implies  at  least  some  agreement
among  producers.  Differential  charges  are
of  three  kinds,  namely,  persona],  trade,  and
local.
        <pb n="104" />
        MONOPOLY

101

Local  discrimination  is  practised  when  a
thing  is  sold  for  one  price  in  one  locality,
and  another  price  in  another  locality.  International ­
  discriminations  are  common,  and
even  intra-national  discriminations  are  to  be
found.  In  the  case  of  the  latter  the  difference
between  the  two  prices  cannot  be  more  than
the  cost  of  carriage  from  the  one  place  to
the  other  if  the  thing  can  be  transported
after  being  sold  ;  as,  for  example,  gas,
electricity,  and  transportation  itself  cannot.
In  the  case  of  international  discriminations,
however,  where  tariffs  protect  the  home
market,  the  difference  between  the  two  prices
may  amount  to  as  much  as  cost  of  carriage
and  the  import  duty  on  re-entry.
A  trade  discrimination  means  charging
more  for  a  thing  when  it  is  used  for  one
purpose,  that  is  in  one  trade,  than  when
it  is  used  for  another  purpose,  that  is  in
another  trade.  Generally  trade  discrimination
is  not  feasible  because  of  the  difficulty  of
discovering  to  what  use  the  purchaser  intends
putting  the  commodity  ;  but  there  remain
some  important  instances  in  which  differential
charges  of  this  kind  are  not  only  possible  but
have  become  the  common  rule.  The  best
example  is  to  be  found  in  railway  freight
rates.  The  railways  sell  transportation  and
        <pb n="105" />
        102

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

sell  it  at  different  prices,  out  of  regard,  as
well  as  with  regard,  to  the  cost  of  the  service
provided.  Broadly  speaking,  freight  rates
per  unit  of  bulk  or  weight  are  higher  for
commodities  of  much  value  than  for  those
of  the  little  value.  It  is  assumed  that  the
greater  the  value  of  the  commodity  the  more
will  purchasers  pay  for  carriage  without
materially  curtailing  their  purchases.  The
principle  embodied  in  the  custom  is  known
as  the  principle  of  charging  what  the  traffic
will  bear.
Personal  discrimination  means  that  one
man  is  charged  more  than  another  simply
because  he  can  pay  more,  though  there  is
neither  a  local  nor  trade  basis  for  the  differential ­
  charge.  Generally  speaking,  we  may
say  that  by  the  business  community  all  the
world  over  personal  discriminations  have
been  sternly  resisted.  But  in  the  form
of  income  discriminations  they  are  not
altogether  unknown.  They  may  be  resorted
to  indirectly  when  different  qualities  of  a
thing  are  supplied,  provided  that  the  higher
qualities  are  consumed  chiefly  by  the  wealthier
classes.  The  prices  for  the  better  qualities
may  be  fixed  disproportionately  high  in  view
of  the  excess  of  their  cost  over  the  cost  of  the
lower  qualities.  Income  discriminations  have
        <pb n="106" />
        MONOPOLY

103

been  admitted  with  advantage  into  the
principles  of  payment  for  certain  public  and
semi-public  services.  Doctors,  for  instance,
frequently  charge  patients  of  different  classes
on  different  scales.
Jt  now  remains  to  discuss  the  principle
applied  in  the  settlement  of  discriminative
charges,  when  they  are  possible.  It  is
exactly  the  same  as  the  principle  of  the
single  monopoly  charge,  but  its  application
is  more  complicated.  The  monopolist  tries
to  fix  the  two  or  more  prices  which  he  finds
practicable  at  such  levels  that  his  net  returns
are  maximised.  We  may  think  of  the
monopolist  as  dealing  in  two  markets.  In
each  market  he  fixes  the  price  which  will
be  the  most  profitable,  regardless  of  the
price  obtained  in  other  markets,  except  in
so  far  as  the  quantity  of  sales  in  both
markets  taken  together  must  be  considered
because  of  its  bearing  on  cost  of  production. ­
  It  will  be  instantly  realised  how
exceedingly  improbable  it  is  that  the
most  profitable  price  in  the  one  market
should  be  identical  with  the  most  profitable
price  in  the  other.  In  the  one  it  might
pay  to  sell  a  large  quantity  at  a  low  price,
whereas  in  the  other,  in  view  of  the  different
circumstances  of  the  community  served,  it
        <pb n="107" />
        104  POLITICAL  ECONOMY
might  pay  to  sell  a  small  quantity  at  a  high
price.
It  can  be  proved  that  differential  charges
can  be  arranged  so  as  to  benefit  the  public.
Without  them  much  less  use  would  be  got
out  of  railways  and  there  would  be  an  immense
loss  of  consumers’  surplus.  Coal  can  be
carried  cheaply  just  because  certain  other
things  are  carried  only  at  high  freight  rates.
Some  services,  indeed,  could  not  be  provided
at  all  were  differential  charges  not  permitted.
However,  we  must  be  careful  to  observe
that  the  adoption  with  reference  to  anything
of  the  discriminative  system  of  fixing  prices
is  by  no  means  bound  to  prove  beneficial  to
the  community,  and  that  public  interests
must  consequently  be  watched  with  a  jealous
eye  when  it  is  introduced  or  revised.
We  must  not  run  away  with  the  idea  that
a  monopolist  has  a  perfectly  free  hand  to
fix  any  price  or  scale  of  prices  that  suits  him
best.  He  is  ultimately  dependent  upon  the
goodwill  of  the  public—or,  at  least,  on  the
absence  of  an  intense  degree  of  ill-will.
People  can  find  more  or  less  satisfactory
substitutes  for  most  things,  and  will  be
moved  to  do  so  if  they  think  they  are  being
robbed  by  extortionate  charges.  Moreover,
the  modern  State  has  to  make  a  legitimate
        <pb n="108" />
        MONOPOLY

105

public  opinion  effective  when  it  can,  and  a
public  excessively  squeezed  by  monopoly
is  likely  to  demand  clamorously  that  the
heavy  hand  of  the  State  should  be  extended
for  its  relief.  And  Governments  can  not
only  control,  or  try  to  control,  but  also
nationalise  services.  Moreover,  there  is
potential  competition  to  take  into  account.
The  richer  the  gains  of  monopoly,  the  more
will  rivals  be  tempted  into  the  field  to  get
a  share  of  the  booty,  and  the  greater  will
be  the  chance  of  a  natural  demolition  of
restraint  of  trade.  So  monopolists  are  likely
to  prefer  large  outputs  and  low  prices  to  small
outputs  and  high  prices,  if  the  direct  pecuniary
advantage  of  the  former  to  them  is  not
greatly  inferior  to  that  of  the  latter.
Finally,  it  may  be  pointed  out  that  a
public  authority  which  monopolised  a  service
would  not  be  likely  to  aim  at  the  highest
monopoly  revenue,  even  within  the  limitations ­
  defined  above.  It  would  naturally
pay  regard  to  public  advantage,  which  is
measured  by  consumers’  surpluses.
A  particular  case  of  discriminative  charges,
which  is  known  as  dumping,  has  very  much
agitated  the  public  mind  in  recent  years.
Dumping  is  ordinarily  understood  as  selling
an  article  abroad  not  merely  at  a  price  beneath
        <pb n="109" />
        106

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

the  home  price,  but  at  a  price  beneath  cost
of  production,  whatever  that  may  mean.
A  dense  obscurity  enshrouds  popular  conceptions ­
  of  the  problem  of  dumping,  and
rough-and-ready  explanations  of  the  matter
have  rather  added  to  than  detracted  from  the
obscurity.  In  order  properly  to  understand
dumping  it  is  well  to  distinguish  at  the  outset
between  different  kinds  of  dumping.
There  is,  firstly,  the  dumping  of  surpluses.
By  a  surplus  we  must  understand  a  quantity
of  output  which  would  never  have  been
produced  had  the  price  for  which  it  was
necessary  to  sacrifice  it  been  foreseen.  In
view  of  our  inevitable  ignorance  of  future
demand,  it  is  unavoidable  that  production
should  repeatedly  exceed  or  fall  short  of  the
amount  which  would  have  been  aimed  at  had
coming  conditions  been  accurately  anticipated, ­
  and  it  is  evident  that  the  monopolist
will  so  frame  his  decisions  that  at  least  he
will  not  be  short  of  the  amount  which  would
maximise  his  net  gains.  Consequently,  surpluses ­
  arise  frequently,  and  are  more  likely
than  not.  A  few  moments’  thought  should
convince  the  reader  that,  given  such  a  surplus,
the  monopolist  who  is  simply  pursuing  his
self-interest  would  probably  be  well  advised
not  to  lower  his  home  price  and  sell  the  whole
        <pb n="110" />
        MONOPOLY

(Yßbr  un¿

output  at  home,  but  to  retain
price  level  in  the  home  market  by  relieving
of  some  supplies  even  if  these  supplies  when^f
sold  elsewhere  realised  only  paltry.'  J
From  the  point  of  view  of  the  monopolist’s
policy,  there  is  nothing  to  prevent  the  price  of
dumped  surpluses  from  dropping  to  any  insignificant ­
  figure,  but,  as  a  matter  of  fact,
they  will  not  sell  for  less  than  the  price  which
rules  in  the  foreign  market  when  they  invade
it.  This  price,  nevertheless,  might  be  beneath
a  figure  which  would  leave  any  profit  at  all  for
the  monopolist  were  he  forced  to  sell  his  whole
output  at  that  particular  price.
Another  kind  of  dumping,  which  has  excited
a  degree  of  apprehension  quite  out  of  proportion ­
  to  its  magnitude,  in  all  probability,
consists  in  producing  an  excessive  supply
in  order  to  sell  substantial  quantities  abroad
at  a  material  sacrifice  for  advertising  purposes, ­
  or  in  order  to  oust  competitors.  It  is
questionable  whether  this  game  is  worth  the
candle  in  view  of  the  enormous  foreign  sales
which  are  requisite  to  get  a  hold  on  a  foreign
market,  and  consequently  of  its  enormous
cost.  It  might  be  well  worth  the  expense  were
it  a  fact  that  competitors  could  be  easily  put
to  flight  and  that  their  rallying  to  compete
again  within  a  moderate  time  would  be  a
        <pb n="111" />
        108

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

miracle  ;  but  the  monopolist  would  be  exceedingly ­
  foolish  to  take  this  for  granted.  Many
established  industries  will  sell  for  years
beneath  their  full  cost  of  production  rather
than  shut  down,  because  shutting  down
involves  the  destruction  in  bulk  of  their  fixed
plant.  They  will  continue  to  sell  so  long  as
the  price  is  well  above  the  specific  cost  of
production,  that  is  the  cost  of  production
apart  from  standing  charges  which  would  not
be  saved  by  the  cessation  of  activities.  And
as  regards  other  industries,  not  of  this  kind,
in  which  output  instantly  and  adequately
contracts  as  soon  as  prices  become  in  any
degree  unremunerative,  we  find  that  the
possibility  of  such  an  immediate  curtailment
of  production  implies  the  possibility  of  an
equally  immediate  increase  of  output  as  soon
as  a  recovery  in  price  renders  it  profitable.
Tersely  put,  it  is  probably  the  case  that
competitors  who  are  easily  routed  are  easily
rallied  by  a  hardening  of  the  market,  and  that
those  who  are  not  easily  routed  can  only  be
defeated  eventually  after  a  lengthy  and
exhausting  campaign.  Dumping  of  this  order
is  far  more  likely  in  the  case  of  articles  which
are  unique  and  for  which  there  is  no  perfect
substitute.  It  might,  for  instance,  pay  the
patentee  of  a  new  breakfast  food  to  sell
        <pb n="112" />
        MONOPOLY

*  109

at  first  at  a  very  low,  even  unremunerative,
price  until  people  had  acquired  a  taste  for  the
thing,  when  the  price  could  be  raised  without
causing  people  to  alter  their  habits  to  any
large  extent.
Producing  to  dump  without  regard  to  an
ultimate  raising  of  price  is  a  very  different
matter,  and  only  distantly  connected  with  the
dumping  of  surpluses.  It  consists  in  determining ­
  before  the  event  to  manufacture  such
a  supply  of  a  thing  that,  after  the  home
demand  has  been  satisfied  at  a  high  or
moderately  high  price,  a  quantity  is  left
over  to  be  disposed  of  in  outside  markets
at  a  price  which,  as  it  is  put,  is  beneath  cost
of  production.  That  it  may  be  profitable  to
act  on  the  design  embodied  in  this  kind  of
dumping  when  the  foreign  sales  considered  in
themselves  entail  no  sacrifice  has  been  proved
by  what  has  been  already  said  of  the  principle
of  discriminative  charges,  but  it  has  not  yet
been  demonstrated  that  the  policy  can  prove
a  paying  one  when  the  exported  goods  fetch
less  than  their  cost  of  production.
A  favourite  method  of  trying  to  shew  that
the  policy  is  a  paying  one  in  the  latter  case
is  to  argue  that  the  monopolist  can  afford  to
dispose  of  some  part  of  his  output  in  distant
markets  at  less  than  the  expense  incurred  in
        <pb n="113" />
        110

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

production,  because  he  realises  more  than
normal  profit  on  his  sales  in  his  own  country.
But  this  easy  elucidation  of  the  mystery
leaves  us  the  hopeless  task  of  explaining  away
the  folly  of  the  producer  who,  having  amassed
something  of  a  fortune  by  his  operations  at
home,  elects  to  dissipate  some  or  the  whole
of  it  by  carrying  on  a  losing  trade  with
foreign  customers.  Why  should  he  spend
wealth  realised  out  of  his  home  trade  on
unprofitable  trade  elsewhere  ?
We  must  not,  however,  conclude  that  because
this  popular  explanation  is  unsound  it  can
never  pay  a  monopolist  to  aim  at  selling  continuously ­
  abroad  beneath  cost  of  production.
We  shall  see  that  there  is  a  reasonable  account
of  the  matter.  Now  it  is  evident  from  the  foregoing ­
  that  any  reasonable  account  of  the  matter
involves  proving  that  the  sales  abroad  leave
the  monopolist  better  off.  With  a  view
to  proving  this  let  us  examine  the  phrase
“  sales  beneath  cost  of  production  ”  and
consider  whether  it  can  be  interpreted  in  such
a  way  that  the  making  of  an  immediate  gain
out  of  producing  with  the  intention  of  selling
some  portion  of  the  output  beneath  cost  of
production  is  not  unthinkable.  It  is  apparent
that  cost  of  production  must  not  mean  the
addition  to  the  monopolist’s  aggregate  costs
        <pb n="114" />
        MONOPOLY

111

entailed  by  the  manufacture  of  the  addition
to  his  output  represented  by  the  foreign  sales,
for  if  it  did  the  kind  of  dumping  which  we
have  in  mind  would  mean  buying  halfcrowns
  at  two  shillings  apiece.  But  cost
of  production  may  be  understood  as  the
average  cost  (cost  per  unit  of  output)  of
the  whole  of  the  industry’s  output.  Now,
foreign  sales  beneath  cost  of  production  so
understood  will  prove  worth  while,  provided
that  the  foreign  price  is  in  excess  of  the
addition  made  to  the  aggregate  costs  of  the
industry  by  the  production  of  what  was
exported,  when  this  addition  to  cost  is
reckoned  per  unit  of  the  exported  output.
The  implication  is  that  the  industry  is
subject  to  increasing  returns.  The  seemingly
unremunerative  foreign  sales  pay  because
of  the  benefits  resulting  from  the  increasing
returns.  Making  regular  provision  for  the
foreign  market  necessitates  enlarging  the
industry  and  the  enlarged  industry  brings
about  in  the  long  run  a  lower  cost  of  production ­
  per  unit  of  what  is  turned  out.  The
seeming  loss  in  the  distant  markets  may  be
more  than  recouped  by  the  reduction  in  the
cost  of  things  sold  on  favourable  terms  at
home.
        <pb n="115" />
        112

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

To  complete  this  chapter  a  few  remarks
may  be  offered  as  to  the  various  sorts  of
monopoly  which  are  found  in  the  world.
Monopolies  may  be  classified  into  natural,
social,  legal,  and  voluntary.  Natural  monopolies ­
  arise  out  of  the  limited  sources  of  some
natural  products.  Social  monopolies  are  occasioned ­
  by  the  peculiar  relations  of  certain
businesses  to  the  social  economy.  For
instance,  it  might  not  be  possible  for  two
remunerative  railway  lines  to  be  laid  down
connecting  two  places  ;  and,  even  if  it  were,
two  lines  would  be  less  economical  than  one
line.  Again,  competing  gas  companies  cannot
be  permitted  to  lay  their  pipes  in  the  same
streets.  Many  social  monopolies  are  now
in  the  hands  of  public  authorities.  Legal
monopolies  are  those  maintained  by  law  like
patents  and  copyrights,  which  are  defensible
on  the  ground  that  without  them  much
valuable  inventing  and  writing  would  be
so  scantily  rewarded  as  to  be  in  effect
discountenanced  instead  of  encouraged.
Many  of  the  social  monopolies  enjoy  legal
support.  Voluntary  monopolies  arise  mainly
out  of  combination.  Among  them  we  may
distinguish  the  monopolies  which  leave  much
of  the  individuality  of  the  combining  units
untouched,  and  those  which  destroy  it.  The
        <pb n="116" />
        MONOPOLY

113

former  are  commonly  termed  “  kartels  ”  and
the  latter  “  trusts.”
Recent  years  have  seen  a  great  increase  of
voluntary  combinations.  Some  are  mere
unions  for  arranging  a  common  policy  in  the
matter  of  price  ;  others  consist  in  complete
industrial  integrations  ;  while  in  between
numerous  varieties  are  to  be  found,  which
it  is  for  a  more  realistic  economics  to  classify
and  account  for.  It  would,  however,  be  a
mistake  to  draw  the  inference  that  competition
has  been  so  outflanked  that  it  must  yield  in
bulk  to  combination.  All  businesses  are
not  suited  to  any  degree  of  unified  control  ;
and  while  in  one  state  of  development  or
of  trade  conditions  an  industry  may  lend
itself  to  monopolisation,  in  another  set  of
circumstances  forces  which  bring  about  its
disintegration  may  as  surely  be  generated.
Moreover,  it  might  very  well  be  that  in
a  given  industry  a  trust  after  paying  for  a
generation  would  cease  to  pay,  owing  to  the
difficulty  of  detecting  and  appointing  the
most  capable  leaders  after  the  process  of
natural  business  survival  of  the  fittest  had
ceased  to  operate  thoroughly  within  the
industry.  Why  recently  there  has  been  so
marked  an  increase  of  combinations  for
securing  monopoly,  widely  extended  investi-
        <pb n="117" />
        114

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

gation  is  needed  to  explain,  but  there  can
be  no  doubt,  as  regards  industrial  integrations, ­
  that  one  cause  is  the  large-scale
organisation  of  finance  which  has  appeared
of  late  as  a  new  and  striking  phenomenon
in  economic  life,  particularly  in  the  United
States.  The  tentative  responses  of  State
functioning  by  way  of  control  will  be  watched
with  the  deepest  interest.  It  is  impossible  to
foretell  as  yet  the  exact  mode  in  which  public
well-being  will  be  safeguarded  when  requisite.
Of  combinations  intended  to  control  the
sharing  of  wealth  between  the  factors  engaged ­
  in  producing  it,  such  as  trade  unions
and  employers’  associations  with  that  object
in  view,  mention  will  be  made  in  Chapter  IX.
        <pb n="118" />
        CHAPTER  Y

MONEY
Sometimes  the  explanation  of  the  purchasing
power  of  money  is  put  forward  as  a  distinct
and  independent  theory  which  is  no  part  of,
though  closely  analogous  to,  the  general
theory  of  value.  I  shall  hope  to  demonstrate,
however,  that  it  contains  nothing  fundamentally ­
  new.  In  the  problem  of  the
purchasing  power  of  money  the  general
theory  of  value  is  again  ensconced,  but  so
veiled  with  peculiar  conditions  which  the
student  has  not  previously  analysed  that  he
is  not  to  be  blamed  if  at  first  he  fails  to
detect  beneath  its  disguises  an  old  friend.
In  order  to  get  a  proper  grasp  of  what  the
true  explanation  of  the  purchasing  power  of
money  is,  it  is  imperative  to  bear  in  mind  that
money  is  essentially  a  commodity  or  a  promise
to  deliver  a  commodity.  The  truth  of  this
statement  becomes  apparent  when  we  briefly
note  how  the  use  of  money  has  evolved.
Originally,  no  doubt,  every  exchange  was
115
        <pb n="119" />
        116

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

effected  by  the  process  of  barter,  which  is
apt  not  only  to  try  the  patience,  but  also  to
fail  to  effect  satisfactorily  the  purposes  of
exchange.  Its  successful  completion  implies
in  every  case  a  perfect  double  coincidence  of
wants.  In  order  to  do  business  by  barter,  it  is
necessary  that  a  person  should  find  some
other  person  who  not  only  possesses  what  the
first  wants,  but  also  wants  what  the  first  has
to  offer.  And  it  implies  many  other  conditions
which  are  notable  by  their  absence  commonly.
The  exchange  of  cattle  on  equitable  terms  for
a  limited  quantity  of  small  things  would  be
found  difficult,  since  a  living  ox  is  indivisible.
Moreover,  when  there  is  no  common  medium  of
exchange,  it  is  not  easy  to  find  out  what  the
exchange  value  of  things  should  be  in  view  of
the  state  of  demand  and  supply.  To  know
the  value  of  wheat  involves  knowing  how
competition  has  settled  its  exchange  rate
against  iron  and  clothing  and  other  forms
of  food  and  furniture  and  what  not.  With
the  object—though  not  perhaps  with  the
deliberate  design—of  escaping  the  multitude
of  inconveniences  associated  with  barter,
people  got  into  the  habit  of  selecting  one  or
a  few  things  to  receive  in  payment  for  what
they  sold  and  to  make  purchases  with.  The
thing  or  things  chosen  were  naturally  articles
        <pb n="120" />
        MONEY

117

in  general  demand.  It  need  hardly  be
remarked  in  addition  that  they  tended  to
be  commodities  adapted  by  nature  for
the  purpose  of  effecting  exchanges  ;  and  that
a  process  of  natural  selection,  or  substitution, ­
  as  it  is  called  in  economics,  took  place
whereby  the  most  suitable  of  these  things
displaced  the  less  suitable.  The  chief  properties ­
  of  a  suitable  medium  of  exchange  may  be
enumerated.  It  must  be  divisible  without
losing  in  value,  to  enable  small  purchases  to
be  made  with  it  ;  comparatively  durable,  so
that  it  does  not  depreciate  in  value  when  it
is  held  for  a  time  ;  moderately  constant  in
value  for  the  same  reason  ;  and  moderately
precious  at  the  time  when  it  is  used  so  as  to
contain  a  convenient  value  in  a  convenient
bulk  and  weight.
Let  us  argue  out  the  theory  of  money  on  the
simple  supposition  that  every  time  an  exchange
is  effected  some  money  commodity  to  the
value  of  the  exchange  passes  hands  ;  that  is
to  say,  let  us  provisionally  ignore  credit
money,  the  peculiarities  of  which  will  be
treated  later.  It  has  been  alleged  that  the
problem  of  the  value  of  money  even  under
these  simple  conditions  is  inherently  alien  to
the  problem  of  the  value  of  things,  because
        <pb n="121" />
        118

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

pieces  of  money  are  not  wanted  to  keep
but  to  pass  on.  However,  to  this  objection
it  may  be  retorted  that  all  the  things  that
we  buy  are  not  goods  which  we  retain  permanently ­
  or  for  long.  Many  of  the  things
really  sought  when  we  make  purchases  are  the
services  associated  with  objects  which  are
passed  on  to  perform  the  same  services  for
other  people  when  so  much  of  each  service
as  we  require  has  been  used  up  by  ourselves.
When  we  habitually  have  recourse  to  railway
trains,  we  do  not  and  cannot  buy  them  for
our  private  use,  but  we  take  on  each  occasion
from  a  public  conveyance  just  as  much  of
the  service  of  transportation  as  we  require.
It  is  not  only  money  that  circulates,  as  it  is
put  :  railway  trains  and  ships,  and  telegraph
boys  and  hired  waiters  circulate  also,  and  in
circulating  do  work  for  which  the  community
is  ready  to  pay  a  price
Let  us  consider  next  how  the  prices  of
these  things  that  circulate  are  settled.  In
dealing,  say,  with  the  price  of  cabs  in  a
community,  we  have  to  analyse  the  forces  of
demand  and  supply.  Certain  utilities  consisting ­
  in  rides  in  cabs  are  demanded,  and  the
supply  with  which  we  are  primarily  concerned
is  the  supply  not  of  cabs  but  of  the  services
performed  by  cabs.  These  services,  however,
        <pb n="122" />
        MONEY

119

are  inseparable  from  cabs,  so  our  inquiries
lead  us  to  the  cost  of  production  of  cabs  and
an  equation  connecting  the  supplies  of  conveyance ­
  or  transport  obtainable  from  cabs
with  different  quantities  of  them.  The  equation ­
  sought  expresses  indirectly  the  rapidity
of  circulation  of  cabs,  so  to  speak.  Now  the
problem  of  money  is  very  like  this  problem.
In  the  case  of  money,  the  thing  demanded
is  facility  for  effecting  exchanges,  and  the
quantity  of  this  facility  depends  upon  the
number  of  things  with  which  it  is  associated
(that  is  the  quantity  of  coins  of  each  sort),  and
their  rapidity  of  circulation.  Broadly  speaking ­
  we  may  say  that  rapidity  of  circulation
refers  to  the  number  of  times  that  a  thing
can  repeat  in  a  given  period  the  services
associated  with  it.  It  is  true  that  the  demand
for  money  is  a  derived  demand  reflecting  the
demand  for  other  things,  but  so  is  the  demand
for  many  articles.
Coming  back  to  the  case  of  the  cabs,  we
may  say  that  the  price  of  cabs  is  settled  by  the
demand  for  them  in  relation  to  the  marginal
cost  of  production  of  different  quantities  of
them  ;  but  the  demand  for  them  is  derived
from  the  consumers’  demand  for  rides,  and  the
supply  forces,  while  expressing  directly  the  cost
of  production  of  different  quantities  of  cabs,
        <pb n="123" />
        120

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

express  indirectly  the  cost  of  production  of
rides  when  rapidity  of  circulation  is  taken  into
account.  Just  as  the  price  of  a  cab  is  determined ­
  by  such  influences,  so  is  the  price  of  a
piece  of  money.  If  the  money  commodity  be
gold  and  the  unit  be  an  ounce,  the  demand  for
ounces  of  gold  in  relation  to  the  marginal  cost
of  production  per  ounce  of  different  quantities
of  gold  settles  the  value  of  gold  money  ;  but
this  demand  and  supply,  so  long  as  we  confine
our  attention  to  the  monetary  uses  of  gold,
is  derived  from  the  demand  for  exchanging
power  on  the  one  hand,  and  the  supply  of
exchanging  power  associated  with  different
amounts  of  gold  money  on  the  other  hand.
Next,  we  must  take  into  account  the  fact
that  gold  is  not  demanded  merely  for  money
but  also  for  uses  in  the  arts.  The  recognition
of  this  fact  brings  with  it  few  complexities.
It  simply  involves  noting  that  the  demand
for  gold  is  a  composite  demand,  and  that  to
get  the  complete  demand  we  must  add  to  the
demand  for  gold  as  money  the  demand  for
gold  in  the  arts.  Gold  is  by  no  means  peculiar
in  being  the  object  of  a  composite  demand.
Probably  most  demands  are  composite.  Wood,
for  example,  is  demanded  for  buildings,
furniture,  boats,  and  numerous  other  things  ;
and  the  demand  for  wood  is  made  up  of  the
        <pb n="124" />
        MONEY

121

demand  for  it  for  building,  the  demand  for  it
for  furniture,  the  demand  for  it  for  boats,  and
so  on.  However,  the  composite  nature  of  the
demand  for  gold  being  allowed  for,  it  does
become  necessary  to  lay  down  another  proposition ­
  to  complete  the  theory  of  the  purchasing ­
  power  of  money.  This  other  proposition
denotes  the  manner  in  which  supplies  of  gold
are  distributed  between  its  two  broadly  distinguishable ­
  uses,  and  runs  as  follows  :  the
distribution  of  gold  between  its  uses  for  money
and  in  the  arts  is  such  that  its  marginal
utility  is  the  same  in  both  uses  ;  which
means,  in  other  words,  that  the  exchange
value  of  an  ounce  of  gold  must  equal  what  an
ounce  of  gold  will  buy.  An  illustration  of  the
correctness  of  this  proposition  will  be  found
in  the  fact  that  the  price  of  gold  bullion  in
England  never  departs  by  more  than  a
fractional  percentage  from  £3  17s.  lOd.  per
ounce,  that  is  934  pence  per  ounce.  This
apparently  curious  fact,  which  has  caused
not  a  little  misapprehension,  is  simply  a
result  of  the  legal  decision  that  a  sovereign,
which  equals  240  pence,  shall  contain  about
|f£  of  an  ounce  of  gold.
The  second  proposition  relating  to  the
value  of  money  having  been  enunciated  and
defended,  it  must  next  be  pointed  out  that
        <pb n="125" />
        122

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

even  this  proposition,  defining  the  principle
on  which  gold  is  distributed  between  money
and  the  arts,  is  not,  when  stated  in  general
terms,  peculiar  to  the  doctrine  of  money.
It  holds  of  all  cases  where  demand  is  composite. ­
  To  take  again  our  previous  example,
wood  would  be  so  distributed  between  housebuilding, ­
  furniture-making,  and  boat-building,
that  the  marginal  utilities  of  wood  for  all  these
purposes  would  be  the  same.
In  order  to  bring  the  theory  of  money
exactly  into  line  with  the  theory  of  the  prices
of  things,  it  must  finally  be  remarked  that
what  is  designated  purchasing-power  in  the
case  of  money  corresponds  with  what  is
designated  price  in  the  case  of  other  things.
Media  of  exchange  cannot  have  a  price  proper,
that  is  an  exchange  value  in  terms  of  money,
because  the  exchange  value  of  a  thing  cannot
be  expressed  in  terms  of  itself.  But  the
price  of  a  thing  means  the  amount  of  money
that  it  will  buy,  because  the  price  is  the  amount
of  money  which  will  buy  it,  and  exchange  is
a  simply  convertible  relation.  Now  what  a
unit  of  money  will  buy  is  called  its  purchasing
power.  Consequently,  employing  the  term
“  price  ”  broadly,  to  indicate  exchange  value
and  not  merely  exchange  value  in  money,  we
may  say  that  the  purchasing  power  of  money
        <pb n="126" />
        MONEY

123

is  the  price  of  money,  and  that  the  price  of
other  things  is  their  purchasing  power  in
goods.
The  statement  is  not  infrequently  met  with
that  the  true  theory  of  money  is  the  quantity
theory.  The  statement  is  correct  if  it  is
interpreted  to  mean  that  the  fundamental
proposition  laid  down  in  the  doctrine  known
as  the  quantity  theory  of  money  is  absolutely
true.  But  it  is  not  correct  if  it  is  interpreted
to  mean  that  this  proposition  sums  up  the
whole  explanation  of  the  exchange  value  of
money.  As  a  matter  of  fact  it  forms  only  a
part  of  the  complete  theory.  It  merely  outlines ­
  the  character  of  the  demand  for  money
and  expresses  no  opinion  as  regards  supply
and  the  relation  of  this  to  demand.  It  is  as
imperfect  as  a  quantity  theory  of  the  price
of  fish,  or  any  other  reproducible  article,
would  be.  The  quantity  theory  of  money
declares  that  the  purchasing  power  of  money
varies  inversely  as  its  quantity,  and  in  the
same  proportion.  The  evidence  of  its  truth
lies  on  the  surface.  In  the  absence  of  credit
money,  the  extent  of  the  means  for  buying
things  within  a  given  time  may  be  regarded
as  the  number  of  coins  (which  we  may
assume  to  be  all  of  one  kind)  multiplied  by
their  rapidity  of  circulation  within  the  given
        <pb n="127" />
        124

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

time  ;  and  there  is  no  reason  to  suppose  that
rapidity  of  circulation  will  be  affected  by
variations  in  the  supply  of  coins.  Moreover,
it  is  apparent  that  the  quantity  of  exchanging
which  each  unit  of  money  will  effect  in  any  one
transaction  must  depend  on  the  quantity  of
exchanging  to  be  done.  The  agency  intended
to  be  employed  in  carrying  out  exchanges  is
used  up,  and  just  used  up,  in  carrying  them
out,  owing  to  competition  on  the  part  of
people  possessing  money  with  which  they
intend  to  make  purchases.  And  the  quantity
of  exchanging  to  be  done  cannot  be  altered
by  variations  in  the  extent  of  the  means
for  effecting  exchanges.  So  the  purchasing
power  of  money  must  vary  inversely  and  in
the  same  proportion  as  the  supply  of  monetary
units.  This  doctrine,  it  will  be  observed,
is  implied  in  our  earlier  exposition,  but
something  is  gained  by  making  it  explicit.
Countless  illustrations  of  the  truth  of  the
quantity  theory  might  be  gleaned  from  the
pages  of  history.  Prescott,  in  his  History  of
the  Conquest  of  Peru,  writes  thus  of  what
happened  after  the  division  of  the  spoil
among  Pizarro’s  followers  at  Cuzco  :—“  The
effect  of  such  a  surfeit  of  the  precious  metals
was  instantly  felt  on  prices.  The  most
ordinary  articles  were  only  to  be  had  for
        <pb n="128" />
        MONEY

125

exorbitant  sums.  A  quire  of  paper  sold  for  ten
pesos  de  oro  ”—the  normal  purchasing  power
of  a  peso  de  oro  was,  we  are  informed,  equal  to
the  purchasing  power  of  something  between
£2  and  £3  to-day—“  a  bottle  of  wine,  for
sixty  ;  a  sword,  for  forty  or  fifty  ;  a  cloak,  for
a  hundred,—sometimes  more  ;  a  pair  of  shoes
cost  thirty  or  forty  pesos  de  oro,  and  a  good
horse  could  not  be  had  for  less  than  twentyfive
  hundred.  Some  brought  a  still  higher
price.  Every  article  rose  in  value,  as  gold
and  silver,  the  representatives  of  all,  declined.
Gold  and  silver,  in  short,  seemed  to  be  the
only  things  in  Cuzco  that  were  not  wealth.”
The  quantity  theory  of  money,  of  course,
holds  also  for  the  totality  of  money,  including
credit  media  of  exchange,  which  will  be  dealt
with  next
At  last,  with  the  introduction  of  credit
money,  we  are  brought  into  touch  with  a  new
fact.  Broadly  speaking,  credit  money  which
is  not  inconvertible  consists  in  documentary
promises  to  pay  commodity  money,  and
these  promises,  when  complete  confidence
is  reposed  in  those  who  are  pledged  by
them,  happen,  curiously  enough,  to  be
competent  for  effecting  exchanges.  This  is
the  only  case,  so  far  as  I  am  aware,  in  which
        <pb n="129" />
        126

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

the  promise  to  provide  an  article  serves
the  purpose  of  the  article.  The  promise  of
a  loaf  of  bread  will  not  satisfy  hunger,  but
the  promise  of  so  many  sovereigns  in  the
documentary  form  of  a  cheque  or  a  note  may
satisfy  the  requirements  of  people  as  completely ­
  as  sovereigns,  and  consequently  enable
exchanges  to  be  made.  It  is  essential,  of
course,  that  the  public  should  place  implicit
trust  in  those  who  make  the  promises,  that  is
in  the  persons  or  institutions  issuing  the  paper
money.  Were  such  undertakings  not  met
when  their  fulfilment  was  asked  for,  this
trust  would  be  destroyed.  Consequently  it  is
essential,  if  bank-notes  are  to  circulate  freely,
that  the  bankers  responsible  for  them  should
hold  such  reserves  of  bullion  that  nobody  who
wanted  a  note  changed  into  gold  would  find  his
request  refused.
How  much  these  reserves  should  be  at  any
given  time  it  is  not  easy  to  say,  but  bankers
know  from  their  experience  what  is  the  safe
limit  ;  and  it  is  possible  to  point  to  the
influences  whereby  the  normal  ratio  of  credit
money  to  standard  money  (that  is,  coins
of  the  money  commodity)  circulating  in  the
country  is  determined.  When  the  public
is  entirely  without  doubt  as  to  their  safety
in  accepting  paper  in  payment  of  debts,  paper
        <pb n="130" />
        MONEY

127

is  taken  as  readily  as  standard  money,  and
the  proportions  of  each  in  use  are  settled
merely  by  the  habits  and  customs  of  the  people,
which,  generally  speaking,  give  expression  to
what  is  convenient.  A  person  in  England
will  make  certain  payments  with  cheque,
certain  payments  with  notes,  and  others  with
sovereigns  and  small  change  :  whenever  he
has  to  hand  over  money  for  goods,  he  will
select  the  form  of  payment  which  best  suits
his  convenience.  Hence  the  proportion  of
credit  money  to  commodity  money  in  use
tends  to  settle  at  a  figure  which  reflects
public  convenience.  When  the  amount  of
credit  money  outstanding  is  in  excess  with
reference  to  this  criterion,  it  is  essential  that
sufficient  bullion  should  be  held  in  reserve
against  its  redemption.  And,  inasmuch  as
the  demand  for  credit  money  fluctuates,
which  means  that  for  a  time  less  than  the
normal  volume  of  it  may  be  wanted,  bullion
reserves  should  be  at  least  adequate  to  allow
of  as  large  a  shrinkage  of  paper  money  as  is
thinkable  in  the  light  of  experience.  Moreover, ­
  in  calculating  what  is  needful  we  must
reckon  the  demands  for  bullion  for  the  purposes ­
  of  international  trade.  Gold  is  required
from  time  to  time  to  make  foreign  payments,
as  we  shall  learn  in  the  next  chapter.  At
        <pb n="131" />
        128

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

first  international  indebtedness  is  recognised
or  discharged  by  means  of  bills  of  exchange,
but  ultimately,  when  final  settlements  have
to  be  made,  the  balance  must  be  met  with
exportations  of  gold.
This  will  be  a  suitable  place  to  point  out
that  token  money  (that  is  coins  like  shillings
and  pence  which  have  a  face  value  in  excess
of  the  value  of  the  metal  contained  in  them)
may  be  regarded  as  notes  made  of  metal.  For
convenience  they  are  made  complete  legal
tender  up  to  certain  amounts  when  issued  by
Government,  as  they  are  usually  at  the
present  time.  It  may  also  be  pointed  out
that  a  limited  amount  of  inconvertible  paper
money  may  circulate  in  a  country  without
depreciating  in  value.
In  1844  the  English  Government  made  a
successful  attempt  to  limit  the  issue  of  notes
by  the  Bank  Act  of  that  year,  but  whether
this  measure  proved  to  be  beneficial  all
round  is  problematical.  While  restricting
the  issue  of  notes,  the  Bank  Act  had  no
bearing  upon  the  cheque  system,  the  immense
ascendancy  of  which  of  late  years  could
hardly  have  been  foreseen.  At  the  present
time  the  bulk  of  the  payments  made  in  England ­
  are  made  in  the  form  of  cheques.  At  first
sight  the  cheque  system  would  seem  to  be  a
        <pb n="132" />
        MONEY

129

device  which  could  have  no  effect  upon  the
quantity  of  circulating  money  one  way  or  the
other.  On  the  face  of  it,  the  system  simply
enables  a  person  who  has  deposited  his
money  in  a  bank  to  give  authority  to
somebody  else,  in  the  form  of  an  order,  to
draw  that  money  out  instead  of  his  drawing
it  out  himself.  But  on  peering  more  curiously
into  the  matter  we  shall  detect  that,  once  this
method  of  making  payments  has  appeared,
it  becomes  possible  to  extend  enormously  the
quantity  of  media  of  exchange  in  use.  Cheques
take  the  place  of  cash  instead  of  serving  merely
as  a  means  of  getting  cash.  They  effect
millions  of  pounds’  worth  of  exchanging  without ­
  the  use  of  a  single  sovereign.
We  shall  have  to  enquire  how  the  process
whereby  the  quantity  of  the  media  of  exchange
is  magnified  through  the  agency  of  cheque
payments  is  actually  controlled  in  a  modern
business  economy,  and  what  its  effect  is  on
the  state  of  trade,  but  first  it  will  be  desirable
to  remind  ourselves  of  the  manner  in  which  the
limited  supplies  of  gold  in  the  banks  automatically ­
  stop  the  expansion  of  credit  money  after
it  has  reached  a  certain  figure.  Bankers  from
their  experience  and  from  reading  the  signs
of  the  market  know  approximately  what
demands  to  expect  for  gold  for  exporta-
        <pb n="133" />
        180

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

tion,  when  the  exportation  is  connected
with  the  state  of  foreign  trade,  and  what
demands  to  expect  for  gold  in  the  form  of
cash  for  current  use  in  the  country,  in  view
of  the  volume  of  credit  obligations  which
have  been  created  by  the  bank  through
loans  or  the  discounting  of  bills.  When
bankers  feel  that  the  limit  of  safety  is  being
transgressed  in  the  creation  of  credit  money,
by  the  granting  of  accommodation  and  the
discounting  of  bills,  and  that  if  it  continues  at
the  old  rate  the  gold  in  the  country  will  be
insufficient  to  meet  the  demands  for  gold,  so
that  banks  will  be  compelled  to  suspend  cash
payments,  they  begin  to  discourage  requests
for  credit  by  raising  the  price  at  which  they
are  prepared  to  grant  it,  that  is  by  raising  the
discount  rate.
The  situation  is  complicated  in  this  country
by  the  fact  that  we  have  been  reduced  in  a
large  measure,  not  by  law  but  by  the  drift
of  events,  to  a  one  reserve  system.  Bankers
place  their  reserves  in  bulk,  or  in  large
part,  with  the  Bank  of  England,  and  thus
the  Bank  of  England  becomes  the  chief
guardian  of  the  bullion  reserve  of  the  country.
A  theoretical  objection  to  the  arrangement  at
once  suggests  itself.  The  Bank  of  England
might  feel  the  necessity  of  curtailing  overdrafts,
        <pb n="134" />
        MONEY

131

accommodation  and  discounting  as  much  as
possible,  and  to  that  end  might  put  up  the
Bank  rate  ;  but  conceivably  other  banks
might  have  placed  very  large  reserves  with  the
Bank  of  England,  repayment  of  which  they
had  the  right  to  ask  for  in  gold,  and  they  might
feel  that  they  were  in  an  absolutely  secure
position  and  could  safely  undertake  an  even
greater  mass  of  credit  business.  Consequently
the  other  banks  might  keep  their  discount  rates
down,  so  that  the  only  effect  of  the  action  on  the
part  of  the  Bank  of  England  would  be  to  drive
its  customers  away  to  the  other  banks.  As
a  matter  of  fact  this  seldom  or  never  happens.
It  has  become  a  custom,  broadly  speaking,  for
all  the  banks  in  the  country  to  follow  the  lead
of  the  head  custodian  of  the  bullion  reserve,
that  is  the  Bank  of  England,  in  the  matter
of  the  discount  rate.  How  and  why  this
custom  arose,  and  in  what  way  the  Bank
of  England  takes  steps  in  exceptional  circumstances ­
  when  it  becomes  necessary  to  force
some  discounters  to  follow  its  lead,  are  interesting ­
  questions  which,  however,  we  shall  not
proceed  to  consider  here,  since  our  present
purpose  is  to  merely  show  how  the  activities
of  banks  affect  the  quantity  of  money  in  a
country,  and  not  to  discuss  the  principles  and
practice  of  banking  as  a  business.
        <pb n="135" />
        132

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

A  few  words  more  may  be  said,  nevertheless, ­
  of  the  problem  of  the  bullion
reserve.  One  advantage  of  a  small  reserve
is  that  it  compels  the  bank  or  banks  in
charge  of  it  to  keep  a  sharp  watch  on
the  state  of  business  and  nip  in  the  bud
such  an  excessive  issue  of  credit  as  would
deplete  it.  But  the  small  reserve  has  grave
countervailing  disadvantages.  Foreign  demands ­
  have  to  be  met  out  of  the  reserve,  and
of  exports  of  bullion  over-trading  may  not
have  been  the  cause,  but  as  soon  as  the
reserve  begins  to  shrink,  if  it  is  small,  it
becomes  necessary  to  raise  the  bank  rate  with
the  object  of  restoring  it  and  reducing  the
claims  that  can  be  made  upon  it.  A  rise  in
the  bank  rate  checks  importations  of  goods,
and  relatively  stimulates  exports,  because  by
limiting  the  quantity  of  borrowed  money  in
the  country  it  drags  down  home  prices.  It
may  occasionally  happen,  therefore,  that
business  as  a  whole  has  to  be  excessively  discouraged ­
  by  a  high  discount  rate  at  a  time
when  it  requires  encouragement  rather  than
discouragement.  Were  the  reserve  very  substantial, ­
  a  small  elevation  of  the  bank  rate
would  frequently  be  all  that  was  necessary
after  foreign  withdrawals  of  bullion,  and
possibly  in  many  cases  no  alteration  in  the
        <pb n="136" />
        /

MONEY

133

bank  rate  would  be  called  for.  At  the
present  time  in  more  than  one  country  the
problem  of  the  reserve  is  engaging  the
attention  of  statesmen,  bankers,  and  other
business  men.
The  manner  in  which  banks  in  the  ordinary
course  of  their  business,  which  may  be  tersely
described  as  dealing  in  credit,  can  augment  or
diminish  the  quantity  of  money,  broadly
regarded,  in  a  country,  is  of  particular  importance ­
  in  relation  to  a  curious  phenomenon
known  as  the  trade  cycle.  Trade  does  not
flow  along  uninterruptedly  in  any  modern
community.  It  has  its  ups  and  downs  even
if  it  is  viewed  in  the  mass.  Many  of  the
fluctuations  in  business  briskness,  which  one
would  naturally  expect,  take  place  in  different
industries  at  about  the  same  time,  as  one
would  not  so  readily  expect.  In  other  words
fluctuations  in  trade  tend  to  synchronise  in  the
different  industries,  so  that  at  any  one  time  the
business  of  a  country  in  the  aggregate  tends  to
be  depressed  or  the  reverse.  This  synchronism ­
  may  be  accounted  for  as  follows.  The
business  of  a  modern  community  makes  up  an
organic  whole,  every  part  of  which  is  directly
or  indirectly  connected  with  every  other
part.  If  engineers  are  slack  the  demand  for
        <pb n="137" />
        134

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

steel  sags  down  and  the  slackness  is  passed  on
from  the  producers  of  iron  and  steel  goods
to  the  producers  of  the  things  out  of  which
they  are  made.  Again,  when  the  engineers’
business  is  slack,  earnings  in  it  are  reduced,
with  the  result  that  the  people  engaged  in  it
make  fewer  purchases  than  they  did  previously.
Hence  the  depression  tends  to  be  passed  on
to  the  industries  which  supply  their  needs.  It
must  be  added,  moreover,  that  sluggishness  in
a  trade  is  apt  to  generate  inertness  and  an
oppressed  state  of  mind  in  those  who  are  conducting ­
  it,  and  that  this  psychological  mood
is  probably  communicated  to  other  business
men  through  the  intangible  avenues  which
social  psychology  recognises  ;  and  when
employers  are  in  a  state  of  depression  they  are
prone  to  shun  risks,  take  a  gloomy  view  of  the
future  and  curtail  their  undertakings.  It  is
comprehensible,  therefore,  that  the  bad  trade,
wherever  it  starts,  tends  to  spread  ;  and  it
may  be,  moreover,  that  there  is  some  common
cause  of  industrial  collapse  which  bears  directly
on  many  trades  at  the  same  time.
Another  and  even  more  striking  feature  of
trade  fluctuations  is  their  periodicity.  They
recur  with  a  certain  degree  of  regularity.
Trade  depressions  are  not  perfectly  periodic,
but  they  are  not  dispersed  in  an  altogether
        <pb n="138" />
        MONEY

135

irregular  way.  A  degree  of  periodicity  seems
to  rule  in  the  midst  of  much  irregularity.  It
usually  happens  that  an  interval  of  some
seven,  or  ten  and  -  a  half  years,  or  thereabouts, ­
  intervenes  between  the  culminating
points  of  two  periods  of  bad  trade.  The
explanation  of  this  curious  circumstance  has
been  attempted  by  many  economists,  but  it
cannot  be  said  that  as  yet  it  has  been  quite
satisfactorily  accounted  for.  Some  incline  to
attribute  it  to  a  cyclical  variation  in  the  seasons
which  affect  harvests  ;  but  the  nature  of  this
variation,  if  it  exists,  is  still  obscure.  Others
are  disposed  to  assume  implicitly  or  explicitly
that  there  is  a  cyclical  movement  in  what
may  be  called  the  social  mind  or  the  public
attitude  to  affairs  ;  and  yet  others  imagine
that  under  competition  the  rivalry  of  individual ­
  producers  with  one  another  automatically ­
  induces  over-production  for  which
collapse  is  the  unavoidable  penalty.  Which
of  these  causes  are  real  and  which  really
count  has  not  been  conclusively  determined
hitherto  ;  and  our  purpose  now  that  we
are  dealing  with  the  matter  of  money  is  not
to  discuss  them  but  to  consider  how  trade
oscillations  are  and  can  be  influenced  by  the
operations  of  banks  in  the  way  of  restricting
or  enlarging  the  credit  media  of  exchange.
        <pb n="139" />
        136

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

However  briskness  of  trade  may  have  been
initiated,  it  is  certainly  true  that  once  it  has
appeared  an  increasing  demand  is  made  upon
banks  for  money.  Business  men  are  anxious
to  get  the  means  of  undertaking  yet  more  of
the  profitable  business  that  is  being  offered
and  increase  their  earnings.  There  is  consequently ­
  a  larger  demand  for  overdrafts  and
a  larger  offer  of  bills  for  discounting  ;  and  it
is  undoubtedly  a  fact  that  when  the  means
of  prosecuting  further  business  are  readily
furnished  avenues  are  opened  for  over-trading.
Moreover  the  rise  in  prices  which  the  augmentation ­
  of  money  naturally  brings  about,
according  to  the  quantity  theory  of  money,
itself  tends  to  stimulate  production.  Banks
are,  therefore,  placed  from  time  to  time  in  a
position  in  which  they  can  either  urge  on  the
business  community  in  a  speculative  career
which  culminates  in  disaster  or  apply  the
curb  and  prevent  it  from  rushing  into
danger  in  its  excitement.  Banks  are  increasingly ­
  realising  how  they  are  placed
in  this  matter  and  recognising  their  obligations. ­
  One  difficulty,  naturally,  is  to  decide
at  what  point  good  trade  which  is  sound
becomes  over-trading  which  is  unsafe  ;  and
there  is  another  difficulty  in  that  banks
may  have  to  persuade  themselves  to  sacri-
        <pb n="140" />
        MONEY  137
fice  some  profits  in  the  interests  of  the
community.
We  have  learnt  that  variations  take  place
from  time  to  time  in  the  purchasing-power
of  money,  owing  to  the  influence  of  the  trade
cycle.  When  trade  is  good  prices  rise.  It
might  be  thought  that  when  trade  was  good
prices  would  fall,  because  when  trade  is  good
production  is  stimulated,  the  output  increases,
and  there  is  more  for  money  to  buy.  At
the  same  time,  however,  money  power
increases  in  consequence  of  an  augmented
rapidity  of  circulation  of  money  and  larger
issues  of  credit  money,  as  we  have  seen,  and
this  latter  influence  more  than  counteracts
the  former.  It  is  now  important  to  notice
that  the  purchasing-power  of  money  alters
not  only  cyclically  but  also  independently
of  the  state  of  trade.  On  the  one  side  the
value  of  money  is  affected  by  the  volume  of
production.  Inventions  which  render  production ­
  easier  increase  the  supply  of  goods
and  tend  to  lower  prices.  On  the  other  side,
it  is  affected  by  supplies  of  gold  and  the
development  of  banking.  New  discoveries
of  gold  and  the  introduction  of  easier  methods
of  winning  it,  by  adding  to  the  supplies
of  bullion  upon  which  the  quantity  of  money
        <pb n="141" />
        188

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

in  gold-using  countries  is  based,  are  bound
to  raise  prices,  other  things  being  equal.
Now  changes  on  the  side  of  demand  and
supply  with  reference  to  gold  are  not  likely
to  occur  together  in  such  a  way  that  the
purchasing-power  of  money  is  unaffected  ;  and
we  actually  find  on  studying  the  figures  which
indicate  the  level  of  prices  that  great  alterations ­
  have  taken  place  from  one  period  to
another  in  the  purchasing-power  of  money.
Roughly  speaking,  prices  fell,  largely  in
consequence  of  the  effects  of  the  industrial
revolution,  throughout  the  first  part  of  the
nineteenth  century.  Afterwards  for  a  few
years  they  kept  moderately  stationary  as
the  new  productive  forces  slackened  off  and
banking  developed  so  that  substitutes  for
coins  were  largely  introduced.  A  rise  in
prices  was  brought  about  by  the  gold  discoveries ­
  in  the  “  ’fifties  ”  ;  and  from  the
early  “  ’seventies  ”  until  nearly  the  close  of
the  nineteenth  century  prices  fell  materially,
partly  in  consequence  of  the  progress  of  the
community  in  the  matter  of  productive
methods,  and  partly  in  consequence  of  the
adoption  of  a  gold  currency  by  many
countries  which  had  previously  used  silver.
Of  late  years  there  has  been  another  change
in  the  value  of  money  :  since  about
        <pb n="142" />
        MONEY  139
the  middle  “  ’nineties  ”  prices  have  been
rising.
Variation  in  the  purchasing-power  of  money
may  be  a  serious  matter.  When  prices
fall  constantly  the  business  world  may  be
discouraged  and  thrown  into  a  state  of
depression.  On  the  other  hand,  when  prices
rise  constantly  business  may  become  overexcited ­
  ;  and  certainly  the  real  incomes  of
the  wage-earning  classes  are  automatically
reduced  so  that  discontent  is  engendered,
and  an  era  of  disturbance  in  the  distribution
of  wealth  is  ushered  in.
Indeed,  there  is  no  economic  phenomenon
which  remains  unaffected  by  an  alteration
of  the  purchasing-power  of  money.  The
rate  of  interest  will  probably  be  affected—
as  the  reader  will  understand  more  fully  after
studying  Chapter  VII.—because  an  anticipated
rise  in  the  value  of  what  is  saved  naturally
stimulates  saving,  while  an  anticipated  fall
in  its  value  has  the  reverse  effect.  And  the
relative  prices  of  different  classes  of  securities
will  undoubtedly  shift  in  a  disturbing  way.
When  prices  ascend,  for  instance,  the  value
of  shares  in  property,  say  of  shares  in
industrial  concerns,  will  ascend,  because
the  value  of  the  property  to  which  they
relate,  expressed  in  money,  will  ascend  ;  but
        <pb n="143" />
        140

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

no  ascent  will  take  place  in  the  value  of
securities  standing  for  loans  of  definite  sums
of  money  which  have  to  be  repaid  at  some
time,  for  example,  in  the  value  of  consols.
Nevertheless,  we  must  not  conclude  offhand
that  for  every  reason  steady  prices  are
theoretically  best  for  the  community.  One
thought  which  should  give  pause  may  be
expressed.  When  prices  are  steady  a  proper
share  of  the  benefits  of  progress  do  not
automatically  accrue  to  the  wage-earning
classes,  and  consequently  repeated  re-adjustments ­
  of  wages  become  needful.  Possibly  the
ideal  would  be  a  fall  in  prices  exactly  corresponding ­
  in  degree  with  productive  progress  ;
but  all  economists  would  not  endorse  this
pronouncement,  owing  to  the  effect  which  they
think  falling  prices  have  upon  the  directors
of  industry  ;  and  in  any  event  it  would  be
impossible  to  bring  about  exactly,  or  even
approximately,  such  a  variation  in  the
purchasing-power  of  money.  From  a  practical
point  of  view,  when  all  advantages  and
disadvantages  are  weighed,  it  is  probable
that  steady  prices  would  be  best  if  they
could  be  secured.  A  suggestion  has  been
made  that  countries,  acting  in  concert,
should  regulate  the  quantity  of  money  with
reference  to  index  numbers  of  prices  so  that
        <pb n="144" />
        MONEY

141

prices  are  kept  approximately  stationary  ;
but,  though  theoretically  such  a  scheme
could  be  carried  out,  he  would  be  a  rash
prophet  who  should  venture  to  foretell  that
it  is  really  feasible.  However,  we  may  conclude ­
  that  reliable  index  numbers  of  general
prices  ought  to  be  kept  and  made  public
(as  they  are),  and  carefully  watched  by  the
business  world  (as  they  are  not  ordinarily)
with  a  view  to  orders  relating  to  the  future
and  adjustments  of  salaries  and  wages.
Index  numbers  of  prices  are  figures,  scientifically ­
  calculated  from  the  prices  of  a  large
number  of  different  things,  which  indicate
how  on  an  average  prices  are  moving.
No  discussion  of  money  would  be  complete
without  some  reference  to  bimetallism,  a
subject  which  links  on  to  the  question  of  the
purchasing-power  of  money.  The  agitation
for  bimetallism  was  very  strong  some  years
after  the  fall  in  prices  which  began  in  the
“  ’seventies,”  but  of  late  it  has  collapsed,  and
it  can  no  longer  be  held  to  play  a  noticeable
part  in  current  economic  movements.  It
was  desired  by  some  with  the  object  of  stopping ­
  the  fall  in  prices  ;  by  others  with  the
object  of  steadying  prices  ;  by  others  with
the  object  of  creating  a  par  of  exchange
        <pb n="145" />
        142

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

between  the  gold-using  and  silver-using  countries ­
  ;  and  by  yet  others  with  the  object  of
enhancing  the  value  of  property  in  silver,  or
at  least  of  stopping  its  depreciation.
Bimetallism  means  making  the  standard  of
value  an  alternative  consisting  in  a  given
quantity  of  gold  or  a  given  quantity  of  silver
of  a  larger  amount,  so  that  for  currency  purposes ­
  silver  and  gold  are  interchangeable  at  a
fixed  ratio.  The  proposal  was  that  three  or
four  leading  countries  should  combine  and  fix
a  ratio  to  be  observed  in  the  currency  laws
of  the  countries  concerned.  It  was  argued  that
in  this  event  the  ratio  all  over  the  world
between  the  values  of  gold  and  silver  would
be  drawn  to  the  fixed  ratio  decided  upon.
Theoretically,  the  argument  was  flawless,  at
any  rate  for  moderate  variations  in  the
supplies  of  either  gold  or  silver,  on  the
assumption  that  a  substantial  proportion  of
the  supplies  of  these  metals  in  existence
was  devoted  to  monetary  uses.  If  silver
became  very  plentiful,  so  that  it  tended
to  fall  in  value  with  reference  to  gold,
masses  of  silver  would  displace  gold  in  the
currencies  and  reserves  of  the  bimetallic
countries,  and  outside  these  currencies  and
reserves  supplies  of  gold  would  be  consequently ­
  augmented  while  supplies  of  silver
        <pb n="146" />
        MONEY

143

would  be  reduced.  Similarly  if  gold  became
relatively  more  plentiful  corresponding  effects
would  follow.  Either  process  would  continue ­
  until  the  resultant  alterations  in  the
outside  supplies  of  gold  and  silver  were
sufficient  to  bring  their  market  values  to  the
fixed  ratio.  Were  the  scheme  adopted  with
a  ratio  which  would  make  it  work  at  first,
it  would  only  break  down  if  the  supplies
of  one  of  the  metals  became  so  large  as
to  result  in  the  complete  ejection  of  the
other  metal  from  the  currencies  of  the  bimetallic ­
  countries.  Comparatively  successful
bimetallic  arrangements  were  made  by  certain
countries  many  years  ago  ;  but  it  was  realized
by  the  far-seeing  during  the  late  agitation
that  immense  practical  difficulties  lay  in  the
way  of  a  revival  of  the  system  on  the  basis
of  an  agreement  between  three  or  four  leading ­
  countries.
If  bimetallism  were  adopted,  and  the
exchange  ratio  between  gold  and  silver
were  made  such  that  some  silver  would  be
attracted  into  currencies,  prices  would  be
somewhat  elevated  because  the  bullion  basis
of  currencies  would  be  augmented  by  the
incorporation  of  the  silver.  Also  fluctuations
in  the  purchasing-power  of  money  might  be
lessened,  if  supplies  of  silver  did  not  fluctuate
        <pb n="147" />
        144

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

much  more  than  those  of  gold,  because
as  gold  got  scarce  silver  would  tend  to  fill  the
gap  made  in  the  currency,  and  when  silver
got  scarce  gold  would  tend  to  fill  the  gap  left.
And  there  would  obviously  be  a  par  of
exchange  between  the  gold-using  and  silverusing ­
  countries.  A  par  of  exchange  is
provided  when  the  standards  of  value  in  the
two  groups  of  countries  do  not  vary  independently. ­
  When  they  vary  independently,  a
rise  or  fall  in  the  value  of  silver  with  reference
to  gold  naturally  causes  disturbance  in  the
trade  between  the  two  groups  of  countries.
The  inducement  to  make  the  bimetallic
experiment  lost  its  power  after  prices  began
to  rise  ;  and  before  that  it  had  been  weakened
by  the  closure  of  the  Indian  mints  to  the
free  coinage  of  silver,  which  meant  that  the
quantity  of  silver  coins  in  circulation  was  so
regulated  by  the  Government  that  their
purchasing-power  was  kept  constant  with
the  purchasing-power  of  gold,  and  a  par  of
exchange  between  gold-using  countries  and
India  was  created.
        <pb n="148" />
        CHAPTER  VI

INTERNATIONAL  TRADE
The  theory  of  international  trade  is  another
section  of  Economics  which  one  may  be
tempted  to  represent  as  something  apart
from  the  general  theory  of  value.  It  is  a
commonplace  to  say  that  value  in  the  home
trade  is  settled  by  cost  of  production  ;  and  the
statement  is  broadly  accurate,  because  value  in
the  home  trade  is  determined  by  the  marginal
costs  of  different  quantities  of  a  thing  in
relation  to  the  demand  for  different  quantities.
On  the  other  hand,  it  is  equally  a  commonplace ­
  to  affirm  that  international  values
are  not  settled  by  the  principle  of  cost  of
production,  or  at  any  rate  not  directly,  but
by  the  principle  of  comparative  cost.  Ricardo
seems  to  have  been  the  first  to  propound
this  fruitful  doctrine;  but  it  was  left  for
later  writers  to  make  fully  explicit  that
the  doctrine  of  comparative  costs  is  an
integral  part  of  the  theory  of  home  values.
This  latter  is  one  of  the  ideas  that  I
145

K
        <pb n="149" />
        146

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

want  to  make  outstanding  in  the  present
chapter  ;  and  there  is  involved  in  it  the
further  idea  that  in  the  form  which  the
theory  of  value  assumes  in  the  theory  of
international  trade  marginal  incidents  play
parts  as  pre-eminent  as  those  assigned  to
them  in  the  economic  scenes  which  we  have
already  contemplated.  At  the  same  time,  of
course,  I  shall  have  to  make  perfectly  plain
the  salient  points  in  the  doctrine  of  comparative ­
  costs.
The  best  way  to  realise  the  relation  of  part
and  whole  which  subsists  between  the  two
theories  referred  to,  and  at  the  same  time
to  get  an  understanding  of  the  principles
of  foreign  trade,  is  to  begin  by  dissecting  the
more  complex  of  the  two  theories,  that  is
the  theory  of  home  price.  The  theory  of
home  price  may  be  helpfully  regarded  as
consisting  of  two  parts,  first,  of  a  pure  theory
of  exchange,  or  theory  of  barter,  as  it  is
sometimes  called,  and,  secondly,  of  a  theory
of  the  reactions  which  follow  upon  the
process  of  exchange.  We  shall  at  once
analyse  the  former  theory.
It  is  premised  that  certain  articles  have
been  produced  in  certain  ratios  and  that
there  exist  given  quantities  of  these  articles
to  dispose  of.  The  problem  is  to  determine
        <pb n="150" />
        INTERNATIONAL  TRADE  147

at  what  rates  they  will  exchange  with  one
another.  The  solution  of  the  problem  is
afforded  by  the  statement  that  they  will
exchange  in  proportion  to  the  relative  demands
for  them.  Of  two  things,  the  supplies  of
which  are  equal,  the  one  for  which  there  is
the  greatest  demand  will  be  the  one  to  realise
the  highest  price.
Now,  the  value  of  things  having  been  settled
in  this  way,  it  is  sure  to  be  found  that  the
agents  producing  some  of  them  are  more
richly  rewarded  than  the  agents  producing
others.  The  producers  of  the  things  that  sell
best  have  larger  net  receipts  to  share  out
than  the  producers  of  the  things  that  sell
indifferently  well.  Consequently,  the  industries
furnishing  the  former  articles  will  prove
exceptionally  attractive  to  such  labour,
capital,  and  enterprise  as  is  seeking  occupation
in  the  community,  and  such  as  can  be  shifted
from  their  present  uses  ;  and  at  the  same
time  the  relatively  meagre  earnings  of  the
factors  engaged  in  the  industries  producing
the  latter  articles  will  exercise  an  expulsive
force  upon  such  of  these  factors  as  can  be
transferred  to  other  purposes,  and  repel  the
supplies  of  productive  power  which  would
otherwise  have  been  absorbed  by  the  less
successful  industries.  As  a  result  of  the  crea-
        <pb n="151" />
        148

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

tion  of  these  two  sets  of  forces,  the  fortunate
industries  will  expand  and  the  unfortunate
industries  will  contract,  until  a  position  of
equilibrium  is  reached  at  which  labour  of  the
same  capacity  in  equally  agreeable  occupations ­
  will  tend  to  earn  the  same,  and  the
remuneration  of  capital,  so  far  as  industrial
risks  are  identical,  will  tend  to  be  everywhere
the  same.  Hence  the  conclusion  that  within
an  area  over  which  competition  rules  and
throughout  which  capital,  labour,  and  enterprise ­
  are  comparatively  mobile,  things  will
exchange  according  to  their  marginal  costs  of
production.
Thus,  for  our  present  purpose,  may  the
theory  of  the  home  trade  be  portrayed—as  a
union  of  two  distinguishable  doctrines.  It
must  not  be  supposed,  of  course,  that  the
processes  embraced  by  the  one  doctrine  take
place  independently  of  the  processes  embraced
by  the  other.  The  two  sets  of  processes  go
on  concurrently  so  that  normally  there  is
no  noticeable  breach  between  the  prices  of
things  and  their  costs  of  production.
Now  the  fundamental  distinction  between
home  trade  and  international  trade  consists
in  the  fact  that  in  the  latter  the  second  set
of  processes,  which  I  have  called  the  reactions,
cannot  have  the  same  free  play  as  in  the
        <pb n="152" />
        INTERNATIONAL  TRADE  149

former.  In  the  former  they  operate  strongly
between  the  most  widely  distant  parts  ;  but
in  the  latter  they  weaken  or  cease  when  the
boundaries  of  countries  have  to  be  crossed.
A  perfect  example  of  the  circumstances
of  foreign  trade  would  exist  in  the  home
trade  were  it  a  fact  that  between  two
contiguous  parts  of  a  country  trading  with
one  another  there  could  be  no  passage  [  of
labour  and  capital.  Imagine  a  trade  under
such  conditions  between  the  English  counties
of  Lancashire  and  Yorkshire,  and  imagine
that  in  some  peculiar  way,  owing  to  itsclimatic
  or  geographical  conditions,  or  the
nature  of  its  soil,  Lancashire  is  exceptionally ­
  favourable  for  producing  in.  When
trade  opened  between  Lancashire  and  Yorkshire ­
  the  most  paying  industries  in  Lancashire
would  flourish  at  the  expense  of  the  less
paying,  and  the  same  thing  would  happen
in  Yorkshire.  To  that  extent  the  reactions
referred  to  would  be  set  in  motion.  But
when  these  reactions,  working  within  the  two
fields,  had  brought  about  their  fullest  effects,,
it  would  still  be  true  that  earnings  in  Lancashire ­
  would  be  higher  than  earnings  in  Yorkshire, ­
  despite  the  fact  that  earnings,  whether
of  labour  or  capital,  would  be  equalised
throughout  Yorkshire  and  would,  at  the
        <pb n="153" />
        150

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

same  time,  be  equalised  throughout  Lancashire. ­
  In  enunciating  the  proposition  that
within  each  of  these  areas  earnings  would  be
equalised,  of  course  I  mean  to  imply,  in  the
case  of  capital,  when  allowance  is  made  for
difference  between  risks,  and,  in  the  case  of
labour,  when  allowance  is  made  for  differences
in  respect  of  the  capacity  of  people  and
the  general  amenities  and  difficulties  of  the
various  occupations  pursued.  In  this  fanciful
picture  we  have  an  exact  representation  of
the  conditions  of  the  problem  of  international
values.
The  next  question  to  ask  and  answer,  and
one  to  which  a  convincing  response  can  be
given  in  a  very  short  space,  is  why  labour
and  capital  are  comparatively  immobile
internationally.  The  answer,  as  regards
labour,  is  because  patriotism,  differences  of
language  and  national  customs,  and  attachment ­
  to  the  surroundings,  both  geographical
and  social,  in  which  people  have  been  born,
naturally  keep  them  at  home,  as  a  rule,
unless  great  inducements  are  offered  to  them
to  change  their  country,  and  even  against
very  great  inducements.  And,  as  regards
capital,  the  answer  is  that  the  capitalist
feels  that  his  property  is  more  secure  when
it  is  so  located  that  he  can  watch  its  use,
        <pb n="154" />
        INTERNATIONAL  TRADE  151

and  when  the  conditions  attending  its  use
are  so  thoroughly  known  to  him  that  he  can,
without  much  trouble  and  delay,  take  the
requisite  steps  to  protect  it  if  prudence  so
dictates.  Of  course,  we  should  be  mistaken
in  saying  that  labour  is  absolutely  immobile
internationally.  Labour  flows  from  any  centre
all  over  the  world,  but  it  flows  with  less  ease
between  places  with  different  languages  than
between  places  with  the  same  language,  with
less  ease  again  between  different  empires  than
between  regions  forming  parts  of  the  same
empire,  and  with  less  ease  yet  again  between
a  country  and  its  colonies  than  between
different  parts  of  the  same  country.  Capital
also  overflows  national  boundaries,  but  only
as  a  rule  under  the  persuasion  of  a  more
than  usually  generous  rate  of  interest  ;  and  in
so  far  as  capital  goes  abroad,  it  will  be  found
that  its  favourite  investments  are  public
securities,  and  such  industrial  stock  as  is
closely  related  to  them.
As  we  have  now  formed  a  general  idea  of
the  problem  of  international  exchange  we
may  at  once  proceed  to  its  detailed  solution.
It  will  be  convenient  to  do  so  by  laying  down
a  series  of  propositions.  The  one  which  is
logically  the  first  is  the  following,  that
        <pb n="155" />
        152

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

trade  cannot  be  opened  between  any  two
countries  unless  there  is  a  difference  between
the  comparative  values  of  transportable
things  in  each  of  them.  I  speak  of  comparative ­
  values  instead  of  comparative  costs
so  as  to  include  the  trade  in  things  which  are
not,  or  cannot  be,  produced  in  one  or  more
of  the  trading  countries.  By  comparative
values  is  meant  the  ratios  of  values  in  the
two  countries.  Let  us  suppose  there  are  two
countries  only  and  two  commodities  only,
and  for  the  sake  of  simplicity  of  exposition  let
us  assume  that  both  countries  use  the  same
kind  of  money,  and  that  there  is  no  cost  of
carriage.  Then,  if  the  countries  are  England
and  Germany,  and  the  commodities  are  timber
and  steel,  and  these  commodities  fetch  respectively ­
  20s.  a  ton  and  40s.  a  ton  in  England,
and  25s.  a  ton  and  50s.  a  ton  in  Germany,  a
permanent  trade  cannot  arise  because  in  both
countries  steel  is  just  twice  as  expensive  as
timber.  Trade  of  a  kind  would  appear  in  which
England  would  export  both  steel  and  timber
and  import  money,  but  this  trade  would
come  to  an  end  as  soon  as  the  level  of  prices
was  the  same  in  both  countries,  timber  and
steel  realising  respectively  in  both  England
and  Germany,  22s.  and  44s.,  let  us  suppose.
Of  course  as  money  left  Germany  for  England
        <pb n="156" />
        INTERNATIONAL  TRADE  153

prices  would  fall  in  Germany  and  rise  in
England,  and  when  the  point  was  reached  at
which  the  prices  of  both  commodities  were
the  same  in  both  countries  there  would  be
no  advantage  in  sending  either  commodity
abroad,  because  when  sent  abroad  it  would
realise  no  more  than  it  would  fetch  at  home.
Hence  our  first  proposition  is  proved  that
comparative  values  must  differ  if  there  is  to
be  permanent  trade  between  countries.
The  second  proposition  to  be  enunciated  and
defended  is  two-sided  :  that  when  a  position
of  equilibrium  in  international  trade  is  reached
(a)  comparative  values  will  be  identical,  and
(b)  in  a  given  period  the  total  value  that  a
country  exports  will  equal  the  total  value
that  it  imports,  apart  from  cost  of  transport
which  we  shall  continue  to  ignore  to  expedite
our  argument.  The  prior  section  of  this
proposition  is  in  reality  a  corollary  from  the
first  proposition  laid  down,  for  it  is  apparent
that  so  long  as  a  difference  between  comparative ­
  values  remains  there  will  be  a  disposition
on  the  part  of  business  men  in  both  countries
to  increase  or  decrease  their  exports.  The
existence  of  a  difference  between  comparative
values  is  sufficient  evidence  of  the  profitableness ­
  of  their  doing  so.  At  first,  however,
one  may  feel  a  difficulty  in  realizing  how
        <pb n="157" />
        154

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

comparative  values  which  were  different  can
become  identical.  The  explanation  is  to  be
found  in  one,  or  the  other,  or  both  of  these
circumstances  :  (1)  that  altering  the  quantity
of  a  particular  thing  produced  in  a  country
is  likely  to  alter  its  marginal  cost  of  production,
and  (2)  that  when  an  article  ceases  to  be
produced  in  a  country,  so  that  all  its  supplies
of  the  article  are  imported,  additional  imports
must  lower  the  value  of  the  article  in  consequence ­
  of  the  law  of  diminishing  utility.
Let  us  take  the  case  of  two  countries,
say  England  and  France,  one  of  which,  say
England,  is  exporting  cotton  goods  and  the
other  exporting  wheat.  At  first  let  the  cost
per  piece  of  cotton  goods  and  per  bushel
of  wheat  respectively  be  40s.  and  21s.  in
England,  and  41s.  and  17s.  in  France.  Trade
will  arise  between  the  two  countries,  as  we
have  seen,  France  exporting  wheat  and  England ­
  exporting  cotton  goods.  When  England
exports  the  cotton  goods  to  France,  which
were  not  previously  sent  there,  England’s
cotton  industry  must  naturally  expand,  and
the  result  may  be  that  the  marginal  cost  of
production  of  the  cotton  goods  will  eventually
drop  to  39s.  a  piece.  Correspondingly,
England’s  importation  of  wheat  will  cause  a  contraction ­
  of  her  wheat  farming,  with  the  result
        <pb n="158" />
        INTERNATIONAL  TRADE  155

that  the  marginal  cost  of  wheat  may  drop  to
20s.  In  France,  at  the  same  time,  reciprocal
effects  will  have  _  been  wrought  on  cotton
producing  and  wheat  producing,  so  that
costs  there  may  have  become  respectively
40s.  and  18s.  Further  trade  will  bring  about
further  alteration  in  relative  costs  of  production ­
  in  both  of  the  countries,  and  finally  a
position  may  be  reached  in  which  the  comparative ­
  costs  are  38s.  Cd.  and  19s.  in  both
countries  when  England  is  exporting  76,000
pieces  of  cotton  goods  annually  and  receiving
from  France  154,000  bushels  of  wheat.  This
would  be  the  position  of  equilibrium,  for
comparative  costs  would  be  identical  in  the
two  countries,  and  England  would  be  sending
goods  to  France  of  the  annual  value  of  £146,300
(38s.  6d.  X  76,000),  and  receiving  from  France
goods  of  the  same  annual  value  (19s.  x
154,000).  Were  trade  to  expand  still  further,
France  receiving  more  than  76,000  pieces  of
cotton  goods  and  exporting  to  England  more
than  154,000  bushels  of  wheat,  over  the  last
step  in  trade  loss  would  be  incurred.  This
step  would  therefore  be  retraced,  under  the
influence  of  the  new  difference  between  comparative ­
  values  which  it  created.
The  objection  may  be  raised  that  though
the  state  of  affairs  depicted  above  is  possible,
        <pb n="159" />
        156

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

it  is  not  inevitable  and  that  the  two  countries
might  go  on  trading  indefinitely  without  comparative ­
  costs  in  the  two  countries  becoming
the  same.  This  is  a  perfectly  valid  objection,
but  if  what  is  supposed  happens,  trade
would  continue  until  one  industry  had  disappeared ­
  in  one  of  the  countries  at  least.
Let  us  postulate  that  trade  does  reach  such  a
position  ;  that  England  sends  to  France
100,000  pieces  of  cotton  goods,  and  that  the
French  cotton  industry  disappears.  Let  it
be  that  the  costs  in  England  are  39s.  for  cotton
goods  and  20s.  for  wheat,  their  comparative
values  in  France  being  40s.  and  19s.  Then,
if  trade  still  increased  in  volume  the  value  of
cotton  goods  would  fall  in  France,  the  cost  of
wheat  rising,  let  us  suppose,  until  comparative
values  in  France  were  equal  to  comparative
costs  in  England,  or  until  farming  disappeared
in  England,  in  which  case  each  country  would
be  left  with  one  exporting  industry  only,
and  the  quantity  of  exchanging  between  the
two  countries  would  advance  until,  under  the
operation  of  the  law  of  diminishing  utility  in
both  countries,  comparative  values  would
become  the  same.  We  thus  see  that  a  limit
at  which  comparative  values  are  identical  is
inevitable.  To  this  theory  the  admission  of
more  countries  and  more  commodities,  and
        <pb n="160" />
        INTERNATIONAL  TRADE  157

the  introduction  of  cost  of  carriage  make  no
essential  difference.  The  peculiar  case  of
international  trade,  known  as  “  dumping,”
has  already  been  dealt  with  in  Chapter  IV.
It  remains  to  establish  the  latter  half  of  our
second  fundamental  principle,  namely,  the
well-worn  statement  that  exports  pay  for
imports.  The  truth  of  this  statement  has
been  canvassed  again  and  again,  and  at  first
experience  would  seem  to  lend  support  to  the
sceptical.  When  we  examine  the  statistics
of  imports  and  exports  of  different  countries
we  do  not  find  a  single  case  in  which  the  two
appear  to  balance.  Further  thought,  nevertheless, ­
  will  probably  lead  us  to  the  view  that
the  pronouncement  that  exports  pay  for
imports,  the  correctness  of  which  is  implied  in
the  reasoning  above,  is  justified.
Were  it  the  case  that  in  international
trade  no  credit  was  given,  that  people  in
one  country  never  made  loans  or  gifts  to
people  in  another  country,  that  nobody
travelled  abroad,  and  no  ships  coaled  and
refitted  abroad  ;  and  were  it  a  fact  that  the
intangible  services  performed  by  people  in
one  country  for  people  in  another  country
were  all  entered  in  the  statistics  of  imports
and  exports—in  this  event  it  is  obvious
that  exact  correspondence  (apart  from  cost
        <pb n="161" />
        158

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

of  carriage)  between  the  recorded  imports
and  exports  of  the  two  countries  would  be
inevitable.  It  would  be  inevitable  because  in
international  trade  the  only  final  form  of
payment  must  consist  in  goods,  including
bullion,  or  services.  But  actually  equivalence
is  not  to  be  found,  because  all  the  circumstances ­
  which  have  been  ruled  out  of  our
hypothetical  case  exist  in  actual  practice.
The  quantity  of  international  loans  is
enormous,  and  for  a  substantial  proportion
of  them  Englishmen  are  responsible  as
lenders.  When  a  foreign  loan  is  made  the
exports  of  the  lending  country  are  stimulated,
and  so  are  the  imports  of  the  borrowing
country.  Imagine,  for  instance,  that  people
in  England  invest  £1,000,000  in  Canadian
industries.  Then  at  first  the  quantity  of
money  in  England  is  diminished  so  that
prices  fall,  and  the  quantity  of  money  in
Canada  is  increased  so  that  prices  rise.
Consequently  Canada  becomes  a  good  market
to  sell  in  and  a  bad  market  to  buy  in,  while
England  becomes  a  good  market  to  buy  in  and
a  bad  market  to  sell  in.  Extra  buying  from
and  reduced  selling  to  England,  and  extra
selling  to  and  reduced  buying  from  Canada,
continue  until  the  level  of  prices  in  the  two
countries  has  been  brought  to  the  old  level,
        <pb n="162" />
        INTERNATIONAL  TRADE

159

that  is,  until  Canada’s  imports  in  relation  to
her  exports  have  advanced  by  £1,000,000
over  what  was  normal,  and  until  in  England
exactly  the  reverse  has  happened.  And  just
as  loans  and  their  repayment  disturb  the
balance-of  trade,  so  does  the  discharge  of
indebtedness  in  the  form  of  interest  on  loans.
The  country  which  has  to  pay  in  foreign
parts  annual  interest  to  the  amount  of,  say,
£5,000,000  must  have  an  annual  excess  of
exports  to  the  value  of  £5,000,000,  in  comparison ­
  with  what  the  balance  of  its  trade
would  have  been  otherwise.
The  way  in  which  the  balance  of  trade  is
influenced  by  the  expenditure  of  travellers
abroad  and  by  the  coal  and  food  received  by
vessels  abroad  is  more  immediately  apparent.
Whether  a  German  sends  goods  to  an  Englishman ­
  residing  in  England,  or  provides  him
with  them  when  he  is  on  German  soil  to
consume  them  there,  is  a  matter  of  indifference ­
  as  regards  the  balance  of  international
obligations  of  a  pecuniary  character.  All
that  Englishmen  receive  abroad  has  to  be
reckoned  as  a  part  of  England’s  imports.
Finally,  comment  on  the  important  class  of
intangible  services  is  called  for.  These  are
not  recorded  in  a  country’s  returns  of  imports
and  exports,  but  they  have  to  be  paid  for
        <pb n="163" />
        160

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

nevertheless.  They  consist  in  the  carrying
services  performed  by  one  country  for
another,  for  instance,  by  an  English  vessel
in  trade  between  Spain  and  America,  and
also  in  agency  and  financial  work.  For
these  two  classes  of  services  England  receives
enormous  sums  annually.  Their  value  is  a
part  of  her  real  exports  since  they  are  actual
services  provided  for  other  countries,  though
they  do  not  appear  in  her  recorded  exports.
In  discharge  of  them,  however,  there  does
appear  on  the  other  side  of  the  account  a  large
volume  of  tangible  imports.
Imports  and  exports  which  do  not  figure  in
trade  statistics  are  known  as  “  invisible,”
but  though  overlooked  by  the  official  eye
they  are  as  real  in  value  as  the  most  ponderable ­
  things.  Enough  has  now  been  said  to
demonstrate  that,  in  the  sense  in  which  it
has  been  used,  the  statement  that  exports
pay  for  imports  is  correct.  Finally,  it  may
be  added  that  the  omitted  cost  of  transport
of  imported  goods  can  be  attached  to  their
value  to  make  our  theory  exhaustive  of  the
facts.
Ordinarily  there  are  gains  accruing  from
international  trade  which  are  undoubted  and
considerable.  Through  foreign  trade  a  country
        <pb n="164" />
        INTERNATIONAL  TRADE

161

may  get  what  it  could  never  procure  otherwise.
Disraeli  wrote  in  1844  :—“  Every  one  at  a
French  dinner  is  served  on  a  cold  plate.  The
reason  of  a  custom,  or  rather  a  necessity,
which  one  would  think  a  nation  so  celebrated
for  their  gastronomical  taste  would  recoil
from,  is  really,  it  is  believed,  that  the  ordinary
French  porcelain  is  so  very  inferior,  that  it
cannot  endure  the  preparatory  heat  for
dinner.  The  common  white  pottery,  for
example,  which  is  in  general  use,  and  always
found  at  the  cafés,  will  not  bear  vicinage  to  a
brisk  kitchen  fire  for  half  an  hour.  Now,  if
we  only  had  that  treaty  of  commerce  with
France,  which  has  been  so  often  on  the  point
of  completion,  the  fabrics  of  our  unrivalled
potteries,  in  exchange  for  their  capital  wines,
would  be  found  throughout  France.  The
dinners  of  both  nations  would  be  improved  ;
the  English  would  gain  a  delightful  beverage,
and  the  French  for  the  first  time  in  their  lives
would  dine  off  hot  plates.  An  unanswerable
instance  of  the  advantages  of  commercial
reciprocity  !  ”  More  extreme  examples  of  a
gain  of  this  sort  are  to  be  found  in  the
natural  products,  foreign  to  its  own  climes,
which  a  country  imports.  England  would
have  to  go  without  tea,  coffee,  spices,
cotton,  bananas,  and  scores  of  other
        <pb n="165" />
        162

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

things  if  all  foreign  trade  were  effectively
interdicted.
In  addition  a  country  usually  reaps  a  benefit
out  of  foreign  commerce  in  that  it  gets
cheaper  things  of  which  it  would  not  be  entirely ­
  deprived  were  foreign  trade  suppressed.
Generally  speaking  all  exchanging,  whether
intra-national  or  international,  results  in
advantage.  People  produce  what  they  do  not
want  in  order  to  exchange  it  for  what  they
do  want,  when  that  happens  to  be  the  most
economical  way  of  attaining  gratification.
But  conceivably  people  may  now  and  then
be  driven  by  competition  into  a  course  of
action,  involving  foreign  commerce,  which
eventuates  in  a  less  economical  way  of
satisfying  their  wants.  They  may,  for
instance,  be  induced  to  divert  some  labour
and  capital  from  an  industry  subject  to
increasing  returns  with  a  view  to  enlarging
the  output  from  an  industry  subject  to  decreasing ­
  returns  ;  so  that  on  the  whole  they
lose  in  the  long  run  without  knowing  it,
though  gains  were  reaped  by  traders  at  each
step  of  the  exchange.  It  is  theoretically
conceivable,  indeed,  that  both  national
parties  to  the  exchange  might  lose.  These
peculiar  phenomena  are  of  little  or  no  importance ­
  practically,  but  from  the  point  of
        <pb n="166" />
        INTERNATIONAL  TRADE  163

view  of  theory  they  must  be  admitted.  They
are  special  cases  of  the  general  exception  to
the  doctrine  of  maximum  satisfaction,  to
which  Dr.  Marshall  has  drawn  attention.
The  doctrine  of  maximum  satisfaction,  according ­
  to  one  interpretation  of  it,  laid  it  down
that  under  competition  labour  and  capital
tend  to  be  devoted  to  their  most  profitable
uses  ;  but  Dr.  Marshall  has  pointed  out  that
this  generalisation  does  not  invariably  hold,
since,  for  example,  consumers’  surplus  could
be  increased  by  diverting  some  demand
from  things  produced  according  to  decreasing
returns  and  concentrating  it  instead  on  things
of  which  the  production  was  subject  to
increasing  returns.  The  explanation  of  this
curious  conclusion,  which,  of  course,  only
holds  when  other  things  are  equal,  is  that
under  competition  the  individual  acts  for
himself  and  consequently  leaves  out  of  his
calculations  that  the  price  of  some  things
would  fall  when  they  were  consumed  less
while  the  price  of  other  things  would  fall
when  they  were  consumed  more.  I  might
know  this  as  a  fact,  but  I  should  not  be
disposed  to  act  accordingly,  because  what  I
alone  did  would  have  very  little  effect  and
there  would  be  no  reason  to  suppose  that
others  would  follow  my  example  if  I  acted
        <pb n="167" />
        164

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

in  the  public  interest  against  my  own
interest.
Just  as  the  advantages  of  home  exchange
and  their  distribution  are  measurable  theoretically ­
  through  the  agency  of  consumers’
surplus,  so  are  the  advantages  of  international
trade  and  their  distribution.  This  may  be
said  to  indicate  one  of  the  many  uses  of  the
doctrine  of  consumers’  surplus,  which,  though
it  may  be  of  speculative  value  only  at  the
present  time,  may  eventually  be  turned  to
practical  account.
Economics  relates  in  the  main  to  man’s
attitude  to  the  purchasable  goods  of  the
world,  and  therefore  it  is  imperative  to  remind
ourselves  from  time  to  time  that  all  the  goods
of  this  world  are  not  of  such  a  kind.  Indeed,
it  is  the  impalpable  subjective  things  in  life,
without  a  price,  which  give  to  exchangeable
goods  their  value.  We  cannot  value  books
without  culture,  nor  pictures  without  taste.
In  this  chapter,  then,  some  notice  should  be
taken  of  the  advantages  of  international
trade  which  cannot  be,  or  are  not,  expressed
in  pounds,  shillings,  and  pence.  As  regards
these  we  cannot  do  better  than  read  Mill  in
one  of  his  most  eloquent  passages,  which  will
incidentally  make  it  evident  that  his  political
economy  was  not,  throughout  at  any  rate,  of
        <pb n="168" />
        INTERNATIONAL  TRADE  165

that  stony  kind  from  which  public  sentiment
recoiled  :—“  The  economical  advantages  of
commerce  are  surpassed  in  importance  by  those
of  its  effects,  which  are  intellectual  and  moral.
It  is  hardly  possible  to  over-rate  the  value,
in  the  present  low  state  of  human  improvement, ­
  of  placing  human  beings  in  contact  with
persons  dissimilar  to  themselves,  and  with
modes  of  thought  and  action  unlike  those
with  which  they  are  familiar.  Commerce  is
now  what  war  once  was,  the  principal  source  of
this  contact.  Commercial  adventurers  from
more  civilized  countries  have  generally  been
the  first  civilizers  of  barbarians.  And  commerce ­
  is  the  purpose  of  the  far  greater  part  of
the  communication  which  takes  place  between
civilized  nations.  Such  communication  has
always  been,  and  is  peculiarly  in  the  present
age,  one  of  the  primary  sources  of  progress.
To  human  beings,  who,  as  hitherto  educated,
can  scarcely  cultivate  even  a  good  quality
without  running  it  into  a  fault,  it  is  indispensable ­
  to  be  perpetually  comparing  their  own
notions  and  customs  with  the  experience
and  example  of  persons  in  different  circumstances ­
  from  themselves  ;  and  there  is  no
nation  which  does  not  need  to  borrow  from
others,  not  merely  particular  arts  or  practices,
but  essential  points  of  character  in  which  its
        <pb n="169" />
        166

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

own  type  is  inferior.  Finally,  commerce  first
taught  nations  to  see  with  good-will  the
wealth  and  prosperity  of  one  another.  Before,
the  patriot,  unless  sufficiently  advanced  in
culture  to  feel  the  world  his  country,  wished
all  countries  weak,  poor,  and  ill-governed,  but
his  own  ;  he  now  sees  in  their  wealth  and
progress  a  direct  source  of  wealth  and  progress ­
  to  his  own  country.  It  is  commerce
which  is  rapidly  rendering  war  obsolete,  by
strengthening  and  multiplying  interests  which
are  in  natural  opposition  to  it.  And  it  may
be  said  without  exaggeration,  that  the  great
extent  and  rapid  increase  of  international
trade,  in  being  the  principal  guarantee  of  the
peace  of  the  world,  is  the  great  permanent
security  for  the  uninterrupted  progress  of  the
ideas,  the  institutions,  and  the  character  of
the  human  race.”
How  far,  if  at  all,  in  certain  circumstances
the  regulation  or  restriction  of  foreign  trade
is  to  be  recommended  in  the  interest  of
national  wealth  or  health,  is  a  question  which
raises  issues  too  vast  for  discussion  in  this
book.
        <pb n="170" />
        CHAPTER  VII
WAGES,  PROFITS  AND  INTEREST
The  economics  of  distribution  explains  the
sharing  out  of  the  wealth  produced  by  a
community.  We  may  think  of  the  various
individuals  in  a  community  as  working  together
with  suitable  appliances  to  make  the  incomes
upon  which  they  live.  The  generalisations
relating  to  their  activities,  when  they  are  thus
engaged,  constitute  the  economics  of  production. ­
  What  is  produced  is  called  the  national
dividend  or  the  national  income.  Generalisations ­
  relating  to  the  processes  whereby  the
national  income  is  divided  up  constitute  the
economics  of  distribution.  Only  it  is  important
to  observe  that  the  processes  of  production
and  distribution  go  on  continuously.  We  all
know  that  it  is  not  a  fact  that  production  for
a  common  stock  continues  for  a  time  and  then
ceases  while  the  division  of  the  stock  is  being
arranged.  The  process  of  its  division  is
continuous  with  the  process  of  its  production.
What  exactly  is  implied  by  this  statement  we
shall  realise  more  fully  as  we  advance.
167
        <pb n="171" />
        168

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

A  brief  study  of  distribution  will  disclose
a  fundamental  identity  of  theory  underlying
the  determination  of  wages,  and  the  determination ­
  of  interest,  profits,  and  so  forth  :
though,  of  course,  in  detail  there  are  many
differences  between  these  several  determinations ­
  arising  out  of  the  diverse  natures  of  the
various  factors  engaged  in  production.  It
will  be  my  first  object  so  to  expound  the
theory  of  distribution  as  a  whole  as  to  bring
out  the  identity  of  theory.  In  order  to  do
this  it  will  be  requisite  to  make  certain
assumptions.  The  first  thing  assumed  will  be
that  all  production  is  group  production  :  and
as  a  matter  of  fact  under  modern  conditions
in  the  Western  world  most  production  is
group  production.  Group  production  means,
it  will  be  remembered,  that  the  individual  does
not  produce  independently  but  in  conjunction
with  a  number  of  other  individuals  and  other
productive  agents.  The  second  assumption  is
that  each  member  of  each  class  of  factors  is
equal  in  efficiency  ;  in  other  words  that  there
is  nothing  to  choose  between  the  various
members  of  any  class  of  factors.  All  the
employers  in  an  industry,  we  suppose,  are
equally  clever,  alert  and  diligent  ;  all  the
workmen,  we  suppose,  are  equal  in  respect
of  their  physical  and  mental  powers,  and  are
        <pb n="172" />
        WAGES,  PROFITS  AND  INTEREST  169

equally  willing  and  manageable  ;  and  likewise
between  the  inanimate  agents  we  imagine  there
is  nothing  to  choose.  This  broad  assumption,
which  for  the  purposes  of  argument  removes
the  private  properties  of  things  of  the  same
order  does  violence  to  the  facts,  but  later
we  shall  dispense  with  it  and  introduce  into
our  doctrine  the  alterations  which  will  then  be
requisite.
We  shall  suppose  provisionally  that  in  a
given  community  there  are  a  fixed  number  of
employers  and  a  fixed  number  of  labourers.
Each  employer,  producing  under  the  guidance
of  demand,  will  aim  at  working  with  so  much
capital  and  so  much  labour  that  he  maximises ­
  his  profit.  Now  the  first  point  to
settle  is  this  :  How  will  the  employer  who  is
trying  to  maximise  his  profit  be  governed
in  regulating  the  relative  supplies  of  workpeop
  e,  material  and  plant  in  his  business  ?
The  answer  is  not  far  to  seek.  Brief  reflection
should  render  it  broadly  evident  that  the
employer  will  engage  so  much  of  each  class  of
producing  power  that  no  increase  of  it,  in  view
of  the  price  which  he  has  to  pay  for  it,  will
mean  a  greater  loss  than  gain,  other  things
being  equal.  Thus  let  us  write  L.  for  labour,
C.  for  capital  and  M.  for  the  remainder  of
the  agents  in  production,  namely  the  site  of
        <pb n="173" />
        170

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

the  works  and  the  material  used,  or,  if  it
is  a  case  of  farming,  the  quantity  of  land
embraced  by  the  farm.  Imagine  that  an
employer  has  a  business  which  can  be  represented ­
  by  100  L.  -f  200  C.  -f  50  M.  Imagine
moreover  that  the  product  is  worth  £500  a
week,  and  that  the  following  combinations
produce  the  amounts  stated  :—
Agenta  in  production.  Product  per  Increase
week.  of  product.
100  L.-f  200  C.-f  50  M.  £500
101  L.-f  200  C.-f  50  M.  £502  3s.  £2  3s.
102  L.  +  200  C.-f  50  M.  £504  4s.  £2  Is.
103  L.-f  200  C.-f  50  M.  £506  4s.  £2  0s.
104  L.-f  200  C.-f  50  M.  £508  2s.  £l  18s.
Then  the  employer  would  try  to  increase  his
labour  to  102  men  at  least,  and  would  not
increase  it  to  more  than  103,  if  wages  were  £2
a  week,  because  up  to  102  the  gain  in  product
exceeds  the  wage  of  the  extra  man,  but  beyond
103  it  is  less  than  the  wage  of  the  extra
man  ;  and  obviously  the  employer  would  act
similarly  with  reference  to  capital  and  other
agents  in  production,  considering  what  would
be  the  effects  on  his  net  takings  of  increasing
or  reducing  each  of  them.  Finally  he  would
reach  an  arrangement  of  such  a  kind  that  the
marginal  worth  of  each  class  of  factors  in  his
        <pb n="174" />
        WAGES,  PROFITS  AND  INTEREST  171

business  equalled  what  he  had  to  pay  for  it.
In  short  in  organising  his  business  he
would  act  according  to  the  law  of  equimarginal ­
  returns  which  is  fully  expounded
in  Chapter  II.
In  the  above  example  the  nature  of  the
demand  for  one  of  the  agents  in  production
is  made  fully  explicit.  Let  us  next  consider
how  demand  works  in  relation  to  supply,  still
concentrating  our  attention  on  the  reward
of  labour.  Suppose  that  this  happens  to  have
settled  at  £2  a  week  as  a  result  of  the  forces
previously  operative  and  that  each  employer
has  101  workpeople,  when  all  workpeople  are
employed,  though  the  marginal  worth  of
labour  to  each  of  them  is  £2  3s.  a  week,  as
stated  in  the  table.  Then  each  employer
will  strive  to  get  more  labour  because  to
succeed  in  getting  it  would  be  to  augment  his
profit.  But  ex  hypothesi  there  is  no  more
labour  to  be  had  :  we  imagined  that  all  the
labour  was  occupied  when  each  employer  had
101  hands.  The  effect  of  the  employers’
action,  therefore,  cannot  be  to  enlarge  their
businesses  but  will  probably  be  to  lever  up
the  rate  of  wages  until  it  approximates  roughly
to  £2  3s.  a  week.  Exactly  the  same  can  be
said  with  reference  to  the  payment  for  other
factors.
        <pb n="175" />
        172

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

It  must  be  firmly  grasped  that  any  class
of  employed  agents  in  production  has  a
marginal  worth  which  varies,  other  things
being  equal,  with  its  supply  :  the  larger  the
supply,  in  relation  to  given  supplies  of
other  factors,  the  lower  the  marginal  worth.
It  is  these  marginal  worths,  or  their  equivalents, ­
  which  tend  to  accrue  to  the  agents
in  production  as  their  earnings  ;  and  it  is
vital  to  an  understanding  of  the  economic
functioning  of  a  community  to  recognise  that
in  these  payments  the  value  of  the  things
produced  is  expressed.  Workpeople  have  a
value  to  the  employer  because,  in  conjunction ­
  with  other  agents,  they  create  what  has
a  direct  or  indirect  value  to  consumers.
Their  value  to  the  employer  is  in  effect  the
value  of  what  is  made  transmitted  through
the  demand  of  the  employer;  and  the  value
of  what  is  made  may  actually  originate  in
themselves,  because  it  may  be  settled  on  the
one  side  by  their  own  demand  for  goods.
Similarly  the  value  of  every  other  agent  in
production  is  the  transmitted  value  of  what
it  adds  to  production  at  the  margin.
So  we  may  lay  it  down  in  the  rough  that,
subject  to  reservations  arising  out  of  social
friction,  the  sum  which  each  agent  in  production ­
  (apart  from  the  employer,  whose  case
        <pb n="176" />
        WAGES,  PROFITS  AND  INTEREST  173
we  shall  consider  shortly)  gets  as  its  pay  is  its
marginal  worth  in  production.
This  statement  is  sometimes  expressed  in
another  and  more  complicated  form,  which
comes,  however,  to  the  same  thing  in  substance. ­
  It  is  said,  for  instance  with  reference ­
  to  labour,  that  wages  must  equal  the
discounted  worth  of  the  expectation  of  its
marginal  product.  Strictly  speaking  the
element  of  anticipation  must  be  introduced,
as  it  is  here,  because  the  work  must  be  done
before  its  result  is  attained,  and  wages  are
usually  arranged  prior  to  the  performance  of
the  work.  And  so  also  must  the  notion  of
discounting  be  introduced,  in  order  to  meet
the  case,  which  is  a  common  one,  in  which  the
saleable  product  is  not  obtained  until  long  after
the  labour  has  been  paid  for.  Suppose  that  the
addition  of  another  labourer  to  a  farmer’s  staff,
other  things  remaining  unchanged,  is  expected
to  raise  his  harvest  by  100  bushels  of  wheat
a  year,  that  the  wheat  is  expected  to  be  worth
10s.  a  bushel  and  that  the  labourer  works  and
is  paid  for  fifty  weeks  in  the  year.  Then  the
labourer  would  not  get  £1  a  week  (that  is
£50  a  year,  which  is  the  expected  value  of  his
marginal  product)  because  the  product  is  not
obtained  until  twelve  months  after  his  work
begins  ;  but  he  would  tend  to  get  such  an
        <pb n="177" />
        174

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

amount  per  week  that  the  payments  made  to
him,  plus  interest  upon  them  calculated  up  to
the  time  when  the  harvest  was  sold,  amounted
to  £50,  or,  in  other  words,  he  would  receive  the
discounted  value  of  his  expected  marginal
worth,  an  allowance  being  made  for  the
element  of  uncertainty  as  regards  what  his
marginal  worth  would  turn  out  to  be.
This  doctrine  comes  to  the  same  thing  as
the  one  previously  laid  down,  provided  that
in  our  first  enunciation  we  meant  by  marginal
worth  the  anticipated  worth,  at  the  time  when
he  was  paid,  of  the  result  of  the  wage-earner’s
work,  in  calculating  which  discount  would
have  a  place.
Up  to  this  point  we  have  been  disentangling
the  influences  on  the  side  of  demand  which
help  to  fix  the  remuneration  for  employed
factors  in  production.  We  have  next  to  pick
out  the  equally  important  influences  which  are
active  on  the  side  of  supply.  These  latter
influences,  we  shall  observe,  are  not  the  same
for  all  factors.  Let  us  take  land  to  begin
with.  A  comparatively  fixed  supply  of  land
has  been  provided  by  nature  for  all  time.
For  purposes  of  exposition  let  us  picture  the
conditions  on  a  small  island,  which  has  no
intercourse  with  the  rest  of  the  world,  and
        <pb n="178" />
        WAGES,  PROFITS  AND  INTEREST  175

provisionally  assume  that  all  the  land  is  equally
valuable  in  respect  of  fertility  and  situation.
If  the  population  is  so  dense  that  the  whole
of  the  land  is  in  use,  the  land  will  have  a
marginal  worth  per  acre  equal  to  the  difference
that  would  be  made  to  the  product  by  the
removal  of  one  acre.  If,  however,  the  population ­
  is  such  that  the  whole  of  the  land  is  not
occupied,  land  will  have  no  marginal  worth,
because,  like  air,  there  is  more  than  enough
of  it.  It  is  premised,  of  course,  that  the
land  is  not  monopolised.  When  land  is  not
monopolised,  its  value  is  governed  by  the
marginal  worth  of  different  quantities  of  land
in  relation  to  what  the  fixed  supply  is.
The  supply  of  labour  will  engage  our  attention ­
  next.  Here  we  discover  more  complex
conditions.  The  size  of  the  population  is
certainly  dependent  in  some  degree  upon
earnings—other  things  being  equal  it  may  not
infrequently  happen  that  population  rises
as  earnings  rise—but  the  laws  of  population
are  so  obscure  that  all  sweeping  and  dogmatic
pronouncements  must  be  viewed  with
suspicion.  What  is  perfectly  certain,  however,
is  that  the  relative  wages  paid  in  many  or
most  trades  settle  the  supply  of  labour
offered  in  those  trades.  Were  the  wages
of  carpenters  to  rise,  other  wages  remaining
        <pb n="179" />
        176

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

the  same,  there  would  soon  be  an  increase  in
the  proportion  of  the  people  engaged  in
carpentering.  Nevertheless  the  inference  would
be  quite  invalid  that  when  wages  are  higher
in  one  calling  than  in  another  larger  supplies
of  labour  will  be  forthcoming  for  the  former
than  for  the  latter.  It  may  very  well  be  that
the  higher  wages  in  the  one  calling  are  necessary ­
  to  overcome  adverse  influences  which
deter  labour  from  entering  it.  The  work  may
be  very  laborious,  or  very  monotonous,  or
exceptionally  unpleasant  or  unhealthy  ;  or
it  may  be  irregular,  or  entail  lengthy  and
expensive  training  ;  or  the  chance  of  failing  in
the  calling  may  be  unusually  high.  All  that
can  be  affirmed  is  that,  when  full  allowance  is
made  for  these  incidents,  an  increased  supply
of  labour  for  a  particular  avocation  can  only
be  enticed  by  the  offer  of  a  more  generous
recompense.  Neither  must  we  conclude  that,
apart  from  payment  to  counteract  these
deterring  influences,  the  levels  of  wages  will
actually  incline  in  the  long  run  to  be  the  same
throughout  a  community.  They  would,  were  it
a  fact  that  any  one  workman  was  as  valuable
as  any  other,  and  that  the  taste  of  any
one  workman  with  reference  to  different  sorts
of  work  was  the  same  as  that  of  any  other.
These  conditions  are  not,  however,  found  in
        <pb n="180" />
        M

WAGES,  PROFITS  AND  INTEREST  177
the  world  as  it  is.  Consequently  wages  in
some  trades  would  be  poor  in  comparison
with  those  in  other  trades,  even  if  labour  could
move  with  ease  from  place  to  place  and  trade
to  trade.  Moreover,  for  the  performance  of
a  particular  kind  of  work  which  was  agreeable
rather  than  disagreeable  comparatively  rare
qualities  might  be  requisite,  so  that  substantial
remuneration  would  have  to  be  paid  for  it.
Our  general  conclusion  is  that  wages  in  a
given  trade  are  settled  by  the  marginal  worth
of  labour  in  that  trade  and  the  supply  price
for  labour  in  the  trade,  that  is  the  wage  at
which  an  additional  labourer  will  be  forthcoming. ­
  The  wage  is  the  amount  at  which
equal  quantities  of  labour  will  be  demanded
and  supplied.  It  is  marginal  incidents,  we
see,  which  clinch  the  bargain.  It  may  be,
however,  that  the  lowest  class  of  labour  has
no  supply  price—that  its  numbers  are  independent ­
  of  its  wages  given  sufficient  for
subsistence—in  which  case  its  wages  are
settled  finally  by  its  numbers  in  relation  to
the  marginal  worth  associated  with  them.
We  now  arrive  at  the  conditions  of  the  supply
of  capital.  Capital  we  must  be  content  to
regard  for  the  present  as  wealth  devoted  to
production.  Few,  if  any,  industries  can  be
carried  on  to-day  without  it.  The  demand
        <pb n="181" />
        178

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

for  capital  in  production,  as  we  have  discerned,
measures  the  marginal  worth  of  different
quantities  of  capital  in  production  ;  and,  in
order  to  reach  the  complete  demand  of  a
community  for  capital,  we  have  to  add  to  the
demand  for  production  what  may  be  called
the  demand  for  consumption.  The  demand
for  consumption  is  measured  by  the  value  to
individuals  of  accessions  to  their  present
supplies  of  wealth  when  they  have  tangible
expectations  to  pledge  as  security  for  loans.
The  supply  of  capital  is  governed  by  the  power
to  save  and  inducements  to  save.  Wealth
may  be  saved  for  a  variety  of  reasons.  People
may  practise  thrift  merely  for  the  sake  of
obtaining  interest  ;  but  all  saving  is  not  to  be
ascribed  to  a  desire  to  earn  interest.  Some
persons  are  saving  with  a  view  to  having  at
their  disposal  a  fund  through  the  agency  of
which  they  may  seize  any  opportunities  that
offer  for  the  advancement  of  their  worldly
interests  ;  and  all  persons,  except  the  most
improvident,  set  by  something  against  sickness,
accident  or  other  misfortune,  or  in  order  to
enable  them  to  meet  without  excessive  strain
future  obligations.  Much  of  the  provision
for  the  purposes  last  enumerated  is  effected
through  insurance  companies.  Further  the
accumulations  automatically  made  by  those
        <pb n="182" />
        WAGES,  PROFITS  AND  INTEREST  179

who,  with  their  existing  tastes,  cannot
reconcile  to  themselves  the  full  spending  of
their  incomes,  must  not  be  overlooked.
Evidently  there  would  be  a  certain  amount
of  capital  available  in  a  community  even  if  no
interest  were  paid,  since  some  saving  is
independent  of  the  incentive  of  gain.  Indeed
some  capital  would  exist  were  interest  negative ­
  ;  for  instance  if,  instead  of  interest  being
paid,  the  possession  of  capital  were  taxed.
This  would  be  so  because,  the  discouragement
to  providence  notwithstanding,  no  prudent
man  would  dream  of  instantly  spending  to  the
last  farthing  everything  as  he  earned  it.
Despite  these  considerations,  however,  it  is
pretty  certain  that  in  every  Western  community ­
  a  rise  in  the  rate  of  interest  swells  the
sums  annually  withheld  from  expenditure  on
consumers’  goods.  The  rate  of  saving  for
some  purposes  is  left  untouched  by  an  advance
in  the  rate  of  interest  ;  saving  for  other
purposes,  for  instance  the  procuring  of  a
fixed  income  to  retire  on,  is  checked  ;  but
saving  with  yet  other  objects  in  view  is
stimulated,  and  the  influence  determining  this
saving  would  almost  certainly  prove  much
stronger  than  the  influence  determining  the
second  class  of  saving.
So  capital,  we  may  declare,  has  a  supply
        <pb n="183" />
        180

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

price;  and  this  ¡Supply  price  measures  the
inducements  in  the  form  of  interest  necessary
to  bring  about  additional  increments  of
saving.  It  is  this  supply  price  which,  in
conjunction  with  the  demand  that  measures
the  marginal  worth  of  different  quantities  of
capital,  decrees  the  net  rate  of  interest  payable
at  any  time.  Again  we  observe  how  it  is
marginal  incidents  that  directly  move  the
economic  world,
In  the  last  sentence  I  have  introduced  for
the  first  time  the  phrase  “  net  interest.”
Previously  I  have  spoken  simply  of  interest
but  I  have  meant  by  it  net  interest.  At  this
point  it  is  necessary  to  distinguish  between
net  interest  and  gross  interest.  The  latter  is
the  interest  which  is  actually  paid.  The
former  is  the  part  of  the  payment  which  is
simply  remuneration  for  saving.  Gross  interest ­
  includes,  in  addition  to  this,  charges  which
are  of  the  nature  of  insurance  against  risk,
recompense  for  the  inconveniences  of  certain
investments  and  for  any  work  entailed  on  the
part  of  the  investor.  Hazards  are  greater
in  some  industries  or  businesses  than  in  others  ;
and  the  former,  therefore,  must  offer  a  higher
rate  of  interest  than  the  latter  in  order  to
attract  capital.  In  certain  undertakings
capital  is  either  locked  up  for  lengthy  periods
        <pb n="184" />
        WAGES,  PROFITS  AND  INTEREST  181
or  is  not  recoverable  at  short  notice  without
loss.  Here  we  have"examples  of  inconvenience,
for  which  the  investor  requires  compensation.
A  good  example  of  the  gross  interest  which
includes  substantial  payment  for  work  done
is  to  be  found  in  the  charges  made  by  pawnbrokers, ­
  who  are  bound  to  give  unremitting
attention  to  the  employment  of  a  comparatively ­
  small  capital  since  it  is  loaned  in  small
sums  for  short  periods.
In  connection  with  interest  there  is  one
inquiry  which  must  not  be  shirked,  and  that
is  why  in  a  wealthy  community  the  rate  of
net  interest  never  drops  to  zero.  It  would  if
there  were  so  much  capital  that  its  marginal
worth  subsided  to  zero.  Why  should  it
not  ?  Why  should  the  amount  saved  always
fall  short  of  the  full  requirements  of  the
community  ?  Looking  at  the  matter  broadly,
in  a  rich  country  like  England,  one  might  be
inclined  to  expect  the  rate  of  interest  to
subside  till  it  touched  the  boundary  where
plus  and  minus  meet.
Zero  interest  simply  implies  that  the  community ­
  regarded  as  a  whole  is  employing  the
most  productive  methods—the  methods  which
yield  the  highest  net  income.  It  means  that
the  population  is  so  distributed,  winning  coal
and  ore,  smelting  metal,  making  machines,
        <pb n="185" />
        182

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

using  machines  and  tilling  the  ground,  and
so  forth,  that  the  real  income  of  the  community ­
  is  maximised.  When  we  say  that
the  marginal  utility  of  capital  is  a  certain
amount—which  means  that  interest  must
be  that  amount—we  mean  that  the  employment ­
  of  another  increment  of  capital  (i.e.,
the  employment  of  a  little  more  labour  in
making  machines  and  so  forth)  would  raise
the  net  income  of  the  community  by  that
amount.  That  is  to  say,  there  will  be  a  net
gain  from  employing  more  capital  so  long
as  the  marginal  utility  of  capital  is  above
zero.  Why,  then,  is  not  capital  applied  to
production  until  interest  drops  to  zero  ?
The  answer  cannot  be  given  in  a  single
sentence.  In  the  first  place,  sacrifice  must
be  made  in  the  form  of  deferment  of  consumption, ­
  or  saving,  some  time  before  the
reward  is  reaped,  and  the  share  of  this  sacrifice
which  fell  to  the  poorer  classes  might  be
quite  beyond  their  saving  powers.  Robinson
Crusoe  could  not  have  made  all  at  once
every  kind  of  instrumental  capital  that  he
needed.  He  had  to  calculate  the  time  he
could  spare  from  rest,  recreation  and  the  work
which  was  more  immediately  productive  of
what  he  wanted  to  live.  In  the  second
place,  the  providence  of  many  people  is
        <pb n="186" />
        WAGES,  PROFITS  AND  INTEREST  183

undeveloped  ;  and,  in  the  third  place,  capital
is  exported  from'  rich  countries  to  poor
countries  so  that,  in  consequence,  the  rate
of  interest  in  the  rich  countries  is  kept  up.
As  regards  this  last  point,  the  warning  \vill
not  be  out  of  place  that  we  must  not
jump  to  the  conclusion  that  the  prohibition
of  the  export  of  capital  would  necessarily
be  beneficial  —  or  the  reverse  —  to  the
non-capitalists  in  a  rich  country.  Were
the  exportation  of  capital  prohibited,  much
of  the  capital  which  would  otherwise  have
been  exported  would  not  have  been  saved  ;
and  the  exported  capital  makes  cheaper
the  goods  imported  into  the  country.  For
instance,  English  capital  which  goes  to
Canada  helps  to  furnish  us  with  cheaper  bread.
The  key-stone  in  the  theory  of  distribution ­
  is  left  to  discuss,  that  is  the  manner
in  which  the  remuneration  of  the  employer
is  governed.  His  remuneration  is  sometimes
spoken  of  as  profit,  but  “  profit  ”  is  an
equivocal  term  which  is  sometimes  employed
to  indicate  gross  interest,  and  sometimes
to  indicate  what  the  employer  makes  in  his
business,  whether  his  earnings  are  of  the
nature  of  interest  or  of  reward  for  the  work
that  he  does.  In  order  to  avoid  ambiguity,
        <pb n="187" />
        184

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

it  would  be  as  well  not  to  apply  the  term
“  profit  ”  to  the  payment  of  the  employer
for  his  positive  activities  in  undertaking
and  organising  production,  apart  from  his
gains  as  a  capitalist  ;  but  unfortunately
there  is  no  suitable  short  term  to  indicate
what  we  have  in  mind.
The  appearance  of  a  theory  of  payment
for  employing  was  comparatively  late  in  the
history  of  political  economy  ;  the  reason  being,
no  doubt,  that  early  employers  were  largely
working  with  their  own  capital,  and  that  their
earnings  were  commonly  reckoned  as  a  percentage ­
  on  their  capital.  In  the  economic
writings  of  past  generations  we  invariably  find
more  or  less  confusion  between  payment  for
capital  and  payment  for  employing.
In  order  to  make  sure  of  avoiding  the
pitfalls  into  which  some  economists  have
fallen,  we  shall  take  the  seemingly  eccentric
course  of  arguing  on  the  false  assumption
that  every  employer  is  working  entirely  with
borrowed  means  ;  in  which  case  all  that  he
received  would  be  on  account  of  the  work
that  he  did,  including  his  enterprise.  We
shall  also  continue  provisionally  to  make  the
assumption  that  all  employers  are  equal  in
capacity,  application  and  character  generally.
Now  imagine,  to  begin  with,  that  in  a
        <pb n="188" />
        WAGES,  PROFITS  AND  INTEREST  185

given  industry  there  is  a  fixed  number  of
employers.  As  they  are  equally  efficient  and
enjoy  alike  the  confidence  of  capitalists,  they
will  have  businesses  of  about  the  same  size,
employing  the  same  number  of  work-people—
any  difference  of  ideas  which  the  employers
might  have  in  the  matter  of  the  proportions
in  which  the  factors  in  production  are  best
organized  being  disregarded  for  the  moment.
Then  each  employer  would  get  for  himself  the
difference  between  the  total  receipts  for  his
output  and  his  total  outlay,  the  total  outlay
being  made  up  of  the  payment  for  land  or
premises,  cost  of  any  necessary  material  and
accessories,  interest  on  capital  and  wages  for
labour.  It  has  to  be  proved  that  this  difference ­
  will  normally  be  a  positive  quantity  ;
that  after  all  expenses  of  production  are  paid
there  will  be  something  left  over.
That  something  may  be  left  over  can
be  demonstrated  from  what  we  have  learnt
already  in  Chapter  III.  Let  us  picture  to
ourselves  the  doings  of  an  employer  who,
after  starting  a  business  on  a  very  small  scale,
gradually  expands  it,  and  consider,  in  the
light  of  the  generalisations  already  laid  down
with  reference  to  production,  how  expenses
will  be  affected  by  an  increase  of  the  output.
Because  in  the  larger  business  more  division
        <pb n="189" />
        186

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

of  labour  could  be  introduced  and  larger
recourse  could  be  had  to  machinery,  the
additions  made  to  expenses  would  at  first
fall  as  additions  were  made  to  the  output.
But  after  a  time  additions  made  to  expenses
would  begin  to  rise  because,  when  the  business
had  reached  a  certain  size,  the  slackening  of
the  employer’s  control,  consequent  upon  the
extension  of  the  activities  over  which  he

had  to  exercise  supervision,  would  counteract
the  possibilities  of  economy  by  way  of  specialising ­
  and  the  larger  use  of  machinery.  And,
from  that  point  onward,  additions  made  to
expenses  would  steadily  rise.  Our  imaginary
employer  would  allow  his  business  to  grow
until  the  final  addition  made  to  expenses
was  equal  to  the  price  which  he  received  for
the  product,  that  is  until  his  marginal  expenses
equalled  price.  Let  the  following  be  the  facts
in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  position  of
equilibrium  :—

Output  of  the
business  in  tons
per  year.
1,000
1,001
1,002
1.003
1.004
1.005

Aggregate  cost  of
output.

£
11,490
11,502
11,514
11,526
11,538

s.  d.
0  0

11,550  15

Marginal  cost.
£  S.  d.
12  0  0
12  1  0
12  3  0
12  5  0
12  6  0
        <pb n="190" />
        WAGES,  PROFITS  AND  INTEREST  187

If  the  price  of  the  output  is  £12  5s.  Od.
a  ton  the  employer  will  aim  at  an  output
of  1,004  tons,  and  his  remuneration  will  be
1,004  times  £12  5s.  Od.  (which  amounts  to
£12,299)  less  £11,508  9s.  0d.,  that  is  exactly
£760  11s.  Such  close  accuracy  of  balance  is,
of  course,  impossible,  but  the  example  serves
to  illustrate  the  principle  which  is  roughly
borne  out  in  practice.  We  are  overlooking
the  ups  and  downs  of  trade,  which  make
employers’  earnings  fluctuate  enormously,
and  considering  merely  what  happens  on  an
average.
We  may  now  return  to  the  main  thread
of  our  argument.  Suppose  there  are  100
employers  in  the  industry  which  is  the  sole
industry  in  the  country,  and  that  the  surplus
left  over  for  each  employer  is  £1000  a  year.
Now,  when  the  number  of  employers  is  not
fixed,  as  it  is  not  in  reality,  it  may  be  that
£1000  a  year  is  too  much  or  too  little  to  cause
100  suitable  people  to  devote  themselves  to  the
task  of  undertaking  businesses  in  that  industry.
Suppose,  first,  that  it  is  too  much.  If  it  is
too  much  other  people  will  be  induced  to
enter  the  industry  and  compete  for  labour
and  capital.  Consequently,  in  the  very  long
run,  the  magnitude  of  the  typical  business
will  contract,  though  at  the  same  time  the
        <pb n="191" />
        188

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

output  of  the  industry  will  increase,  inasmuch
as  the  same  amount  of  labour  and  capital
at  least  will  be  employed  in  the  industry,
while  more  effective  use  will  be  made  of  them
in  view  of  the  larger  number  of  employers.
We  must  also  allow  for  the  fact  that  an
alteration  in  the  number  of  employers  through
its  effect,  for  instance,  on  the  specialism  of
businesses,  might  in  itself  render  the  industry
more  or  less  productive.  A  new  position  of
equilibrium  will  eventually  be  reached  at
which  the  surplus  left  in  each  business  for  the
employer  is  less.  This  movement  will  continue ­
  until  the  surplus  remaining  for  employers
is  just  sufficient  to  induce  the  continued
functioning  in  the  industry  of  as  many
employers  as  there  are.
Were  the  surplus  too  small  instead  of  too
large,  some  employers  would  be  working  at  a
rate  of  pay  at  which  it  was  not  worth  their
while  to  continue  working.  Gradually,
therefore,  employers  would  begin  to  desert
the  industry,  and  no  others  would  take  their
place,  since  it  has  been  supposed  that  the
earnings  are  insufficient  to  attract  any  fresh
organising  talent  into  the  industry.  Consequently, ­
  for  reasons  already  explained,
businesses  would  expand  in  size,  and  the
surplus  left  for  employers  would  become
        <pb n="192" />
        WAGES,  PROFITS  AND  INTEREST  18»
greater.  This  movement,  as  the  one  previously ­
  dealt  with,  would  continue  until  the
earnings  of  employers  were  just  sufficient  to
maintain  the  supply  under  the  new  conditions.
In  other  words,  the  payment  of  employers
for  the  work  that  they  do  is  governed  on  the
one  side  by  the  surpluses  over  expenses  of
production  when  businesses  are  of  different
sizes,  and  on  the  other  side  by  the  incomes
at  which  different  numbers  of  employers
will  be  forthcoming.  So  we  may  say  that  the
earnings  of  employers  are  settled  by  demand
and  supply.  The  surpluses  just  mentioned
express  the  demand,  and  supply  means  the
supplies  of  organising  power  forthcoming
when  different  incomes  are  to  be  expected.
The  importance  of  marginal  effects  in  this
theory  is  apparent.
It  will  be  understood  that  the  earnings  of
employers  for  the  work  that  they  do  can  only
be  regarded  as  approximating  to  a  defined
limit  in  an  exaggerated  long  run,  a  long  run
which  is  much  longer  than  the  time  required
to  bring  interest  or  wages  to  their  normal
levels.  The  reason  is  that  an  industrial
business  is  an  economic  organism  of  very
slow  growth,  and  that  once  a  business  has
been  established,  unless  it  is  worked  at  a
positive  loss  apart  from  payments  to  cover  the
        <pb n="193" />
        190

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

cost  of  its  plant,  it  will  naturally  be  continued
until  its  plant  wears  out.  Moreover,  in  many
industries  the  individual  business  can  only  be
enlarged  with  difficulty.  As  we  have  already
learnt,  restrictions  which  endure  for  a  lengthy
period  may  be  imposed  upon  its  expansion.
An  employer  might  find  himself  in  a  position
in  which,  if  he  had  to  lay  plant  down  anew,
it  would  pay  him  to  provide  for  a  business
ten  per  cent,  larger  than  the  one  which  he
already  directed;  but  it  might  not  pay  him
to  make  his  existing  business  ten  per  cent,
larger,  for  an  extension  of  his  premises
and  an  increase  of  his  engines  and  boilers
might  only  be  attainable,  in  view  of  all
circumstances,  at  excessive  cost.  There  are
industries,  of  course,  such  as  building  and
farming,  where  these  particular  restrictions
are  experienced  less,  if  at  all.
In  the  whole  of  this  exposition  we  have
imagined  for  the  sake  of  simplicity  that
every  business  is  managed  by  a  single  employer ­
  who  is  its  owner.  This  supposition,
the  reader  will  be  fully  aware,  does  not
correspond  with  fact.  Many  businesses  are
organised  as  public  companies  and  function
under  the  control  of  a  Board  of  Directors  and
a  salaried  manager,  while  other  businesses
are  co-operative  in  form.  Nevertheless,  the
        <pb n="194" />
        WAGES,  PROFITS  AND  INTEREST  191

general  principle  of  our  demonstration  may
be  taken  to  apply  to  these  other  types  of
business  organisation  which  differ  from  the
simple  one  which  has  been  posited  to  simplify
analysis.  Our  final  generalisation  would  have
to  be  modified  to  suit  the  peculiarities  of
these  other  types  of  organisation  ;  but  in
general  it  may  be  said,  with  regard  to  the
theory  of  payment  for  employing,  that  the
only  difference  which  is  brought  into  the
problem  by  the  recognition  of  actual  employing ­
  arrangements  consists  in  the  fact  that
the  employing  function  is  split  up  and  divided
among  a  number  of  people,  instead  of  being
concentrated  in  a  single  individual.  Incidentally ­
  it  may  be  remarked  that  the  appearance ­
  of  the  company  form  of  organisation
has  been  productive  of  the  most  far-reaching
and,  on  the  whole,  beneficial  consequences.
It  is  true  that  it  has  had—though  it
need  not  have  had—the  disadvantage  of
severing  the  personal  ties  between  employer ­
  and  employed,  which  afforded  some
guarantee  that  business  relations  would  not
be  de-humanised  and  degraded  into  a  mere
cash  nexus  ;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  it  has
enabled  enterprising  and  able  men  possessed
of  small  means  to  devote  their  most  valuable
capacities  to  the  service  of  the  community
        <pb n="195" />
        102

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

by  entering  the  ranks  of  those  who  exercise
the  employing  function.  Moreover,  in  consequence ­
  of  the  greater  safety  assured  to
the  capital  of  investors  when  a  business
is  clothed  in  the  legal  company  forms,
it  has  drawn  increasing  proportions  of
the  savings  of  the  community  into  the
industrial  field,  and  induced  a  higher  degree
of  saving  than  would  have  taken  place
otherwise.
To  say  that  the  earnings  of  employers  are
settled  by  demand  and  supply  is  not  to
demonstrate  that  it  is  open  to  everybody  who
is  prepared  to  undertake  the  burden,  and  is
capable  of  doing  the  work,  to  make  the
employer’s  income.  It  is  still  necessary  in
almost  all  circumstances,  that  a  person
should  be  possessed  of  some  substantial
resources  if  he  is  to  thrust  himself  into  the
employing  class.  Moreover,  it  is  generally
requisite  that  he  should  have  received  a
certain  kind  of  training,  and  be  in  certain
relations  with  particular  sections  of  the
business  world,  to  enable  him  to  make  a  start
with  fair  prospects  of  success.  Consequently,
to  all  but  the  most  exceptional  of  those  who
are  born  in  the  lower  economic  ranks,  the
scaling  of  the  industrial  ladder  is  hard  in
the  absence  of  unusually  good  fortune.  It
        <pb n="196" />
        N

WAGES,  PROFITS  AND  INTEREST  193
may  be  trusted,  however,  that  with  improved
popular  education  and  general  social  and
economic  development  greater  opportunities
will  be  afforded  the  ablest  and  most  enterprising. ­
        <pb n="197" />
        CHAPTER  VIII

RENT
In  economics  the  term  “  rent  "  is  not  used
with  its  ordinary  significance.  Ordinarily
it  means  the  annual  payment  made  for  land
or  buildings.  It  therefore  stands  for  a
hiring  charge  :  but  it  is  not  applied  to  every
hiring  charge.  If  a  person  hired  a  brougham
he  would  no  more  call  the  charge  for  it  a  rent
than  he  would  call  the  rent  of  his  house  a
hiring  charge.  This  common  usage  of  the
term  “  rent  ”  has  been  determined  solely
by  convention.  Economists  began  with  it,
but  after  economic  inquiry  became  more
scientific,  and  the  causes  of  payments  began
to  be  investigated,  the  application  of
the  word  “  rent  ”  in  economics  suffered
restriction.  In  this  study,  it  was  made
to  refer  only  to  annual  or  other  periodic
payments  for  land,  apart  from  payments  for
things  produced  by  labour  and  capital  such
as  houses  and  farm  buildings.  The  split
between  common  usage  and  economic  usage
194
        <pb n="198" />
        RENT

195

was  regrettable  ;  but  inevitable  because
it  was  discovered  that  the  law  determining
the  annual  value  of  buildings,  fences,  gates,
and  artificial  drainage  systems,  was  no
different  fundamentally  from  the  law  determining ­
  the  prices  of  other  things  freely
produced.  It  scarcely  need  be  remarked—
but  perhaps  attention  should  be  called  to  the
point  incidentally—that  every  value  can
theoretically  be  expressed  as  a  total  in  a
price,  or  as  an  income  in  terms  of  periodic
payments.  A  price  can  easily  be  transformed
into  an  annual  payment  and  an  annual
payment  into  a  purchase  price.  The  only
matter  to  settle  is  the  number  of  years’
purchase  which  should  be  allowed  in  effecting
the  transformation  ;  and  the  number  of  years’
purchase  is  deducible  from  the  durability  of
the  thing  in  question  and  the  ruling  rate  of
interest.  In  order  to  distinguish  rent  in  the
restricted  economic  sense  just  described  from
rent  in  the  ordinary  sense,  the  former  was
occasionally  spoken  of  as  “  economic  rent  ”
or  “  rent  of  land.”
The  violence  done  to  the  implication  of
“  rent  ”  did  not  stop  with  the  rejection  of
all  payments  for  the  improvement  of  land.
Recent  years  have  seen  also  an  extension  of
the  term’s  denotation  to  make  it  include
        <pb n="199" />
        196

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

payments  which  neither  the  early  economists
nor  the  general  public  would  have  dreamt  of
regarding  as  rent.  Nevertheless,  the  inclusion
of  these  other  payments  is  strictly  as  logical
as  the  exclusion  of  certain  payments  had
been.  It  was  necessitated  by  the  new  discoveries ­
  made  in  the  course  of  the  more
careful  modern  analysis  of  value.  The  alternative ­
  was  to  introduce  an  entirely  new
symbol  to  indicate  these  other  payments
together  with  what  early  economists  understood ­
  by  economic  rent  ;  but  inasmuch
as  the  symbol  “  rent  ”  qualified  by  the
epithet  “  economic,”  had  already  become
embedded  in  the  phraseology  of  economic
science,  and  the  distinction  between  economic
rent  and  rent  in  the  ordinary  sense  was
clearly  recognised,  it  seemed  most  convenient ­
  not  to  discard  the  old  word,  but  to
broaden  its  application.  The  retention  of
the  old  word  absolutely  necessitated  a  broadening ­
  of  its  application,  because  it  was  found
that  the  law  which  governed  payments  for
land  governed  also  payments  for  certain
other  things.  One  could  not  speak  of  a  law
of  rent  unless  one  was  prepared  to  designate
these  other  payments  as  rent.  What  exactly
these  other  payments  are,  we  shall  learn  in
due  course.
        <pb n="200" />
        RENT

197

But  I  have  been  rash,  1  fear,  in  using  the
word  “  exactly  ”  in  the  last  sentence.  When
we  come  to  ask  what  “  rent  ”  really  does
mean  in  modern  economics  we  very  soon  find
ourselves  in  a  mighty  maze,  not  without  a
plan,  but  conforming  to  two  or  three  overlapping ­
  plans.  The  best  way  to  envisage
it,  for  the  purposes  of  such  a  study  as  is
attempted  in  this  book,  is  to  rely  on  one  plan,
or  at  most  two,  and  ignore  the  rest.
To  the  two  meanings  of  rent  which  will  be
noticed  all  that  has  been  written  in  the
paragraph  above  applies.  The  one  meaning
is  payment  for  any  things  (or  frequently  it  is
limited  to  agents  in  production)  of  which  the
supplies  are  beyond  human  control.  The
other  is  payment  for  the  differential  advantages ­
  between  members  of  any  class  of  such
things,  when  differential  advantages  are
understood  to  refer  to  the  valuable  properties
inherent  in  things  over  and  above  those  which
are  common  to  the  class  to  which  they  belong,
whether  the  differential  advantages  relate
to  land,  persons  or  circumstances.  Nothing
much  turns  on  the  selection  of  the  one  idea
or  the  other.  To  get  rent  in  the  first  sense,
we  have  simply  to  add  on  to  rent  in  the  second
sense  (which  there  is  a  certain  convenience
sometimes  in  calling  “  differential  rent  ”)
        <pb n="201" />
        198

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

what  would  be  the  payment  for  the  marginal
thing  of  the  class  (which,  to  distinguish  it
from  “  differential  rent,”  can  be  called  a
“scarcity  rent”).  Of  course,  in  a  sense  socalled
  scarcity  rent  is  a  payment  for  differential
advantages,  since  persons  who  possess  a  rare
thing  enjoy  differential  advantages  over  those
who  have  not  got  it  and  cannot  get  it.  But
in  what  follows,  for  the  sake  of  convenience
of  terminology,  I  shall  use  “  differential
advantage  ”  with  the  meaning  intended
when  differential  rent  is  distinguished  from
scarcity  rent.
At  first,  so  as  to  limit  the  data  to  which
attention  must  be  given,  we  shall  deal
merely  with  the  economic  rent  of  land.
We  shall  make  a  start  with  the  simplest
conditions  conceivable.  Let  us  imagine  that
the  same  amount  of  capital  and  labour  is
applied  in  cultivating  any  one  acre  of  land
in  use  in  a  country  as  any  other.  The
fertility  of  a  plot  of  ground  has  no  influence
over  the  degree  of  its  cultivation,  we  premise  ;
and  we  assume,  further,  that  the  situation  of
a  farm  is  a  thing  of  no  importance,  and  that
consequently,  in  the  matter  of  the  choice
of  land,  it  is  fertility  alone  that  counts.
Coming  next  to  detail,  let  us  suppose  that  the
        <pb n="202" />
        RENT

199

soil  in  our  scientific  wonderland  is  of  four
different  qualities,  viz.,  A,  B,  C,  and  D,
and  that  A  produce  60  bushels  an  acre,  and
B,  C,  and  D,  50,  35,  and  15  bushels  respectively. ­
  Under  these  conditions,  were  population ­
  very  scanty,  only  a  part  of  land  A  would
be  cultivated,  and  no  land  of  a  lower  quality,
since  a  sufficiency  of  food  could  be  obtained
without  recourse  to  any  inferior  land.  It
goes  without  saying  that,  other  things  being
equal,  the  best  land  would  be  occupied  first,
providing  it  was  known  to  be  the  best.  In
these  circumstances  no  rent,  or  no  appreciable
rent,  would  be  paid  for  land,  on  the  assumption
that  the  whole  of  the  land,  or  at  any  rate
the  whole  of  the  best  land,  was  not  in  the
hands  of  a  monopolist  person  or  group.
If  it  were  in  the  hands  of  a  monopolist,  he
could  insist  on  some  payment  for  its  use,
and  possibly  a  high  payment,  inasmuch  as
people  deprived  of  all  fruits  of  the  earth
would  be  unable  to  get  satisfactory  sustenance.
In  the  absence  of  monopoly,  however,  no
appreciable  rent  would  be  possible,  if  we  mean
by  rent  a  payment  for  land  and  nothing  but
land.  The  competition  of  the  owners  of
plots  still  untouched,  though  equal  in  fertility
to  those  already  ministering  to  the  wants
of  man,  would  prevent  the  owners  of  the
        <pb n="203" />
        200

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

occupied  plots  from  making  any  appreciable
charge  for  them.  In  the  absence  of  combination ­
  on  the  part  of  landowners,  no
landowner  could  exact  a  rent  larger  than  that
which  would  induce  the  possessor  of  vacant
land  to  let  it.
Next  let  us  modify  the  premisses  from  which
this  result  is  deduced.  Let  population  grow,
and  let  it  finally  reach  such  a  figure  that  the
whole  soil  of  quality  A  is  absorbed  in  farms,
and,  in  addition,  recourse  must  be  had  to  some
of  the  soil  of  quality  B.  These  conditions
having  appeared,  the  land  of  the  higher
quality  will  begin  to  bear  a  rent,  and  the  rent
will  tend  to  amount  to  10  bushels  an  acre,
that  is,  the  difference  between  the  yield  of
the  best  land,  60  bushels  an  acre,  and  the
yield  of  the  second  best,  50  bushels  an  acre.
For  the  farm  land  endowed  by  nature  in  the
lesser  degree  no  payment  can  be  effectively
demanded,  for  reasons  which  have  already  been
advanced  to  prove  that  in  the  circumstances
first  imagined  no  rent  at  all  would  be  paid.
Were  the  owners  of  inferior  fields  to  insist  on
payment  for  their  use,  farmers  would  substitute ­
  for  them  land  still  unoccupied.  But
rent  would  be  paid  for  land  of  higher  fertility,
because  no  land  of  this  fertility  remains
unoccupied.  Now,  if  other  land  is  to  be  substi-
        <pb n="204" />
        RENT

201

tuted  for  any  of  quality  A,  it  must  be  at  the  best
that  of  quality  B  ;  and,  therefore,  the  inferior
will  have  to  be  substituted  for  the  superior.
Such  a  substitution  would  not  prove  profitable
until  the  rent  of  land  A  became  something
greater  than  what  would  be  lost  by  evacuating
some  of  A  and  occupying  in  its  place  some  of
B.  Hence  rent  of  land  A  can  be  no  more  than
10  bushels  an  acre.  And,  broadly  speaking,
it  can  be  no  less,  because  the  competition  of
farmers  for  the  better  land  would  force  up
its  annual  value  until  the  substitution  of
land  B  for  land  A  (in  view  of  the  rent  of  land
A)  was  a  matter  of  indifference.
Let  us  now  take  a  further  step  in  the
demonstration  and  suppose  that  the  demand
for  the  produce  of  the  soil  is  such  that  some  of
land  C  must  be  occupied.  Then  eventually  the
rent  of  B  would  be  15  bushels,  the  difference
between  the  yield  of  B,  50  bushels,  and  the
yield  of  C,  35  bushels  ;  and  the  rent  of
A  would  be  25  bushels  per  acre,  the  difference
between  its  yield,  60  bushels,  and  the  yield  of
C,  35  bushels.  Finally  when  D,  which  bears
15  bushels  an  acre,  is  tilled,  C  with  a  produce
of  35  bushels  an  acre  will  bear  a  rent  of  20
bushels,  that  is  35  minus  15.  B,  with  its  output
of  50  bushels  an  acre,  will  earn  a  rent  of  35
bushels,  that  is  50  minus  15  ;  and  the  rent  of
        <pb n="205" />
        202

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

A  with  its  produce  of  60  bushels  will  rise  to  45,
that  is  60  minus  15,  on  the  assumption  that
the  whole  of  the  lowest  quality  of  land  is  not
in  use.  The  significance  of  this  assumption
will  be  brought  out  in  due  course.
We  may  pause  to  underscore  what  is
outstanding  in  this  reasoning,  namely,  that
it  is  the  operation  of  the  law  of  substitution, ­
  or  indifference,  among  competing
persons  which  brings  about  the  payment  of
rent  in  the  circumstances  supposed.  Payments ­
  are  made  for  land  because  effective
tendencies  to  substitute  what  is  lying  idle
for  what  is  used,  and  what  is  cheap  for  what
is  dear,  are  at  work.  These  effective  tendencies ­
  at  first  create  the  rent,  and  then  lever  it
up  until  it  becomes  such  in  amount  that  any
further  substitution  is  a  matter  of  indifference.
So  we  may  affirm  that  the  rent  of  land  is
the  payment  which  equalises  the  earnings  of
cultivators  of  the  same  capacity,  thus  leaving
them  indisposed  to  substitute  one  piece  of
land  for  another.
In  order  to  complete  our  theory  in  its  first
rough-hewn  form  it  is  necessary  to  consider
what  would  happen  if  the  whole  of  the  land
were  absorbed  and  the  population  still  grew.
Let  a  state  of  affairs  be  given  in  which  all  the
land  is  in  use,  but  the  worst  only  just  in  use,
        <pb n="206" />
        RENT

203

so  that  the  worst  land  bears  no  rent  ;  and
let  it  be  given  also  that  the  inhabitants  of
the  country  continue  to  multiply  notwithstanding. ­
  In  consequence  of  the  latter  circumstance, ­
  the  demand  for  the  fruits  of  the
earth  would  rise,  and,  if  payment  for  land  did
not  rise  proportionately  at  the  same  time
and  the  worst  land  bear  a  rent  corresponding
to  the  increased  value  of  its  produce,  all
farmers  would  make  profits  over  and  above
those  earned  by  men  of  similar  capacity  in
other  callings,  because  presumably,  prior  to  the
rise  in  the  price  of  food,  the  farming  business
was  neither  more  nor  less  profitable  than
other  businesses.  The  comparative  fortunes
to  be  made  out  of  tilling  the  soil  would
attract  into  the  farming  industry  larger
numbers  year  by  year  ;  which  is  to  say
that  in  a  short  time  excessive  competition
to  obtain  land,  the  source  of  the  abnormal
profits,  would  appear.  Under  the  pressure
of  this  competition,  the  land  at  the  bottom
of  the  scale,  as  regards  quality,  would  begin
to  bear  a  rent,  and  this  rent  would  rise  until
the  farming  of  that  land  was  no  more  profitable ­
  than  any  other  business,  that  is,  until  the
substitution  of  farming  for  another  trade
would  be  a  matter  of  indifference  from  the
pecuniary  point  of  view.  And,  just  as  and
        <pb n="207" />
        204

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

when  rents  were  created  for  land  of  quality  D,
the  rents  of  fields  of  higher  quality  would
advance,  and  the  amounts  by  which  they
advanced  would  exactly  equal  the  amount  of
the  rent  which  had  to  be  paid  for  D,  on  the
assumption  that  the  quantity  of  wheat  obtainable ­
  from  each  kind  of  land  is  constant.
In  the  paragraph  above  I  have  spoken  of
any  annual  payment  for  land  of  quality  D  as  a
rent,  but  it  is  only  correct  to  call  it  so  if
rent  embraces  every  payment  for  land,  howevery
  determined,  which  is  not  a  recompense
for  any  capital  invested  in  it.  Should  we
elect  to  confine  the  conception  of  rent  to
payments  for  the  differential  advantages
possessed  by  the  super-marginal  things  of  a
class,  then  the  payment  made  for  land  of
quality  D  is  not  a  rent,  because  it  is  not  a
payment  for  such  differential  advantages.
It  is,  on  the  contrary,  a  payment  which
expresses  the  marginal  worth#of  land.  Now
land  can  only  have  a  marginal  worth  when
it  is  limited  in  quantity  so  that  nobody  can
get  as  much  of  it  as  he  likes.  When  the
amount  of  land  is  unlimited  with  reference
to  the  population,  it  is  naturally  used
until  its  marginal  worth  becomes  zero,  just
as  air  is,  and  water  when  the  water  can
be  obtained  direct  from  nature  and  is  not
        <pb n="208" />
        RENT

205

conveyed  along  costly  aqueducts.  To  be
strictly  logical,  if  we  take  the  narrower  view
of  rent,  we  ought  to  say  that  the  marginal
land  earns  its  marginal  worth  (a  scarcity
price)  and  not  rent,  but  that  super-marginal
land  earns  its  marginal  worth  plus  an
extra  sum  (differential  rent)  which  measures
the  differential  advantages  enjoyed  by  it,  that
is  to  say,  a  sum  which  would  render  the  substitution ­
  of  that  land  for  marginal  land  a  matter
of  indifference.
It  goes  without  saying  that  the  payment
for  land  of  a  sum  representing  its  marginal
worth  is  a  phenomenon  foreign  to  our  experience. ­
  Even  under  conditions  of  such  a
kind  that  a  community  is  dependent  for  its
food  upon  the  produce  of  its  own  country,  it
will  generally  be  found  that  there  is  some  land
of  some  quality,  though  it  may  be  of  a  very
low  quality  and  very  inconveniently  located,
which  has  not  yet  been  brought  under  the
plough  or  used  for  grazing.  And  when  we
come  to  modern  conditions  wherein  all
parts  of  the  world  are  linked  together  by
international  trade,  we  find  unlimited  tracts
of  unoccupied  land  available  for  the  production ­
  of  the  food  supply  of  the  future
population.  Hence  it  is  readily  comprehensible ­
  why  it  is  that  in  economic  writings
        <pb n="209" />
        200

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

up  to  recent  times  the  charge  for  land,
apart  from  the  charge  for  the  capital  sunk
n  it,  has  been  represented  as  a  payment
merely  for  differential  advantages.  However,
for  the  sake  of  perfection  of  theory,  the
possibility  at  the  least  of  a  charge  based  upon
marginal  worth  must  be  admitted.
The  differential  advantages  dealt  with  up
to  this  point  are  those  connected  solely  with
fertility,  but  it  is  apparent  that  there  are
other  differential  advantages.  So  far  as  land
is  concerned,  there  are  also  advantages
connected  with  its  situation.  When  the  rent
of  a  plot  of  farm  land  is  being  calculated,  both
its  fertility  and  its  situation  are  taken  into
account,  and  the  sum  that  must  be  paid  for
its  hire  is  determined  by  the  sum  of  the
differential  advantages  which  it  enjoys  in
respect  of  the  two  taken  together.  When,
however,  a  plot  of  ground  is  intended  for  a
building  site  its  fertility,  naturally,  does  not
enter  into  the  settlement  of  its  value  ;  but
of  course  the  charge  made  for  it  must  exceed
the  value  of  its  differential  advantages  for
farming  purposes.  What  are  known  as  situational ­
  advantages,  it  scarcely  need  be  pointed
out,  comprise  conveniences  of  quite  different
sorts.  In  one  case  the  situational  advantage
may  consist  mainly  in  the  low  cost  of  trans-
        <pb n="210" />
        RENT

.or  &amp;amp;
207  .  V
,  „  N  '
port  from  the  plotr  of  land  to  the  marjtejv.
In  another  case  it  may  represent  the  value  of
the  time  saved  by  the  occupant  of  the  site
through  his  being  in  a  favourable  positloh
with  respect  to  the  people  with  whom  he  is
doing  business.  In  another  case  it  may  be
connected  with  water  supply  or  harbourage  ;
and  in  yet  other  cases  it  may  represent  the
pleasantness  of  an  environment,  whether  in
climate,  scenery  or  social  amenities.  It  would
be  impossible  to  measure  by  an  objective
standard  the  quantity  of  intangible  differential
advantage,  but  in  its  actual  measurement  for
practical  purposes  no  difficulty  is  met  with
since  the  value  of  the  differential  advantage
is  automatically  registered  in  the  demands  of
consumers  which  express  the  degree  of  their
preferences  for  different  plots  of  land  in  view
of  the  mixed  advantages  associated  with
each.  Everybody  is  able  to  say  how  much
he  prefers  one  thing  to  another,  though  he
may  find  it  impossible  to  state  why  he  prefers
one  thing  to  another.

In  the  foregoing  discussion  the  broad
aspects  of  the  theory  of  rent  in  its  application ­
  to  land  are  tentatively  blocked  in  ;  it
now  remains  to  shew  where  the  theory,  as  so
far  set  forth,  is  imperfect,  and  how  it  must  be
        <pb n="211" />
        208

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

finished  off.  For  its  completion  we  require
a  finer  instrument  than  has  been  employed
hitherto  ;  we  must  lay  aside  the  palette  knife
and  take  up  the  brush.  The  reader  will
guess  that  by  the  finer  instrument  the
marginal  method  is  meant.  Without  the  use
of  this  method  a  complete  and  consistent
doctrine  of  rent  is  unattainable.  It  is  true
that  we  have  already  had  recourse  again  and
again  in  this  chapter  to  the  term  “  marginal,”
but  the  reader  will  not  have  failed  to  observe
that  in  every  case  marginal  quality  has
been  intended.  The  conception  of  marginal
quality  does  not  incorporate  the  fundamental
idea  of  what  is  known  as  the  marginal
method.
It  was  posited  at  the  outset  of  our  demonstration ­
  that  in  farming  every  acre  of
land,  whatever  its  quality  and  position  with
reference  to  the  market,  would  have  devoted
to  it  the  same  amount  of  capital.  Now  this
assumption,  we  all  of  us  know,  is  a  pure  fiction.
As  a  matter  of  fact  the  most  fertile  and  the
best  situated  land  will  be  worked  most  intensively, ­
  and  by  being  worked  most  intensively
we  mean  that  most  labour  and  capital
will  be  applied  to  its  cultivation  per  acre.
We  have,  then,  to  determine  how  much  labour
and  capital  will  be  devoted  to  each  plot  of
        <pb n="212" />
        RENT

209

ground,  and  how  exactly  the  amount  of  the
surplus  of  produce  (in  value)  over  expenses
is  settled.  There  obviously  cannot  be  a  surplus ­
  on  the  marginal  land,  when  any  other
available  land  remains  uncultivated,  if  we
include  in  the  labour  the  work  done  in  the
way  of  direction  by  the  farmer  himself,
because  it  is  assumed  that  what  is  received
for  the  produce  when  no  rent  is  paid  will  be
just  sufficient  adequately  to  remunerate  the
whole  of  the  factors  engaged  in  working
the  land.  The  surplus  derived  from  the
other  lands  will  evidently  be  the  outcome  of
their  differential  advantages,  and  this  surplus
consequently  will  be  the  rent.
In  an  attempt  to  settle  these  further  points
there  is  nothing  to  baffle  those  who  have
acquired  deftness  with  the  marginal  method.
Let  us  think  of  labour  and  capital  as  made
up  of  doses  of  productive  agents  each  of  a
given  value.  Thus  let  us  mean  by  a  dose  of
labour  and  capital  20s.  spent  to  the  best-known
purpose  on  labour  (including  the  farmer’s
work),  machinery,  seed  and  other  farming
necessities  in  the  working  of  the  land.  One
dose,  of  course,  might  stand  for  much  labour
and  little  instrumental  capital,  while  another
dose  might  stand  for  little  labour  and  much  of
the  other  things  required  in  agriculture.  Now
        <pb n="213" />
        210

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

we  know,  from  wliat  we  have  learnt  of  the  law
of  decreasing  returns,  that  sooner  or  later
the  addition  made  to  the  returns  obtained  from
a  field  by  adding  to  the  doses  of  labour  and
capital  devoted  to  its  cultivation  will  become
less  and  less.  This  being  so,  it  is  apparent
that  in  the  disposal  of  labour  and  capital
the  farmer  will  devote  so  much  to  each  kind
of  land  that  the  additions  made  to  the  returns
of  each  kind  of  land,  as  a  result  of  the  application ­
  of  the  last  dose  of  labour  and  capital,
will  be  the  same.  In  saying  this  we  are
merely  saying  that  the  law  of  substitution,
indifference  or  equi-marginal  returns,  holds
in  production.  The  proof  is  identical  with
the  proof  already  furnished  of  the  proposition
that  people  will  tend  so  to  spend  their  incomes
that  the  marginal  utilities  derived  from  different ­
  lines  of  expenditure  will  be  equal.  The
additions  made  to  the  returns  of  the  fields
are  known  technically  as  the  marginal  returns,
as  the  reader  knows.
Continuing  our  argument,  we  observe  next
that  each  farmer  will  go  on  applying  doses
of  labour  and  capital  to  each  tract  of  land
each  season  until  the  marginal  return,  in
view  of  the  price  of  the  produce,  is  just
sufficient  to  afford  normal  remuneration  for
a  dose  of  labour  and  capital.  Normal  pay-
        <pb n="214" />
        RENT

211

ment  for  the  agents  in  production  other  than
land  will,  therefore,  be  obtained  from  the
proceeds  of  a  quantity  of  produce  represented
by  the  marginal  returns,  multiplied  by  the
number  of  doses  applied.  When  there  is  a
surplus  produce  (that  is  produce  over  and
above  this  amount)  its  value  is  rent.
The  point  will  have  been  seized  already,  no
doubt,  that,  in  order  to  bring  in  the  element  of
situational  convenience,  the  doses  of  labour
and  capital  must  be  made  to  cover  the  cost  of
carrying  the  factors  in  production  to  the  land
and  produce  to  the  market.  For  the  sake
of  simplicity  we  are  leaving  out  specific
mention  of  these  costs,  and  for  the  same
reason  we  are  positing  that  the  produce  is
all  of  one  kind.  It  may  be  remarked,  however, ­
  that  when  the  produce  is  of  many  kinds
we  have  a  common  denominator  for  its
measurement  in  its  value  ;  and  that  the
principle  of  substitution,  which  naturally
settles  how  much  of  one  kind  of  produce  is
produced  and  how  much  of  another,  will
bring  it  about  that  the  proportion  of  the
different  kinds  of  produce  will  be  such  that,
in  view  of  the  price  of  each,  the  value  of  the
total  output  of  the  land  is  maximised.
Let  me  illustrate  our  simplified  case  with
figures  relating  to  a  given  piece  of  land  :—  “
        <pb n="215" />
        212

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

Doses  of  labour
and  capital  of
£5  each.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Value  of  total
returns  at
constant  price.
£7  .  .
£16  ..
£24  ..
£30  ..
£35  ..
£39  ..

Value  of
marginal  returns.
..  £7
..  £9
..  £8
..  £6
..  £5
..  £4

Five  doses  will  be  applied,  as  the  marginal
return  for  five  doses  of  £5  each  is  £5  :  the
application  of  a  sixth  dose  would  cause  loss.
The  total  earnings  of  the  farmer  and  his
agents  in  production  will  be  five  times  £5,  or
£25.  The  value  of  the  aggregate  return  is  £35.
Hence  the  rent  is  £35  less  £25,  that  is  £10.
Two  corollaries  may  be  deduced  from  this
demonstration.  The  one  is  that,  other  things
being  equal,  the  most  favourably  situated
land  will  be  worked  the  most  intensively.
The  other  is  that  more  doses  of  labour  and
capital  will  be  applied  in  making  use  of  the
more  favourably  situated  building  sites  than  in
making  use  of  the  less  favourably  situated
ones.  In  proof  it  is  sufficient  to  point  to  the
high  and  costly  buildings  in  the  centres  of
large  towns.

My  next  purpose  must  be  to  indicate  that  the
        <pb n="216" />
        RENT

213

theory  of  rent,  which  holds  in  this  particular
case,  holds  also  of  payments  for  differential
advantages  of  quite  another  kind.  The
foregoing  demonstration  is  in  fact  an
exposition  by  the  method  of  example  of  the
general  theory  of  rent  when  rent  is  understood
as  payment  for  differential  advantages.  It
will  be  comprehended  that  the  same  forces
come  into  play  when  human  factors  in
production  are  being  dealt  with  as  well  as
when  land  is  being  dealt  with.  Just  as  there
are  differences  in  respect  of  fertility  between
different  plots  of  land,  so  there  are  differences
in  respect  of  capacity,  industry  and  quickness
between  different  persons.  Take  the  case
of  a  particular  industry,  and,  to  make  it  a
strong  case,  suppose  that  those  who  work  in
it  must  have  special  ability.  Naturally  it  is
impossible  to  obtain  for  the  industry  an
unlimited  supply  of  labour  of  the  highest
quality.  Employers  must  have  recourse  to
labour  of  lower  qualities  if  the  trade  is  to
attain  to  any  magnitude,  just  as  farmers
must  have  recourse  to  some  land  which  is  not
of  the  best  sort.  The  least  efficient  operative
may  be  termed  the  marginal  operative,  just
as  the  least  valuable  land  may  be  termed  the
marginal  land.  Through  the  working  of  the
principle  of  substitution  it  is  plain  that  the
        <pb n="217" />
        214

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

more  efficient  operatives  will  tend  to  get  wages
in  excess  of  the  wage  obtained  by  the  marginal
man  ;  and  after  the  foregoing  exposition  it
should  be  equally  apparent  that  the  extra
wages  will  measure  their  differential  advantages ­
  as  agents  in  production,  that  is  the
differential  advantages  of  employing  them.
They  are  properly  termed  rents,  according
to  the  modefn  use  of  the  term,  because  they
are  payments  for  differential  advantages.
It  will  be  observed,  moreover,  that  the
complexities  which  were  involved  in  the  case
of  land  considered  above  when  we  took  into
account  the  different  amounts  of  labour  and
capital  that  would  be  applied  to  different
qualities  of  land  are  involved  also,  to  some
extent,  in  the  case  of  workmen.  More  doses
of  labour  and  capital  will  be  applied,  other
things  being  equal,  to  the  more  efficient  than
to  the  less  efficient  workman,  that  is  to  say
there  will  be  a  tendency  to  set  the  efficient
workman  to  manage  more  machinery  and
generally  to  work  with  more  assistance.  However, ­
  this  tendency  is  frequently  counteracted
by  other  tendencies,  for  instance  by  the  disposition ­
  to  secure  the  simplicity  arising  from
uniformity  of  arrangement.  Again,  trade
union  regulations,  imposed  for  reasons  which
cannot  be  discussed  now,  may  prevent  the
        <pb n="218" />
        RENT

215

most  capable  operatives  from  getting  the  full
value  of  their  differential  advantages  ;  but
it  must  not  be  taken  for  granted  that  such
restraints  are  necessarily  without  beneficial
results.
The  personal  rent  enjoyed  by  an  employer
is  naturally  a  more  substantial  quantity  than
any  personal  rent  enjoyed  by  a  workman.
A  very  capable  employer  will  ultimately  have
under  his  control  a  far  greater  quantity  of
agents  in  production  than  the  marginal  employer. ­
  Though  the  very  capable  employer
with  a  small  business  might  immensely  magnify
his  earnings  by  enlarging  it,  the  marginal
employer  would  find  that  any  attempt  on  his
part  to  do  the  same  would  meet  with  loss
instead  of  gain.
Whether  regarded  broadly  or  narrowly,  the
rent  paid  for  a  productive  agent  does  not  determine ­
  the  price  of  the  thing  to  the  creation  of
which  it  is  instrumental.  In  this  sentence  we
have  presented  to  us  one  of  the  most  famous
dogmas  of  economics.  Not  uncommonly  it
has  been  expressed  thus  :  “  rent  does  not  enter
into  price.”  In  this  form,  however,  it  invites
misunderstanding.  The  rent  of  farm  land
and  business  premises  must  come  out  of  the
receipts  made  up  of  the  prices  of  things,  since
        <pb n="219" />
        216

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

no  other  fund  exists  out  of  which  it  can  be
paid.  But  this  is  not  denied.  By  “  entering
into  price  ”  is  meant  entering  as  a  determining
factor  into  price.  That  all  rent  which  is
incurred  in  connection  with  producing  does
not  exert  a  direct  influence  on  the  prices  of
things—though,  as  we  shall  discern  shortly,  it
may  be  involved  indirectly  in  the  settlement
of  price—can  be  deduced  instantly  from  the
theory  of  price  already  expounded.  Take
the  case  of  wheat.  From  the  supply  side  its
price  is  fixed  by  the  costs  of  the  marginal
producer  on  marginal  land.  Into  these  costs
ex  hypothesi  differential  rent  does  not  enter  ;
and  though  the  farmer  of  marginal  land  would
reckon  any  scarcity  rent  among  his  costs,  its
remission  would  not  cause  an  increased  supply
of  wheat  (and  so  an  alteration  of  price)
because,  were  a  scarcity  rent  ever  to  appear,
there  would  be  no  more  land  to  bring  into
cultivation.  Another  and  more  exact  way  of
putting  the  proof  is  to  apply  the  marginal
method  of  analysis  intensively  and  point  out
that  price  is  settled  by  the  cost  of  the  marginal
return  (whether  from  marginal  land  or  not)
which  should,  in  strict  theory,  be  the  same
on  every  field,  and  that  no  kind  of  rent  figures
in  this  cost.
All  farmers,  though  producing  at  different
        <pb n="220" />
        RENT

217

costs  per  unit  raised,  get  the  same  price  per
unit  for  their  produce  in  the  market,  and
this  is  the  price  which  it  is  necessary  to  pay
to  cause  the  production  of  the  wheat  raised
at  the  margin.  Rents,  instead  of  settling
price,  are  caused,  as  we  have  seen,  by  the
fact  that  when  all  farmers  get  the  same  price,
some  of  them  (or  all  of  them  under  conditions ­
  which  give  rise  to  scarcity  rent)  would  be
left,  in  the  absence  of  rent,  with  a  handsome
surplus  over  normal  profits,  and  that  competition ­
  for  their  farms  compels  them  to
surrender  it  to  the  landlord.  High  rents  do
not  make  high  prices  any  more  than  the
height  of  the  barometer  governs  the  state  of
the  weather.  On  the  contrary  it  is  the  high
prices  that  make  the  high  rents.
In  qualification  of  this  statement  it  must
be  added  that  a  rent  charge  comes  into  play
in  settlement  of  price  when  the  marginal
land  for  a  given  purpose  can  only  be  obtained
by  buying  out  somebody  who  requires  it  for
another  purpose.  The  marginal  factory  in
the  outskirts  of  a  town  has  had  to  win  its  site
from  agriculture  in  all  probability,  and  to  do
so  it  has  had  to  pay  for  the  land  a  charge  equal
at  least  to  its  rentable  value  for  agriculture.
This  charge,  in  being  incurred  at  the  margin,
is  an  unavoidable  element  in  marginal  cost,
        <pb n="221" />
        218

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

and  therefore  enters  into  the  supply  price
of  the  article  produced  in  the  factory.
It  will  be  realised,  of  course,  that  the  dogma
discussed  above  has  no  reference  to  the
rents  paid  directly  by  consumers  for  their
houses  and  grounds.  It  will  be  realised  also,
I  imagine,  without  demonstration  that  the
dogma  holds  not  merely  of  land  rent,  but  of
every  kind  of  rent  so  far  as  it  is  a  payment
arising  out  of  the  production  of  things.
        <pb n="222" />
        CHAPTER  IX

PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION
It  is  now  my  intention  to  discuss  some  details
and  practical  points  connected  with  the
abstract  theory  of  distribution  already  set
forth,  but  before  doing  so  it  will  be  as  well
to  repeat  in  what  the  gist  of  this  theory
consists.  Broadly  put  the  modern  doctrine
of  distribution  affirms  that  payment  for  the
employed  agents  in  production  is  settled  by  the
forces  of  demand  and  supply.  The  demand
for  a  factor  is  supposed  to  measure  the
marginal  worth  of  that  factor  to  employers,
in  view  of  the  existing  supplies  of  other  factors,
while  its  supply  forces  mean  the  prices  at
which  different  quantities  of  that  factor  will  be
forthcoming.  As  regards  the  employer,  his
remuneration  for  the  work  that  he  does,  apart
from  payment  for  his  capital,  is  represented
as  what  is  left  over  after  payment  for  the
employed  agents  ;  and  it  is  maintained  that
this  amount,  in  the  case  of  the  employer  of
marginal  capacity,  tends  to  equal  his  supply
        <pb n="223" />
        220

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

price.  It  is  extremely  important  to  observe  that
this  theory  in  its  bearing  on  employed  factors
does  not  declare  that  each  agent  gets  what  it
makes,  but  merely  that  each  agent  gets  the
difference  that  it  makes  to  the  total  output
of  a  productive  group  which  is  organized  to
work  as  a  whole.  Finally,  to  complete  the
theory  we  have  the  doctrine  of  rent  which
accounts  for  payments  made  on  behalf  of
agents  which  enjoy  differential  advantages.
It  needs  no  specific  intimation  that  in  this
theory  it  is  marginal  incidents  that  play  the
leading  parts,  just  as  it  was  marginal  incidents
which  enabled  us  to  comprehend  fully  the
phenomena  of  price.  Now,  in  relation  to
price,  we  observed  that  an  incisive  application ­
  of  the  marginal  method  on  the  side
of  demand  brought  out  a  novel  feature
known  as  consumer’s  surplus  ;  and  it  remains
to  investigate  whether  a  similar  feature  may
not  be  revealed  on  the  side  of  supply.  It  may
be  said  at  once  that  a  similar  feature  will  be
found  to  exist.  It  is  called  producer’s  surplus.
Broadly  put  consumer’s  surplus  stands  for
the  difference  between  the  value  that  a  consumer ­
  gets  from  a  thing  and  the  value  that
he  gives  for  it  when  he  purchases  it.  Then,  to
be  strictly  analogous,  producer’s  surplus
should  stand  for  the  difference  between  the
        <pb n="224" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  221

value  which  a  producer  gets  for  his  work
(exclusive  of  the  element  of  consumer’s
surplus)  and  what  he  sacrifices  in  doing  it.
Let  us  take  the  case  of  a  workman.  What  he
sacrifices  is  the  disutility  or  dissatisfaction
involved  in  working,  which  we  must  remember
to  interpret  as  experience  which  would  not
be  chosen  for  itself,  but  to  avoid  which,  on  the
contrary,  the  workman  would  be  prepared  to
pay  something.  What  he  gets  is  first  his  wage
and  secondly  any  satisfaction  obtained  by  him
from  the  work  itself.  And  there  is  little  work
in  the  world  which  from  minute  to  minute,  day
in  and  day  out,  never  stirs  the  sense  of  enjoyment. ­
  Generally  speaking  the  beginning  of
the  day’s  work  goes  against  the  grain  ;  but
soon  our  activities  become  pleasurable  ;  and
they  continue  pleasurable  until  weariness
again  causes  disutility  to  predominate.  Now
in  a  land  where  labour  is  not  in  slavery  the
marginal  utility  of  the  wage  multiplied  by  its
amount  is  practically  certain  to  exceed  the
disutility  involved  in  work.  This  excess
with  any  positive  utility  got  from  the  activity
of  working  is  analogous  to  consumer’s  surplus
and  is  called  the  workman’s  producer’s  surplus.
It  may  also  be  defined  as  the  net  utility  resulting ­
  from  work,  apart  from  consumer’s  surplus,
when  the  utility  of  the  wage  is  taken  into
        <pb n="225" />
        222

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

account.  Evidently  a  producer’s  surplus  is
normally  yielded  by  every  kind  of  work.
What  is  the  good  of  the  conception  ?  It
furnishes  us  with  a  clear-cut  notion  of  an
important  part  of  the  national  income  of
utility  which  we  should  otherwise  be  in  danger
of  overlooking,  and  moreover  provides  us  with
a  theoretical  (which  may  become  a  practical)
means  of  measuring  it.  It  is  imperative  that
in  directing  progress  the  influence  of  different
courses  of  action  on  the  real,  though  intangible,
income  represented  by  producer’s  surplus
should  not  be  lost  sight  of,  as  it  is  only  too
apt  to  be.
In  this  discussion  we  have  come  in  touch
with  the  problem  of  the  hours  of  labour,  as
regards  which  it  must  now  suffice  to  say  that,
in  the  settlement  of  the  duration  of  the  normal
day’s  work,  wages,  the  marginal  dissatisfaction
of  working,  the  effect  of  different  hours  of
labour  on  productivity  and  on  the  producer’s
surplus  of  the  operative,  and  the  utility  of
capital  in  relation  to  the  proportion  of  time
that  it  is  idle,  all  play  a  part;  but  not  all
of  them  such  a  part  as  they  ought  to  play.
Having  noted  so  much,  we  may  pass  on  to  the
equally  practical  and  urgent  question  of  the
bearing  of  an  extensive  use  of  capital  on
        <pb n="226" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  223

wages  and  the  general  well-being  of  the  wageearning ­
  classes.
We  may  take  it  as  commonly  allowed  in
these  days  that  the  workers  have  generally
benefited  in  income  from  the  capitalisation  of
industry  ;  but  it  is  not  always  recognised  how
exactly  the  benefit  has  come  about.  The
correct  view  of  the  relation  between  wages
and  capital  is  certainly  this,  that  as  capital
increases  wages  must  tend  to  rise.  One  might
at  first,  perhaps,  hesitate  about  subscribing
to  this  doctrine,  because  one  might  feel  disposed ­
  to  contend  that  the  introduction  of
more  capital  displaces  labour—that  is  to  say
that  satisfying  the  demand  for  productive
agents  with  capital  weakens  the  demand  for
labour,  capital  and  labour  being  largely  alternatives. ­
  Such  an  argument  would  be  sound
were  it  a  fact  that  the  quantity  of  things
demanded,  tangible  and  intangible,  was  absolutely ­
  fixed  in  amount.  In  that  case,  the
advent  of  labour-saving  appliances  would
throw  men  out  of  work,  and  the  out-of-works,
by  competing  with  those  left  in  employment,
would  bring  down  the  rate  of  wages.  But
this  effect  could  never  be  met  with  in  the  long
run,  because,  when  the  price  of  a  thing  is
reduced  in  consequence  of  an  improvement  in
the  method  of  making  it,  more  of  the  thing  is
        <pb n="227" />
        224

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

wanted  and  more  has  to  be  produced,  and
because,  were  some  labour  left  unoccupied
nevertheless,  this  labour  would  be  needed
to  produce  other  things  (including  leisure)
which  people  had  not  been  in  a  position  to  buy
when  they  had  been  forced  to  pay  so  much  for
the  thing  that  was  afterwards  cheapened.
We  may  therefore  conclude  that,  in  consequence ­
  of  the  introduction  of  machinery,  in
the  long  run  as  much  labour  will  be  wanted
as  before,  and  will  even  be  wanted  more
intensively  (as  will  be  argued  later),  despite
the  fact  that  some  labour  may  occasionally
lose  work  for  a  time  and  possibly  suffer
permanently  through  having  been  narrowly
specialised  to  a  task  which  machinery  assumes.
The  impossibility  of  there  ever  being  insufficient ­
  work  for  a  community  normally  becomes
evident  when  we  bear  in  mind  that  the  demand
for  labour  is  simply  a  reflection  of  the  community’s ­
  demand  for  things  which  may  be
regarded  as  practically  insatiable.  So  Mr.
Midshipman  Easy  was  uttering  an  outrageous
fallacy  when  he  gave  expression  in  this  way  to
the  wisdom  which  he  is  supposed  to  have
learnt  in  the  Navy  :—“  The  luxury,  the
pampered  state,  the  idleness—if  you  please,
the  wickedness—of  the  rich,  all  contribute  to
the  support,  the  comfort,  and  employment  of
        <pb n="228" />
        p

PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  225

the  poor.  You  may  behold  extravagance—it
is  a  vice  ;  but  that  very  extravagance  circulates ­
  money,  and  the  vice  of  one  contributes
to  the  happiness  of  many.  The  only  vice
which  is  not  redeemed  by  producing  commensurate ­
  good,  is  avarice.  If  all  were  equal,
there  would  be  no  arts,  no  manufactures,  no
industry,  no  employment.  As  it  is,  the
inequality  of  the  distribution  of  wealth  may  be
compared  to  the  heart,  pouring  forth  the  blood
like  a  steam-engine  through  the  human  frame,
the  same  blood  returning  from  the  extremities
by  the  veins,  to  be  again  propelled,  and  keep
up  a  healthy  and  vigorous  circulation.”  The
fallacy  betrays  itself  at  once  when  we  remind
ourselves  that  we  cannot  be  ultimately  dependent ­
  for  employment  on  other  people’s
wants,  because  we  have  all  quite  sufficient  of
our  own  to  keep  us  fully  occupied  in  satisfying
them.  Yet  there  are  those  to-day  who  follow
the  lead  of  Marryat’s  hero  along  one  line  of
thought  and  maintain  that  the  excessive
saving  of  the  rich  —  which  is  sometimes
represented  as  forced  upon  them  because  it  is
maintained  that  they  simply  cannot  spend  in
proportion  to  what  they  get—is  withholding
employment  from  the  poor.  But  saving  which
is  not  hoarding  is  indirect  spending—spending
on  productive  instruments  which  make  things
        <pb n="229" />
        226

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

cheaper  for  the  poor—and  transparently
more  can  be  produced  for  the  poor  when  their
demand  has  to  compete  to  a  less  extent
with  rich  people’s  demand  for  consumers’
goods.
It  has  been  counterclaimed  above,  as  against
the  pessimists  who  dread  lest  wages  should
fall  as  more  machinery  is  used,  that  the
effect  of  using  capital  in  production  is  to
intensify  the  demand  for  labour,  so  that  a
bigger  real  wage  will  be  paid  when  much
capital  is  used  than  when  little  capital  is
used.  The  ground  on  which  this  counterclaim ­
  rests  is  that  the  productivity  of  labour
is  enhanced  with  every  additional  accession
of  suitable  appliances  :  and  labour  is  remunerated, ­
  if  our  theory  is  correct,  in  proportion
to  its  productivity.  The  rate  of  interest
may  be  very  high,  and  the  proportion  of
the  national  income  absorbed  by  capitalists
may  be  very  large,  but  nevertheless  t  he  capital
must  have  added  to  the  national  product
under  normal  conditions  a  larger  amount  than
is  paid  for  it.  Another  way  of  proving  this
conclusion  is  to  derive  it  from  the  doctrine  of
consumers’  surplus  ;  for  capital  as  well  as
labour  is  paid  only  its  marginal  worth,  and  the
initial  returns  to  capital  are  very  much  higher
than  the  later  returns.  Hence  there  is  a
        <pb n="230" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  227

surplus,  so  to  speak,  which  has  been  termed
consumers’  surplus  ;  only  in  this  case  the
surplus  must  accrue  not  to  those  who  buy
consumers’  goods  but  to  the  direct  consumers
of  the  capital,  namely,  those  who  are  active
in  producing  in  conjunction  with  the  capital
yielding  the  surplus.
The  question  naturally  suggests  itself  at
this  point  as  to  whether  it  is  theoretically
possible—apart  from  broad  questions  of  justice
and  social  policy—to  secure  the  whole  of  the
benefits  resulting  from  the  use  of  capital  for
the  community  at  large,  no  share  being  left
for  capitalists.  Evidently  it  would  not  be
possible  to  bring  about  this  result  by  the  simple
expedient  of  prohibiting  the  payment  of
interest,  even  if  such  a  prohibition  were  not
evaded.  Were  interest  forcibly  suppressed
under  the  conditions  now  ruling,  which  naturally ­
  give  birth  to  a  market  rate  of  interest,  it
is  highly  probable,  to  say  the  least,  that  the
amount  of  capital  saved  would  be  substantially
reduced,  so  that  a  loss  would  be  occasioned  to
others  than  capitalists,  as  well  as  to  capitalists, ­
  which  might  easily  surpass  in  amount
the  saving  effected  for  the  former  through
the  non-payment  of  interest.
Nevertheless  it  is  conceivable,  though  most
improbable,  that  circumstances  might  arise
        <pb n="231" />
        228

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

which  would  naturally  bring  down  the  rate
of  interest  to  zero.  Were  a  people  exceedingly ­
  well-to-do  so  that  their  power  to  save
was  very  great,  and  were  they  extremely
provident  so  that  their  will  to  save  was  very
great  also,  and  were  it  a  fact  that  such  inventions ­
  had  been  made  that  machinery  became
more  effective  and  less  costly  ;  then  it  might
be  that  the  marginal  worth  of  capital  in
industry  would  be  zero  for  such  a  quantity
of  capital  as  would  be  saved  without  payment ­
  of  interest,  and  our  theory  teaches
that  interest  would  be  zero  if  the  marginal
worth  of  capital  were  zero.  Maybe  such
theoretically  imaginable  circumstances  are
never  likely  to  be  met  with  in  this  world,
as  I  have  already  maintained  ;  but  it  is
remarkable  that  the  net  rate  of  interest  should
be  as  low  as  it  is,  despite  the  prodigious  masses
of  capital  which  industry  absorbs.  This  fact
seems  to  indicate  that  the  amount  of  saving
which  takes  place  in  the  country  independently ­
  of  the  inducement  of  interest  must  be
gigantic.
With  the  point  proved  to  our  satisfaction
that  we  are  all  much  the  better  off  pecuniarily
in  consequence  of  the  extensive  use  of  capital,
the  whole  of  the  social  problem  connected
with  the  capitalising  of  industry  has  not
        <pb n="232" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  229

been  solved.  There  remain  for  discussion
the  vital  questions,  first  of  what  are  the
effects  of  the  use  of  machinery  upon  labour
directly  apart  from  its  wages  (what,  for
instance,  are  the  effects  upon  the  workman’s
producer’s  surplus),  and,  secondly,  of  what
are  its  effects  upon  the  prospects  of  the  more
able  and  ambitious  of  the  labour  world.
These  questions  it  is  for  realistic  economics  to
answer,  but  two  thoughts  may  be  suggested:
the  one  that  the  influence  of  machinery  on
labour  is  elevating  when  the  workman  is
no  longer  called  upon  to  perform  a  mechanical
task,  and  possibly  a  heavy  task,  but  is
required  instead  to  apply  knowledge  and
exercise  intelligence  in  the  management  of
power-driven  appliances  of  a  complicated
nature  ;  and  the  other  that  within  the  large
business  upward  progression  may  be  possible
for  the  talented,  while  it  may  still  be  feasible
to  start  employing,  in  many  industries,  in  a
small  way  which  may  not  be  beyond  the
reach  of  the  pushing  and  thrifty  workman
under  conditions  of  developed  credit.
The  beautiful  theory  of  distribution  expounded ­
  in  the  last  few  chapters  works  in
the  world  as  it  is  against  enormous  friction.
It  is  not,  therefore,  surprising  to  find  in  all
advanced  countries  associations  of  workmen
        <pb n="233" />
        230

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

and  employers,  one  of  the  objects  of  both  of
which  is  to  regulate  the  sharing  of  wealth
between  capital  and  labour  ;  and  it  becomes
the  less  surprising  when  we  allow  that  even
if  economic  tendencies  were  not  naturally
retarded  under  competition  it  might  conceivably ­
  pay  certain  people  to  retard  them
(as  we  have  learnt  in  the  chapter  on  Monopoly)
or  it  might  be  thought  that  it  would.
It  seems  likely,  though  it  cannot  be  firmly
established  by  a  rigid  logic,  that  trade  unions
have  had  a  large  effect  on  the  level  of  earnings ­
  :  and  they  have  certainly  influenced  the
position  of  the  wage-earning  classes  in  a  variety
of  other  ways,  in  improving  their  status,
curtailing  their  hours  of  labour,  and  rendering
the  conditions  of  their  work  more  agreeable.
We  shall  now  consider  in  some  detail  how
wages  can  be  controlled  by  trade  union
action,  keeping  our  discussion  throughout
hand-in-hand  with  theory.  In  the  first  place,
we  shall  suppose  that  the  organisation  of
labour  is  accompanied  neither  by  improvement
nor  deterioration  in  its  efficiency.
It  needs  no  proof  that  the  strong  organisation ­
  of  a  section  of  the  labour  world,  in  the
absence  of  organisation  on  the  part  of  other
workpeople  or  in  the  presence  of  weaker
organisation  on  the  part  of  other  workpeople,
        <pb n="234" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  231

can  secure  for  the  members  of  the  strong
trade  union  a  larger  remuneration  than  is
enjoyed  by  people  of  equal  capacity  in  other
trades.  By  their  strong  organisation  the
parties  in  question  place  themselves  in  the
position  of  monopolists  ;  and  the  monopolist,
whether  he  be  selling  labour  or  commodities,
is  able  to  get  more  than  normal  earnings,
as  we  have  already  learnt.  As  a  rule,  however, ­
  it  would  be  necessary  for  the  monopolist
trade  union  to  restrict  its  membership,  as  it
could  not  hope  to  place  an  indefinite  number
of  people  in  employment  at  an  abnormally
high  wage,  and,  if  they  were  not  debarred,
multitudes  of  people  would  flock  into  the
calling  in  which  earnings  became  exceptionally
high.
We  may  inquire  next  whether  larger
wages  can  be  secured  by  the  working
classes  through  trade  union  effort  on  the
assumption  that  all  workpeople  are  combined
with  equal  strength.  They  certainly  can  if  it
is  a  fact  that  social  friction  is  strong  and
that  social  friction  ordinarily  works  to  the
detriment  of  the  wage-earner,  as  it  is
alleged  that  it  does.  Combination  on  the
part  of  labour  might  at  least  be  sufficient
to  counteract  the  effects  of  this  social  friction,
so  that  wages  rose  more  rapidly  and  higher  on
        <pb n="235" />
        232

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

demand  increasing  than  they  would  have  done
otherwise.  It  is  quite  possible  that  the  gain
of  the  working  classes  through  the  resistance
offered  to  social  friction  by  trade  union
action  may  have  been  an  amount  well  worth
having.  But  could  an  all-round  combination
of  labour  raise  wages  on  the  assumption
that  there  was  previously  no  social  friction,
or,  in  other  words,  could  trade  union  action
do  more  (in  the  absence  of  any  increase  of
efficiency  on  the  part  of  labour)  than  counteract ­
  social  friction  ?
To  find  the  correct  answer  to  this  question
requires  more  than  a  passing  acquaintance
with  economic  principles.  We  may  argue  the
matter  in  this  way.  Wage  earners,  were  they
strong  enough  to  hold  out,  and  were  they  in  a
position  to  sell  their  labour  in  the  lump,  could
immediately  secure  an  appreciably  higher  wage.
The  higher  wage  would  be  won  at  the  expense
of  employers’  earnings  and  interest  on  industrial ­
  capital.  Consequently,  in  the  long
run  the  amount  of  employing  capacity
devoted  to  industry  would  probably  be
reduced,  and  so  also  would  the  amount  of
capital  devoted  to  industry.  Now  when
industrial  capital  and  the  quantity  of  the
employing  factor  acting  in  production  were
both  diminished  the  sum  of  the  national
        <pb n="236" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  233

product  would  be  depleted.  Whether,  then,
the  workpeople  would  gain  or  lose  in  the  long
run  would  depend  (assuming  that  these
reactions  would  be  met  with)  upon  whether
their  larger  share  of  the  smaller  product
was  greater  than  the  smaller  share  of  the
larger  product  which  they  had  previously
received.  Up  to  a  certain  point  the  former
sum  might  conceivably  be  the  greater  ;  if
it  were,  up  to  that  point  the  concerted
action  supposed  on  the  part  of  labour
would  have  worked  to  their  advantage.
In  going  beyond  any  such  point,  however,
they  would  lose,  that  is  if  they  attempted
to  grasp  a  share  of  the  national  product
in  excess  of  a  given  amount  which  it  is
possible  theoretically  to  define.  Inanimate
nature  presents  analogies  :  if  a  rhubarb  bed
is  too  greedily  plucked  one  year  its  powers
of  recovery  may  be  so  weakened  that  it  will
never  be  the  same  again.
The  reader  must  not  close  the  book  at  this
point  and  run  away  with  the  false  and
mischievous  idea  that  an  important  practical
conclusion  has  been  deduced.  For  practical
purposes  our  argument  is  as  yet  one-sided.  It
has  now  to  be  qualified.  So  far  we  have  been
dealing  with  a  highly  abstract  case  implying
assumptions  all  of  which  could  not  possibly
        <pb n="237" />
        234

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

be  realized.  It  is  supposed  that  workpeople
are  in  a  position  to  sell  their  labour  in  the
lump,  which  is  to  say  that  they  are  so  placed
that  they  can  prevent  employers  from  dismissing ­
  any  hands  when  wages  rise.  Now
employers  as  a  body  would  certainly  be
wishful  to  dismiss  some  hands  when  the
trade  unions  had  forced  up  wages  in  the
manner  supposed,  because  wages,  which  we
imagined  to  have  been  equal  previously  to  the
marginal  worth  of  labour,  would  have  become
greater  than  the  marginal  worth  of  labour.
That  the  workpeople  would  get  wages  in
excess  of  their  marginal  worth,  if  they  got
their  way  in  the  case  put  above,  can  easily
be  demonstrated.  It  has  been  premised  that
the  quantities  both  of  employing  power  and
capital  engaged  in  industry  would  be  reduced.
This  being  so,  the  marginal  worth  of  labour
would  be  bound  to  fall  because  its  marginal
worth  varies  directly  as  the  quantity  of  the
other  factors  in  collaboration  with  which  it  is
working  ;  and  though  its  marginal  worth  would
fall  in  the  circumstances  considered,  its  wage
has  been  supposed  to  rise.  But  according  to
the  theory  of  wages,  the  employer  will  not  pay
labour  more  than  its  marginal  worth  :  if  an
attempt  is  made  to  force  him  to  do  so  he  will
turn  off  workpeople  until  he  reaches  the  point
        <pb n="238" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  235

at  which  the  man  just  left  in  employment  has
a  worth  equal  to  his  wage.
It  is  very  difficult  to  imagine  how  organised
labour  could  secure  the  employment  of  all  employable ­
  people,  when  such  a  breach  between
marginal  worth  and  wages  had  been  created,
without  interfering  to  such  an  extent  with  the
arrangements 1  in  works  that  the  employer  as
industrial  organiser  would  in  effect  be  displaced.
In  a  limited  degree,  of  course,  the  kind  of
interference  with  the  demand  for  labour  which
we  have  in  mind  can  be  brought  about  by
regulations  relating,  for  example,  to  the
quantity  of  labour  to  machinery  (the  wisdom
or  folly  of  which  when  their  intention  goes
beyond  stopping  overwork,  we  shall  not
enter  into  here)  ;  but,  in  order  to  carry  out
on  a  large  scale  the  sort  of  policy  which  we
have  been  discussing,  the  interference  with
the  demand  for  labour,  instead  of  being  limited
and  piecemeal,  would  have  to  be  massive  and
thorough-going.
Paradoxical  as  it  may  appear,  given  a
social  system  like  that  which  we  have  now  in
general  operation,  a  brighter  future  for
labour  is  bound  up,  not  with  action  which
would  reduce  the  proportion  of  employing
capacity  active  in  producing,  but,  on  the
contrary,  with  action  which  will  augment
        <pb n="239" />
        236

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

its  potential  supplies.  Action  of  the  latter
kind  must  obviously  aim  at  raising  the  vertical
mobility  of  the  population,  as  it  may  be  put
technically—at  rendering  it  increasingly
possible  for  talents  to  discover  themselves
and  discover  in  addition  suitable  outlets.
As  things  are  the  national  product  would
rise  if  the  relative  number  of  those  who
function  as  organisers  and  sub-organisers
increased  ;  and  their  relative  numbers  would
tend  to  increase  were  they  picked  from  a
wider  field,  so  that  the  supply  price  for  any
given  number  of  them  would  be  reduced.
Moreover,  when  organisers  are  picked  from
a  wide  field,  the  level  of  capacity  among  them
may  be  expected  to  be  higher  than  when  they
are  picked  from  a  narrow  field.  And,  in
addition,  when  forcible  and  continual  competitive ­
  pressure  is  brought  to  bear  upon  the
organising  ranks  from  below,  by  new  men
who  are  attempting  to  force  their  way  into
the  ranks  of  leadership,  those  who  are  already
established  are  compelled  to  be  zealous  and
alert.  Of  the  enlarged  product  brought
about  by  the  vertical  mobility  of  labour,  a
substantial  portion  must  almost  certainly  be
reaped  by  labour,  because  the  marginal  utility
of  labour  tends  to  rise  as  the  amount  and
efficiency  of  the  attention  devoted  to  its
        <pb n="240" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  237

arrangement  and  direction  is  magnified.  It
is,  therefore,  in  the  interest  of  labour—and
of  the  community  as  a  whole—to  encourage
vertical  mobility.  Of  vertical  mobility  good
general  and  specialised  education  is  an
indispensable  condition  ;  and  such  education
is  calculated  to  bear  yet  other  fruit  in  the
invention  and  discovery  which  advances  the
material  interests  of  the  human  race.
In  the  above  discussion  about  the  effect  of
trade  unions  on  wages,  it  has  been  taken  for
granted  that  the  efficiency  of  the  workpeople
remains  the  same  ;  but  as  a  matter  of  fact
trade  unions  may  build  up  or  undermine  the
efficiency  upon  which  depends  the  joy  of
working  as  well  as  the  external  product  of
working.  The  organisation  of  labour  means
its  professionalising,  so  to  speak,  which
may  create  a  pride  of  calling  and  a  high
standard  of  work  and  conduct  ;  but,  on  the
other  hand,  efficiency  must  be  lessened  when
the  policy  of  slacking  with  a  view  to  extensifying
  the  demand  for  labour  is  adopted—a
policy  which  is  suicidal,  because  we  all  tend
to  become  what  we  consistently  pretend  to  be,
and  because  character  is  not  left  unhurt  by
shamming—but  we  must  not  confound  with
such  a  policy  resistance  against  the  overdriving ­
  which  wears  people  out.
        <pb n="241" />
        238

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

From  time  to  time  readjustments  of  wages
are  essential.  Unfortunately  it  usually  happens ­
  that  such  readjustments  are  accompanied
by  industrial  warfare  in  the  form  of  strikes
and  lock-outs,  which  are  wasteful  of  productive
energy  and  leave  behind  them  such  embittered
feelings  that  it  becomes  difficult  for  the
smooth  working  of  society  on  its  economic
side  to  be  resumed.  I  propose  now  to
consider  whether  a  greater  degree  of  peaceableness ­
  cannot  be  insinuated  into  such  of  the
re-arrangements  of  wages  as  in  justice  and
fact  are  unavoidable.
When  we  face  this  problem,  in  which  are
involved  not  only  economic  elements,  narrowly
conceived,  but  also  subtle  social  elements  that
defy  dogmatic  definition  and  afford  no  sufficiently ­
  firm  foundation  for  unhesitating  pronouncements, ­
  so  that  in  dealing  with  it  one’s
own  peculiar  bias  cannot  be  altogether  shut
out,  the  thought  will  instantly  occur  that  the
civilised  method  of  the  law-courts  might  be
adapted  for  the  settlement  of  wages  disputes.
It  is  in  the  law-courts  that  many  other  business ­
  disputes  are  settled.  But  this  thought
will  arise  only  to  be  dismissed,  except  as
regards  minor  disagreements  or  divergent
interpretations  of  existing  contracts,  when  we
keep  our  attention  steadily  fixed  on  needs  and
        <pb n="242" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  239

possibilities  in  such  an  industrial  country
as  England  at  the  present  time.  The  method
would  not  be  acceptable  to  the  majority  of
employers  or  employees,  and  it  is  highly  doubtful, ­
  despite  the  triumphs  of  different  forms
of  industrial  arbitration  in  New  Zealand  and
Australia,  whether  the  method  would  prove
workable,  at  any  rate  under  conditions  such
as  we  may  reasonably  forecast  for  our  lifetime, ­
  in  the  enormously  complicated  interrelation ­
  of  industries  in  advanced  western
countries.
The  wages  problem  in  such  surroundings
is  a  profoundly  difficult  one  because,  our
productive  energies  being  guided  by  foresight, ­
  wages  may  be  regarded  as  governed
by  the  reflection  in  anticipation  of  consumers’
innumerable  demands  on  the  one  hand  and
the  supplies  of  capital,  labour  and  organising
sagacity  of  their  multitudinous  kinds  on  the
other  side.  Moreover  consumers’  demands
and  the  relative  supplies  of  the  different  agents
in  production  are  constantly  varying,  so  that
the  wages  problem  calls  repeatedly  for  resettlement. ­
  Now  it  is  imperative  that  at  each
settlement  the  right  wage  should  be  approximately ­
  hit  upon,  because  it  is  only  when  the
right  wage  is  discovered,  and  discovered
rapidly,  that  production  is  kept  appropriate
        <pb n="243" />
        240

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

to  the  needs  of  the  community,  and  is  projected ­
  on  such  a  scale  that  the  whole  of  the
employable  population  tends  to  be  employed.
By  the  right  wage  I  mean  the  wage  which
accurately  represents  the  equilibrium  which
would  be  brought  about  by  the  forces  described ­
  if  they  worked  in  a  frictionless  medium,
which  society  is  not.  Can  we  be  sure  that
in  the  pleading  of  a  case  before  an  arbitrator
it  would  be  possible  to  make  these  forces
explicit  and  adequately  to  express  them  ?
Moreover,  can  we  be  sure  that  the  arbitrator
would  always,  or  commonly,  be  possessed  of
that  insight  which  would  enable  him  properly
to  appreciate  and  duly  to  balance  the  testimony ­
  laid  before  him  ?
Arbitration  over  small  points  and  the  interpretation ­
  of  existing  contracts  is  quite  another
matter.  In  this  matter  it  is  folly  not  to  use
to  the  full  the  judicial  referee.  But  the
industrialised  western  world  has  hitherto
shown  itself  distrustful,  and  not  without
reason,  of  the  method  of  the  law-courts
in  its  application  to  labour  disagreements
which  do  not  arise  out  of  the  reading  of
existing  undertakings.  It  seems  to  feel
instinctively  that  the  forces  expressed  in
demand  and  supply  must  be  left  by  their
interplay  to  bring  about  their  own  position
        <pb n="244" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  241

of  rest.  But  unhappily  their  interplay
generates  heat,  particularly  when  it  is
resisted,  and  may  take  place  in  an  atmosphere ­
  of  misunderstanding,  so  that  the  process
of  accommodation  is  broken  and  strikes
and  lock-outs  all  too  frequently  supervene.
Moreover,  an  outbreak  once  entered  upon,
it  is  not  unlikely  that  might  instead  of  right
will  prevail.  The  practical  problem  which
confronts  us  at  the  moment,  with  people’s
prejudices  and  predilections  as  they  are,
would  seem  to  be  so  to  smooth  the  process
whereby  wages  are  naturally  settled  that
appropriate  decisions  may  be  reached  without
cessation  of  work.
In  England  much  has  been  done  by  joint
wages  boards  and  voluntary  conciliation  to
humanise  and  nationalise  procedure  in  wages
readjustments.  In  1896  the  Board  of  Trade
was  given  a  status  for  mediating,  and  in
1911  the  official  machinery  for  settling  and
preventing  industrial  disputes  was  strengthened ­
  by  the  appointment  of  a  board  representative ­
  of  employers’  and  workpeople’s  interests.
So  far  the  action  of  mediators  and  of
Government  officials,  in  particular  of  late
years,  has  had  the  most  encouraging  results.
No  compulsion  is  exercised  :  but  it  must
be  noted  that  special  legislation  was
Q
        <pb n="245" />
        242

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

adopted  recently  to  meet  an  exceptional
case.  Successes  are  achieved  by  preventing
temper  and  misunderstanding  from  causing
a  premature  breach  in  negotiations—by
holding  together  in  dispassionate  discussion
the  representatives  of  the  parties  to  disputes,
who,  with  their  knowledge  of  the  trade,
may  be  regarded  as  capable  of  expressing
the  considerations  by  a  due  balancing  of
which  the  right  wage  is  reached—and,  moreover, ­
  by  making,  out  of  a  large  experience,
helpful  suggestions.  Where  their  organisation
is  far  advanced  it  has  become  usual  for  operatives ­
  and  employers  to  enter  into  a  compact
to  allow  neither  strike  nor  lock-out  until  a
joint  meeting  has  been  held.  It  might
conduce  incalculably  to  industrial  peace  if
to  these  compacts  a  clause  were  commonly
added  that,  on  the  failure  of  the  joint  meeting
to  reach  agreement,  strikes  or  lock-outs  should
be  still  further  deferred  until  reference  had
been  made  to  the  Board  of  Trade  ;  and  if,
moreover,  unorganised  labour  and  weakly
organised  labour  and  employers  who  are  not
at  present  direct  or  indirect  parties  to  such
compacts  could  be  induced  to  fall  in  with  the
proposal.  Prompt  action  would,  of  course,
be  essential.  Canada  has  legislated  to  further
such  a  reference  to  the  State.  In  other
        <pb n="246" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  243

western  countries  the  methods  of  industrial
peace  are  not  unlike  those  of  England.
The  generation  of  friction  by  the  processes
taking  place  in  the  labour  market,  as  compared ­
  with  the  relatively  amicable  bargaining
which  goes  on  continually  where  goods  are
bought  and  sold,  has  nothing  mysterious  in  its
origins.  It  is  easier  to  be  dispassionate  in
selling  our  services  indirectly,  in  the  form  of
what  we  have  made,  or  acquired  as  traders  to
dispose  of,  than  in  selling  them  directly  as  the
workman  does  who  is  bargaining  about  his
wages.  As  practical  economists  we  must
admit  all  facts  of  this  kind  into  our  reckoning,
and  allow  for  the  danger  of  leaving  some
things  to  be  settled  by  the  undisguised  and
unmitigated  action  of  demand  and  supply.
Just  as  there  are  cases,  calling  for  special
consideration,  in  which  serious  friction  is
generated  by  the  unrestrained  interplay  of
economic  forces,  so  there  are  other  cases,
equally  calling  for  special  consideration,  in
which  harm  results  because  the  economic
forces  which  would  normally  be  working  in
the  interests  of  a  class  are  so  smothered  as  not
to  be  properly  effective.  We  have  examples
in  many  miserably  paid  callings,  and  in  much
of  the  casual  labour  system.
        <pb n="247" />
        244

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

To  the  extremely  low-paid  occupations
attention  has  been  frequently  and  authoritatively ­
  directed,  but  it  is  only  of  late  that  an
experimental  handling  of  the  problem  of
“  sweating,”  as  it  is  called,  has  been  attempted.
A  brief  survey  of  this  abuse  will  shew,  as  the
scientific  mind  would  expect,  that  its  thorough
cure  is  bound  up  with  its  causes,  and  that  in
the  search  for  its  causes  economic  analysis  is
an  undoubted  aid.  The  theory  of  wages
expounded  in  Chapter  VII.  of  this  work
lays  it  down  that  wages  tend  to  equal  the
marginal  worth  of  labour.  Then,  seemingly,
a  search  for  the  causes  of  sweating  should
reveal  that  in  certain  circumstances  labour
tends  for  some  reason  to  get  substantially  less
than  its  marginal  worth,  which  may  be  very
low  in  addition,  or  that  it  is  incapable  of
raising  its  wage  without  help,  either  by  improving ­
  in  efficiency  or  by  moving  to  trades
where  the  recompense  for  work  is  on  a  more
generous  scale.  Actually  it  will  be  found
that  some  or  all  these  disabilities,  exist  in
the  sweated  trades,  particularly  among  outworkers, ­
  and  most  of  the  worst  paid  people
are  out-workers.
Many  out-workers  are  very  inefficient
because  they  have  never  been  trained.
And  their  work  is  very  unskilled  as  a  rule,
        <pb n="248" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  245

or  requires  merely  a  dexterity  which  can
easily  be  acquired  by  anybody,  so  that  it  is
the  common  resort  of  persons  brought  up
to  nothing  who  suddenly  find  it  necessary  to
do  something  at  home  to  make  or  add  to  an
income.  Consequently  there  is  apt  to  be  an
over-supply  of  out-workers.  Moreover  much
that  they  do  competes  with  production  by
machinery  or  semi-domestic  work.  In  so  far
as  there  is  competition  with  machinery,  the
rate  of  remuneration  of  out-workers  must  be
comparatively  paltry  if  they  are  to  secure
employment  at  all.  And  so  must  their  rate
of  pay  be  also  when,  in  the  case  of  simple
sewing  work  for  domestic  needs,  they  come
sharply  into  competition  with  consumers
who  ordinarily  sew  for  themselves  and
reckon  the  cost  very  low  because  the  work
is  to  a  large  extent  occupation  for  idle
moments.
Furthermore,  there  are  good  reasons  for
believing  that  the  pay  of  out-workers  is
disposed  to  settle  below  rather  than  at  their
marginal  worth.  Their  strategic  position  is
weak.  They  are  mostly  poor  and  ignorant  and
they  are  always  unorganised,  so  that  they
cannot  effectively  resist  what  seems  to  them
unreasonable  in  the  individual  bargains  by
which  they  are  bound  ;  and  they  may  not
        <pb n="249" />
        246

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

know  of  a  better  way  of  making  a  living,  or,
if  they  do,  how  to  fit  themselves  for  it,  when
their  circumstances  or  inertia  do  not  bar  escape
from  their  miserable  plight,  as  they  so  frequently ­
  do.  In  addition,  from  the  employing
side,  forces  may  come  into  play  which  tend  to
cause  a  down-drift  of  wages.  Some  employers
may  pay  very  low  rates  because  they  are
grasping,  or  cannot  pay  more  ;  but,  whatever
the  cause,  low  rates  once  paid  anywhere  are
apt  to  bring  down  other  rates.  Even  generously ­
  disposed  employers  may  complain  of  unfair
competition  and  feel  themselves  forced  to
follow  suit  ;  and  the  influences  on  the  side  of
supply  which  should  drive  the  incapable
employer  out  of  the  field  are  inoperative.
Again,  given  the  absence  of  an  outbreak  of
under-pay  anywhere,  there  is  always  the
suspicion  of  its  presence,  and  this  alone  helps
to  depress  rates.  Besides  it  must  be  remembered ­
  that  even  when  rates  are  not  scandalously ­
  low,  earnings  may  be,  because  of  the
disorganisation  of  the  work,  which  means
that  people  are  frequently  under-employed,
though  frequently  rushed,  and  that  their  time
is  wasted  in  more  ways  than  one.  And  as
things  are,  there  is  a  vicious  circle  of  cause  and
effect  always  working  harm.  The  poorer  outworkers ­
  become,  the  weaker  becomes  their
        <pb n="250" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  247

resisting  power  and  the  lower  becomes  their
efficiency.
If  this  diagnosis—a  diagnosis  to  which
economic  theory  has  led  us—is  correct,  the
cure  for  the  species  of  sweating  which  has
been  selected  for  examination  consists  in
measures  which  will  raise  the  efficiency  of  illpaid
  workers,  bring  about  the  removal  of
some  of  them  to  occupations  for  which  a
greater  reward  is  obtainable,  and  check  the
tendencies  which  are  driving  their  wages
beneath  their  marginal  worth.
The  problem  of  casual  labour  is  usually
envisaged  as  distinct  from  that  of  sweating,
but  the  two  are  neighbouring  species  of  one
genus.  In  most  cases  of  casual  labour  we
meet  again  with  an  over-supply  of  labour
which  has  sunk  down,  or  has  always  been
down,  and  is  without  the  knowledge,  energy,
or  training,  which  should  bring  about
the  dispersal  of  the  surplus  among  other
trades,  while  at  the  same  time  the  individual
bargain  and  disorganised  demand  flourish
so  that  time  is  wasted  in  finding  work  and
nobody  is  fully  occupied.  Again  the  solution
is  organisation  and  the  fostering  of  social
forces  which  in  this  particular  case  are
atrophied  or  undeveloped.  It  is  important
that  steps  should  be  taken  to  reform  the
        <pb n="251" />
        218

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

sluggish  economic  conditions  the  consequences ­
  of  which  are  misdirected  efforts,
wretched  lives  and  appalling  waste  ;  but  it
is  even  more  important  that  their  perpetuation ­
  should  be  stopped.  For  their  perpetuation ­
  the  undirected  drift  of  many  in  the
rising  generation  at  the  critical  age,  owing
to  lack  of  advice  and  neglect  of  training,
is  largely  responsible.
The  problem  of  unemployment  overlaps
that  last  considered  :  it  is  the  product  of
causes  which  from  a  long-period  and  highly
abstract  conception  of  economic  conditions
are  provisionally  ruled  out.  For  a  reasonable
plan  of  action  we  must  look  to  a  careful
study  of  the  facts  and  their  appropriate  interpretation ­
  in  the  light  of  a  theory  which  is
closely  reasoned  but  at  the  same  time  receptive
of  new  ideas.

"  Facts  alone  are  wanted  in  life.  Plant
nothing  else  and  root  out  everything  else.
You  can  only  form  the  minds  of  reasoning
animals  upon  Facts  :  nothing  else  will  ever  be
of  any  service  to  them.”  Thus  Mr.  Gradgrind
  delivered  his  perverted  mind  in  Hard
Times.  If  he  was  right  this  book  is  a  huge
mistake,  for,  to  the  best  of  my  knowledge,  it  is
        <pb n="252" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  249

quite  devoid  of  facts—of  facts  as  they  were
conceived  by  Dickens’  embodiment  of  a  dry
and  inflexible  commercial  philosophy,  or
negation  of  philosophy.  It  would  be  somewhat ­
  late  in  these  closing  words  to  defend
my  envisagement  of  the  real  elements  of
Political  Economy—which  are  not  such
facts—and  it  is  now  unnecessary  after
the  remarks  contained  in  the  Introduction
and  others  scattered  throughout  the  book.
Nevertheless  a  few  observations  may  be
offered,  as  much  by  way  of  summary  as  of
supplement,  concerning  the  nature,  sphere
and  limitations  of  economic  theory,  the  true
elemental  fact  which  transforms  discussion
of  economic  problems  from  haphazard  empiricism ­
  into  a  science.
Every  student  of  Economics  who  thinks  for
himself  is  bound,  from  time  to  time,  to  feel
with  something  of  a  shock  the  contrast  between
what  he  sees  and  hears  in  the  world  as  it  is
on  the  one  side  and  what  he  has  learnt  on
the  other  side.  He  may  search  in  vain
for  the  marginal  “  dose,”  and  find  the  conception ­
  of  the  marginal  return  in  a  firm
foreign  to  the  business  mind  and  underivable
from  ledgers  ;  he  may  see  workmen  arranged
in  trade  clusters  which  seems  as  little  likely
to  be  recruited  from  each  other  as  flocks  of
        <pb n="253" />
        250

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

sheep  from  herds  of  deer,  and  the  notion  that
labour  has  a  supply  price  for  each  purpose
may  seemingly  stand  exposed  as  a  pure
fabrication  ;  and,  watching  the  course  of  a
labour  dispute,  after  the  most  patient  and
microscopic  scrutiny,  he  may  detect  not  the
faintest  reference  to  the  marginal  worth  of
labour,  but,  on  the  contrary,  be  rudely  forced
against  his  armchair  convictions  to  adopt  the
view  that  the  success  of  the  men  depends
upon  the  financial  resources  of  their  union,
the  astuteness  and  vigour  of  their  chief  officials
and  the  pliability  of  employers.  All  that
may  thus  be  seen  is  real—fact  which  is  not  to
be  blinked—but  to  wipe  out  the  refinements  of
theory  when  we  admit  this  is  like  refusing  to
believe  in  radio-activity  because  we  cannot
observe  it  with  the  naked  eye.  The  most
highly  endowed  and  best  trained  scientific
mind  will  accept  every  theory  to  which  reason
compels  assent,  however  dilatory  and  minute
the  tendencies  covered  by  it,  and  at  the  same
time  reject  no  facts,  however  individual  and
exceptional,  because  they  seem  to  be  outside
accepted  theories.  A  complete  Economic
Science  may  be  imaged  as  a  weird  pyramid
with  an  extensive  base  (of  the  earth  earthy),
made  up  of  tangible  facts  just  theorised
enough  to  hold  together,  but  an  apex  (rarefied
        <pb n="254" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  251

like  the  atmosphere  of  reason  in  which  it  is
enshrouded),  made  up  of  thought  with  just
enough  of  fact  to  give  it  substance,  and,  in
between,  layer  upon  layer  of  more  or  less
highly  generalised  experience.  In  this  work
we  have  exercised  our  intellects  rather  than
our  senses,  in  the  main,  and  kept  our  attention ­
  focussed  on  the  apex  ;  but  in  the  present
chapter  portions  of  some  intermediate  layers
have  been  worked  through,  partly  for  utilitarian ­
  reasons,  but  partly  also  to  afford  an
object  lesson  of  the  manner  in  which  abstract
theory  may  be  an  aid,  though  not  the  sole
agency,  in  the  solution  of  practical  problems.
Had  the  limitations  of  these  volumes  permitted, ­
  the  same  thing  might  have  been  done
as  regards  other  problems,  and  it  might  have
been  demonstrated  that  in  the  settlement  of
business  policy,  in  matters  of  taxation  and
the  function  of  the  State  with  reference  to
industry,  commerce  and  social  conditions,
economic  theory  furnishes,  if  not  complete
solutions,  at  least  suggestions  and  indications
without  which  we  could  never  make  a  start.
At  the  same  time,  however,  for  any  handling
of  these  problems  worth  having,  a  study  of
quite  another  order  is  called  for,  namely  the
study  of  ends  or  ideals.
To  remove  all  flaws  from  social  conditions
        <pb n="255" />
        252

POLITICAL  ECONOMY

and  accomplish  the  good  and  great  is  the  wish
of  every  age  in  its  most  exalted  mood,  but
intuition  will  not  satisfy  this  wish,  and  movement ­
  backed  by  confused  ideas  means  mere
bustle  without  achievement.  The  nature  of
man  and  of  the  product  of  his  gregariousness  in
society  must  be  explored,  if  social  efforts  are
not  to  meet  with  disappointment,  and  in  their
exploration  we  shall  find  ourselves  studying
now  Ethics  and  Psychology,  now  Political
Science  and  Sociology,  and  now  the  romance  of
History.  The  investigation  of  ends  or  ideals
is  out  of  the  question  in  these  closing  pages,
but  expression  may  be  given  to  two  thoughts
connected  with  the  bearing  of  abstract
economics  on  their  construction.  It  is  an
error—from  which  the  past  has  suffered—
to  suppose  that  the  ideal  social  system  must
necessarily  be  very  like  the  one  now  pictured
by  the  abstract  economist  when  for  purposes
of  theory  he  removes  social  friction.  Yet,
economic  theory  may  afford  help  in  testing  the
workableness  of  schemes  of  reform  ;  but  we
must  be  on  our  guard  against  trusting  over
much  to  the  infallibility  of  the  economic  test
when  it  is  abstract,  and  against  assuming  too
readily  that  circumstances  are  unmodifiable
when  our  economic  test  is  realistic—though,
granting  that  “  we  were  fishes  and  may  become
        <pb n="256" />
        PROBLEMS  OF  DISTRIBUTION  253

crows,”  as  a  famous  truth  has  been  ironically
put,  it  is  certain  that  the  limits  set  to  the
modifiability  both  of  human  nature  and  of
existing  economic  laws  of  a  social  kind  are  not
exceedingly  remote
        <pb n="257" />
        NOTE  ON  BOOKS

Those  who  desire  to  make  a  further  study  of  Political
Economy  are  advised  to  peruse  next  some  comprehensive
work  of  an  intermediate  size.  Works  of  this  kind  are
numerous.  The  following  have  appeared  in  England  :—
Flux,  Economic  Principles  ;  Nicholson,  Elements  of
Political  Economy  ;  and  my  own  Outlines  of  Political
Economy.  The  following  have  appeared  in  the  United
States  :—Bullock,  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Economics  ;
Ely,  Outlines  of  Economics;  Fetter,  Principles  of  Economics;
Hadley,  Economics  ;  Seagar,  Introduction  to  Economics  ;
Seligman,  Principles  of  Economics  ;  and  Walker,  Political
Economy.  In  addition  there  is  a  book  by  Gide  on  Political
Economy  which  has  been  translated  from  the  French  into
English.
After  reading  one  of  these  volumes  the  student  who
aims  at  thoroughness  should  work  through  Marshall’s
Principles  of  Economics,  which  is  the  authoritative  treatise
on  theory,  but  does  not  cover  money,  foreign  trade  and
public  economics  and  finance.  Large  comprehensive
treatises,  which,  however,  are  not  substitutes  for  Marshall’s
Principles  in  respect  of  the  subjects  included  in  the  latter,
have  been  penned  by  Nicholson  (3  vols.),  Taussig  (2  vols.),
and  Pierson  (in  Dutch,  of  which  only  the  first  volume  has
been  translated).  Wicksteed’s  Common  Sense  of  Political
Economy  may  also  be  mentioned,  together  with  Pantaleoni’s
  Pure  Economics  (translated).
Mathematicians  who  are  interested  in  theory  should
carefully  study  the  mathematical  appendix  to  Marshall’s
Principles,  and  consult  in  addition  Edgeworth’s  Mathematical ­
  Psychics,  the  mathematical  appendix  to  Flux’s
254
        <pb n="258" />
        NOTE  ON  BOOKS

255

Economic  Principies,  Cunninghame’a  Geometry  of  Political
Economy,  and  the  mathematical  and  semi-mathematical
articles  in  the  Economic  Journal.
The  Economic  Journal  is  the  organ  of  the  Royal  Economic ­
  Society.  The  organ  of  the  American  Economic
Association  is  the  American  Economic  Review.  There
are  numerous  other  journals  of  Political  Economy
published  in  the  United  States.  Their  contents  are
indicated  in  each  number  of  the  American  Economic
Review,  and  in  each  number  of  the  (British)  Economic
Journal.  The  latter  notices  also  economic  articles  in
any  English  reviews.  Palgrave’s  Dictionary  of  Political
Economy  will  be  found  useful  by  everybody.
The  development  of  economic  ideas  is  traced  in  Bonar’s
Philosophy  and  Political  Economy,  Cannan’s  History  of
Theories  of  Production  and  Distribution  in  England,  Cossa’s
Guide  to  the  Study  of  Political  Economy,  Ingram’s  History
of  Political  Economy,  and  Price’s  Political  Economy  in
England.
        <pb n="259" />
        m  Wf

INDEX

Adam  Smith,  11-12,  13
Analytical  method,  19-27
Arbitration,  238-241
Barter,  116
Bentham,  17
Bimetallism,  141-144
Capital,  177-180,  223-9
Comparative  values,  162-7
Conciliation,  241-3
Consumers’  Surplus,  48-56
Decreasing  Returns,  68,  71-3
Demand,  Definition,  39-41
Demand,  Elasticity  of,  41-2
Diminishing  utility,  35-9
Discriminative  prices,  100-111

Dumping,  105-111
Economic  man,  26-7
Employer’s  remuneration,
183-193
Goodwin,  18
Hours  of  labour,  222
Increasing  returns,  68,  71-3
Induction,  27-8
Interest,  180-183
devons,  8,19
Laisser  faire,  14,  15

Long  and  short  periods,
29-30,  31
Marginal  quality,  58-9
Marshall,  8,  19,  20,  48,  56
Mill,  16-17,  19,  164-5
Prices,  Variations  of,  137-141

Producers’  surplus,  220-2
Production,  Agents  in,  89-91
Production,  Cost  of,  63-7,
98-100
Quantity  theory  of  money,
123-5
Rent,  Situational,  206-7
Rent,  Personal,  213-5
Reserves,  126-7,  130-3
Ricardo,  13,10
Buskin,  15,  60
Standard  of  life,  47
Sweating,  244-7
Trade  cycles,  133-7
Trade-unions,  229-237
Utility,  33-5
Value,  Definitions,  59-62
Wages,  Theory  of,  169-177
Walras,  8,19
Wealth,  59-60

The  London  &amp;amp;  Norwich  Press,  Ltd.,  London  and  Norwich
        <pb n="260" />
        The
Home  University
Modern
Library  Knowledge
Jl  Comprehensive  Series  of  New
and  Specially  Written  goo/çs

EDITORS  :
PROF.  GILBERT  MURRAY,  D.Litt.,  LL.D.,  F.B.A.
HERBERT  FISHER,  M.A.,  F.B.A.
PROF.  J.  ARTHUR  THOMSON,  M.A.
Prof.  WM.  T.  BREWSTER,  M.A.

The  Home  University  Library
Is  without  the  slightest  doubt  the  pioneer  in  supplying  serious  literature
“it  is  a  thing  very  favourable  to  the  real  success  of  The  Home
University  Library  that  its  volumes  do  not  merely  attempt  to  feed
ignorance  with  knowledge.  The  authors  noticeably  realise  that  the
simple  willing  appetite  of  sharp-set  ignorance  is  not  specially  common
nowadays  ;  what  is  far  more  common  is  a  hunger  which  has  been
partially  but  injudiciously  filled,  with  more  or  less  serious  results  of
indigestion.  The  food  supplied  is  therefore  frequently  medicinal  as
well  as  nutritious;  and  this  is  certainly  what  the  time  requires.”—
Manchester  Guardian.
“Each  volume  represents  a  three-hours’  traffic  with  the  talking-power
of  a  good  brain,  operating  with  the  ease  and  interesting  freedom  of  a
specialist  dealing  with  his  own  subject.  ...  A  series  which  promises  to
perform  a  real  social  service.”—The  Times.
“We  can  think  of  no  series  now  being  issued  which  better  deserves
support.’—The  Observer.
‘We  think  if  they  were  given  as  prizes  in  place  of  the  more  costly
rubbish  that  is  wont  to  be  dispensed  on  prize  days,  the  pupils  would
find  more  pleasure  and  profit.  If  the  publishers  want  a  motto  for  the
series  they  might  well  take  :  '  In/inite  riches  in  a  little  room.'  "—Irish
Journal  of  Education.
“The  scheme  was  successful  at  the  start  because  it  met  a  want
among  earnest  readers;  but  its  wider  and  sustained  success,  surely,
comes  from  the  fact  that  it  has  to  a  large  extent  created  and  certainly
refined  the  taste  by  which  it  is  appreciated.”—Daily  Chronicle.
“  Here  is  the  world’s  learning  in  little,  and  none  too  poor  to  give  it
house-room  !  ”—Daily  Telegraph.

]/-  net
in  cloth

256  Pages

2/6  net
in  leather
        <pb n="261" />
        History  and  (geography
3.  THE  FRENCH  REVOLUTION
By  Hilaire  Belloc,  M.A.  (With  Maps.)  “It  is  coloured  with  all  the
militancy  of  the  author’s  temperament.”—Daily  News.
4.  HISTORY  OF  WAR  AND  PEACE
By  G.  H.  Perris.  The  Rt.  Hon.  James  Bryce  writes  :  “  I  have  read  it  with
much  interest  and  pleasure,  admiring  the  skill  with  which  you  have  managed
to  compress  so  many  facts  and  views  into  so  small  a  volume.”
8.  POLAR  EXPLORATION
By  Dr  W.  S.  Bruce,  F.R.S.E.,  Leader  of  the  “Scotia”  Expedition.  (With
Maps.)  “A  very  freshly  written  and  interesting  narrative.”—The  Times.
“A  fascinating  book.”—Portsmouth  Times.
12.  THE  OPENING-UP  OF  AFRICA
By  Sir  H.  H.  Johnston,  G.C.M.G.,  K.C.B.,  D.Sc.,  F.Z.S.  (With  Maps.)
“The  Home  University  Library  is  much  enriched  by  this  excellent  work.”—
Daily  Mail.
13.  MEDIÆVAL  EUROPE
By  H.  W.  C.  Davis,  M.A.  (With  Maps.)  “One  more  illustration  of  the
fact  that  it  takes  a  complete  master  of  the  subject  to  write  briefly  upon  it.”—
Manchester  Guardian.
14.  THE  PAPACY  MODERN  TIMES  (1303-1870)
By  William  Barry,  D.D.  “Dr  Barry  has  a  wide  range  of  knowledge
and  an  artist’s  power  of  selection.”—Manchester  Guardian.
23.  HISTORY  OF  OUR  TIME,  1885-1911
By  G.  P.  Gooch,  M.A.  “  Mr  Gooch  contrives  to  breathe  vitality  into  his  story,
and  to  give  us  the  flesh  as  well  as  the  bones  of  recent  happenings.”—Observer.
25.  THE  CIVILISATION  OF  CHINA
By  H.  A.  Giles,  LL.D.,  Professor  of  Chinese  in  the  University  of  Cambridge.
“  In  all  the  mass  of  facts,  Professor  Giles  never  becomes  dull.  He  is  always
ready  with  a  ghost  story  or  a  street  adventure  for  the  reader’s  recreation.”—
Spectator.
29.  THE  DA  WN  OF  HISTORY
By  J.  L.  Myres,  M.A.,  F.  S.  A.,  Wykeham  Professor  of  Ancient  History,  Oxford.
“  There  is  not  a  page  in  it  that  is  not  suggestive.”—Manchester  Guardian.
33.  THE  HISTORY  OF  ENGLAND  :
A  Study  in  Political  Evolution.
By  Prof.  A.  F.  Pollard,  M.A.  With  a  Chronological  Table.  “  It  takes  its
place  at  once  among  the  authoritative  works  on  English  history.”—Observer.
34.  CANADA
By  A.  G.  Bradley.  “  Who  knows  Canada  better  than  Mr  A.  G.  Bradley?  ”—
Daily  Chronicle.  “The  volume  makes  an  immediate  appeal  to  the  man  who
wants  to  know  something  vivid  and  true  about  Canada.”—Canadian  Gazette.
2
        <pb n="262" />
        3

37-  PEOPLES  fr  PROBLEMS  OF  INDIA
By  Sir  T.  W.  Holderness,  K.C.S.I.,  Secretary  of  the  Revenue,  Statistics,
and  Commerce  Department  of  the  India  Office.  “Just  the  book  which  newspaper ­
  readers  require  to-day,  and  a  marvel  of  comprehensiveness.”—Pall
Mall  Gazette.
42.  ROME
By  W.  Warde  Fowler,  M.A.  “  A  masterly  sketch  of  Roman  character  and
of  what  it  did  for  the  world.”—The  Spectator.  “It  has  all  the  lucidity  and
charm  of  presentation  we  expect  from  this  writer.”—Manchester  Guardian.
48.  THE  AMERICAN  CIVIL  WAR
By  F.  L.  Paxson,  Professor  of  American  History,  Wisconsin  University.
(With  Maps.)  “A  stirring  study.”—The  Guardian.
51.  WARFARE  IN  BRITAIN
By  Hilaire  Belloc,  M.A.  An  account  of  how  and  where  great  battles  of  the
past  were  fought  on  British  soil,  the  roads  and  physical  conditions  determining
the  island's  strategy,  the  castles,  walled  towns,  etc.
55-  MASTER  MARINERS
By  J.  R.  Spears.  The  romance  of  the  sea,  the  great  voyages  of  discovery,
naval  battles,  the  heroism  of  the  sailor,  and  the  development  of  the  ship,  from
ancient  times  to  to-day.
In  Preparation
ANCIENT  GREECE.  By  Prof.  Gilbert  Murray,  D.Litt.,  LL.D.,  F.B.A
ANCIENT  EGYPT.  By  F.  Ll.  Griffith,  M.A.
THE  ANCIENT  EAST.  By  D.  G.  Hogarth,  M.A.,  F.B.A.
A  SHOE  T  HIS  TOR  Y  OF  EUROPE.  By  Herbert  Fisher.  M.A.,  F.B.A.
PREHISTORIC  BRITAIN.  By  Robert  Munro,  M.A.,  M.D.,  LL.D.
THE  BYZANTINE  EMPIRE.  By  Norman  H.  Baynes.
THE  REFORMATION.  By  Principal  Lindsay,  LL.D.
NAPOLEON.  By  Herbert  Fisher,  M.A.,  F.B.A.
A  SHORT  HISTORY  OF  RUSSIA.  By  Prof.  MiLYOUKOV.
MODERN  TURKEY.  By  D.  G.  Hogarth,  M.A.
FRANCE  OF  TO-DAY.  By  Albert  Thomas.
GERMANY  OF  TO-DAY.  By  Charles  Tower.
THE  NAVY  AND  SEA  POWER.  By  David  Hannay.
HISTORY  OF  SCOTLAND.  By  R.  S.  Rait,  M.A.
SOUTH  AMERICA.  By  Prof.  W,  R.  Shepherd.
LONDON.  By  Sir  Laurence  Gomme,  F.S  A.
HISTORY  AND  LITERATURE  OF  SPAIN.  By  J.  Fitzmaurice-KEi.LV,
  F.B.A.,  Litt.D.

Literature  and  *Art

2.  SHAKESPEARE
By  John  Masefield.  “The  book  is  a  joy.  We  have  had  half-a-dozen  more
learned  books  on  Shakespeare  in  the  last  few  years,  but  not  one  so  wise.”—
Manchester  Guardian.
27-  ENGLISH  LITERATURE  :  MODERN
By  G.  H.  Mair,  M.A.  “Altogether  a  fresh  and  individual  book.”—Observer.
35-  LANDMARKS  IN  FRENCH  LITERA  TURE
By  G.  L.  Strachey.  “  Mr  Strachey  is  to  be  congratulated  on  his  courage  and
success.  It  is  difficult  to  imagine  how  a  better  account  of  French  Literature
could  be  given  in  250  small  pages  than  he  has  given  here."—The  Times.
        <pb n="263" />
        4

39-  ARCHITECTURE
By  Prof.  W.  R.  Lethaby.  (Over  forty  Illustrations.)  “  Popular  guide-books
to  architecture  are,  as  a  rule,  not  worth  much.  This  volume  is  a  welcome  exception.”—Building ­
  News.  “  Delightfully  bright  reading.  ”—Christian  World.
43-  ENGLISH  LITERATURE:  MEDIÆVAL
By  Prof.  W.  P.  Ker,  M.A.  ‘‘Prof.  Ker  has  long  proved  his  worth  as  one  of
the  soundest  scholars  in  English  we  have,  and  he  is  the  very  man  to  put  an
outline  of  English  Mediaeval  Literature  before  the  uninstructed  public.  His
knowledge  and  taste  are  unimpeachable,  and  his  style  is  effective,  simple,  yet
never  dry.”—The  Athenäum.
45-  THE  ENGLISH  LANGUAGE
By  L.  Pearsall  Smith,  M.A.  “A  wholly  fascinating  study  of  the  different
streams  that  went  to  the  making  of  the  great  river  of  the  English  speech.”—
Daily  News.
52.  GREAT  WRITERS  OF  AMERICA
By  Prof.  J.  Erskine  and  Prof.  W.  P.  Trent.  A  popular  sketch  by  two
foremost  authorities.
In  Preparation
ANCIENT  ART  AND  RITUAL.  By  Miss  Jane  Harrison,  LL.D.,
D.Litt.
GREEK  LITERA  TURE.  By  Prof.  Gilbert  Murray,  D.Litt.
LA  TIN  LITERA  TURE.  By  Prof.  J.  S.  Phillimore.
CHA  UCF.R  A  ND  HIS  TIME.  By  Miss  G.  E.  Hadow.
THE  RENAISSANCE.  By  Mrs  R.  A.  Taylor.
ITALIAN  ART  OF  THE  RENAISSANCE.  By  Roger  E.  Fry,  M.A.
THE  ART  OF  PAINTING.  By  Sir  Frederick  Wedmore.
DR  JOHNSON  AND  HIS  CIRCLE.  By  John  Bailey,  M.A.
THE  VICTORIAN  AGE.  By  G.  K.  Chesterton.
ENGLISH  COMPOSITION.  By  Prof.  Wm.  T.  Brewster.
GREA  T  WRITERS  OF  RUSSIA.  By  C.  T.  Hagberg  Wright,  LL.D.
THE  LITERATURE  OF  GERMANY.  By  Prof.  J.  G.  Robertson.
M.A.,  Ph.D.
SCANDINAVIAN  HISTORY  AND  LITERATURE.  By  T.  C.
Snow,  M.A.

7.  MODERN  GEOGRAPHY
By  Dr  Marion  Newbigin.  (Illustrated.)  “  Geography,  again  :  what  a  dull,
tedious  study  that  was  wont  to  be  !  .  .  .  But  Miss  Marion  Newbigin  invests  its
dry  bones  with  the  flesh  and  blood  of  romantic  interest,  taking  stock  of
geography  as  a  fairy-book  of  science.”—Daily  Telegraph.
9 .  THE  EVOLUTION  OF  PLANTS
By  Dr  I).  H.  Scott,  M.A.,  F.  R.S.,  late  Hon.  Keeper  of  the  Jodrell  Laboratory,
Kew.  (Fully  illustrated.)  “The  information  which  the  book  provides  is  as
trustworthy  as  first-hand  knowledge  can  make  it.  .  .  .  Dr  Scott’s  candid  and
familiar  style  makes  the  difficult  subject  both  fascinating  and  easy.”—
Gardeners’  Chronicle.
17.  HEALTH  AND  DISEASE
By  W.  Leslie  Mackenzie,  M.D.,  Local  Government  Board,  Edinburgh.
“  The  science  of  public  health  administration  has  had  no  abler  or  more  attractive
exponent  than  Dr  Mackenzie.  He  adds  to  a  thorough  grasp  of  the  problems
an  illuminating  style,  and  an  arresting  manner  of  treating  a  subject  often
dull  and  sometimes  unsavoury.”—Economist.
        <pb n="264" />
        18.  INTRODUCTION  TO  MATHEMATICS
By  A.  N.  Whitehead,  Sc.D.,  F.R.S.  (With  Diagrams.)  “Mr  Whitehead
has  discharged  with  conspicuous  success  the  task  he  is  so  exceptionally  qualified
to  undertake.  For  he  is  one  of  our  great  authorities  upon  the  foundations  of  the
science,  and  has  the  breadth  of  view  which  is  so  requisite  in  presenting  to  the
reader  its  aims.  His  exposition  is  clear  and  striking.  Westminster  Gazette.
19.  THE  ANIMAL  WORLD
By  Professor  F.  W.  Gamble,  D.Sc.,  F.R.S.  With  Introduction  by  Sir  Oliver
Lodge.  (Many  Illustrations.)  “  A  delightful  and  instructive  epitome  of  animal
(and  vegetable)  life.  .  .  .  A  most  fascinating  and  suggestive  survey.”—Morning
Post.
20.  EVOLUTION
By  Professor  J.  Arthur  Thomson  and  Professor  Patrick  Geddes.  “A
many-coloured  and  romantic  panorama,  opening  up,  like  no  other  book  we  know,
a  rational  vision  of  world-development."—Belfast  Neivs-Letter.
22.  CRIME  AND  INSANITY
By  Dr  C.  A.  Mercier,  F.R.C.P.,  F.R.C.S.,  Author  of  “Text-Book  of  Insanity,” ­
  etc.  “  Furnishes  much  valuable  information  from  one  occupying  the
highest  position  among  medico-legal  psychologists.”—Asylum  News.
28.  PSYCHICAL  RESEARCH
By  Sir  W.  F.Barrett,  F.R.S.,  Professor  of  Physics,  Royal  College  of  Science,
Dublin,  1873-1910.  “  As  a  former  President  of  the  Psychical  Research  Society,
he  is  familiar  with  all  the  developments  of  this  most  fascinating  branch  of  science,
and  thus  what  he  has  to  say  on  thought-reading,  hypnotism,  telepathy,  crystalvision,
  spiritualism,  divinings,  and  so  on,  will  be  read  with  avidity.”—Dundee
Courier.
31.  ASTRONOMY
By  A.  R.  Hinks,  M.A.,  Chief  Assistant,  Cambridge  Observatory,
in  thought,  eclectic  in  substance,  and  critical  in  treatment.  .  .  ,
little  book  is  available.”—School  World.

“Original
No  better

INTRODUCTION  TO  SCIENCE

freshly

asily

relations

with  philosophy,  art,  religion,  and  practical  life.”—Aberdeen  Journal.
36.  CLIMATE  AND  WEATHER
By  H.  N.  Dickson,  D.Sc.  Oxon.,  M.A.,  F.R.S.E.,  President  of  the  Royal
Meteorological  Society  ;  Professor  of  Geography  in  University  College,  Reading.
(With  Diagrams.)  “  The  author  has  succeeded  in  presenting  in  a  very  lucid
and  agreeable  manner  the  causes  of  the  movement  of  the  atmosphere  and  of
the  more  stable  winds.”—Manchester  Guardian.
4i.  ANTHROPOLOGY
By  R.  R.  Marett,  M.A.,  Reader  in  Social  Anthropology  in  Oxford  University.
“An  absolutely  perfect  handbook,  so  clear  that  a  child  could  understand  it,  so
fascinating  and  human  that  it  beats  fiction  ‘  to  a  frazzle.’  ”—Morning  Leader.
44.  THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  PHYSIOLOGY
By  Prof.  J.  G.  McKendrick,  M.D.  “  It  is  a  delightful  and  wonderfully  comprehensive ­
  handling  of  a  subject  which,  while  of  importance  to  all,  does  not
readily  lend  itself  to  untechnical  explanation.  .  .  .  The  little  book  is  more  than
a  mere  repository  of  knowledge  ;  upon  every  page  of  it  is  stamped  the  impress
of  a  creative  imagination.”—Glasgow  Herald.

■  :  :  ■■
        <pb n="265" />
        6

46.  MATTER  AND  ENERGY
By  F.  Soddy,  M.A.,  F.R.S.  “A  most  fascinating  and  instructive  account  of
the  great  facts  of  physical  science,  concerning  which  our  knowledge,  of  later
years,  has  made  such  wonderful  progress.”—The  Bookseller.
49-  PSYCHOLOGY,  THE  STUDY  OF  BEHAVIOUR
By  Prof.  W.  McDougall,  F.R.S.,  M.B.  “A  happy  example  of  the  nontechnical ­
  handling  of  an  unwieldy  science,  suggesting  rather  than  dogmatising.
It  should  whet  appetites  for  deeper  study.”—Christian  World.
53.  THE  MAKING  OF  THE  EARTH
By  Prof.  J.  W.  Gregory,  F.R.S.  (With  38  Maps  and  Figures.)  The  Professor
of  Geology  at  Glasgow  describes  the  origin  of  the  earth,  the  formation  and
changes  of  i  ts  surface  and  structure,  its  geological  history,  the  first  appearance
of  life,  and  its  influence  upon  the  globe.
57-  THE  HUMAN  BODY
By  A.  Keith,  M.D.,  LL.D.,  Conservator  of  Museum  and  Hunterian  Professor, ­
  Royal  College  of  Surgeons.  (Illustrated.)  The  work  of  the  dissectingroom
  is  described,  and  among  other  subjects  dealt  with  are  :  the  development
of  the  body  ;  malformations  and  monstrosities  ;  changes  of  youth  and  age  ;  sex
differences,  are  they  increasing  or  decreasing  ?  race  characters  ;  bodily  features
as  indexes  of  mental  character  ;  degeneration  and  regeneration  ;  and  the
genealogy  and  antiquity  of  man.
58.  ELECTRICITY
By  Gisbert  Kapp,  D.Eng.,  M.I.E.E.,  M.I.C.E.,  Professor  of  Electrical
Engineering  in  the  University  of  Birmingham.  (Illustrated.)  Deals  with
frictional  and  contact  electricity  ;  potential  ;  electrification  by  mechanical
means  ;  the  electric  current  ;  the  dynamics  of  electric  currents  ;  alternating
currents  ;  the  distribution  of  electricity,  etc.
In  Preparation
CHEMISTRY.  Py  Prof.  R.  Meldola,  F.R.S.
THE  MINERAL  WORLD.  By  Sir  T.  H.  Holland,  K.C.I.E.,  D.Sc.
PLANT  LIFE.  By  Prof.  J.  B.  Farmer,  F.R.S.
NERVES.  By  Prof.  D.  Fraser  Harris,  M.D.,  D.Sc.
A  STUDY  OF  SEX.  By  Prof.  J.  A.  Thomson  and  Prof.  Patrick  Geddes.
THE  GROWTH  OF  EUROPE.  By  Prof.  Grenville  Cole.

Philosophy  and  Religion

15.  MOHAMMEDANISM
By  Prof.  D.  S.  Margoliouth,  M.A.,  D.Litt.  “This  generous  shilling’s
worth  of  wisdom.  ...  A  delicate,  humorous,  and  most  responsible  tractate
by  an  illuminative  professor.”—Daily  Mail.
40.  THE  PROBLEMS  OF  PHILOSOPHY
By  the  Hon.  Bertrand  Russell,  F.R.S.  A  book  that  the  1  man  in  the
street  '  will  recognise  at  once  to  be  a  boon.  .  .  .  Consistently  lucid  and  nontechnical ­
  throughout.”—Christian  World.
47.  BUDDHISM
By  Mrs  Rhys  Davids,  M.A.  “A  very  able  and  concise  ‘study  of  the  Buddhist
norm.’  .  .  .  The  author  presents  very  attractively  as  well  as  very  learnedly
the  philosophy  of  Buddhism  as  the  greatest  scholars  of  the  day  interpret  it.”—
Daily  News.
        <pb n="266" />
        50.  NONCONFORMITY:  Its  ORIGIN  and  PROGRESS
By  Principal  W.  B.  Selbie,  M.A.  “The  historical  part  is  brilliant  in  its
insight,  clarity,  and  proportion,  and  in  the  later  chapters  on  the  present  position
and  aims  of  Nonconformity  Dr  Selbie  proves  himself  to  be  an  ideal  exponent
of  sound  and  moderate  views.”—Christian  World.
54.  ETHICS
P.y  G.  E.  Moore,  M.A.,  Lecturer  in  Moral  Science  in  Cambridge  University.
Discusses  Utilitarianism,  the  Objectivity  of  Moral  Judgments,  the  Test  of
Right  and  Wrong,  Free  Will,  and  Intrinsic  Value.
56.  THE  MAKING  OF  THE  NEW  TESTAMENT
By  Prof.  B.  W.  Bacon,  LL.  D.,  D.D.  An  authoritative  summary  of  the  results
of  modern  critical  research  with  regard  to  the  origins  of  the  New  Testament,  in
“  the  formative  period  when  conscious  inspiration  was  still  in  its  full  glow  rather
than  the  period  of  collection  into  an  official  canon,”  showing  the  mingling  of  the
two  great  currents  of  Christian  thought—“  Pauline  and  ‘Apostolic,’  the  Greek-Christian
  gospel  about  Jesus,  and  the  Jewish-Christian  gospel  of  Jesus,  the
gospel  of  the  Spirit  and  the  gospel  of  authority.”
60.  MISSIONS:  THEIR  RISE  and  DEVELOPMENT
By  Mrs  Creighton.  The  beginning  of  modern  missions  after  the  Reformation ­
  and  their  growth  are  traced,  and  an  account  is  given  of  their  present
work,  its  extent  and  character.
In  Preparation
THE  OLD  TESTAMENT.  By  Prof.  George  Moore,  D.D.,  LL.D.
BETWEEN  THE  OLD  AND  NEW  TESTAMENTS.  By  R.  H.
Charles,  D.D.
COMPARATIVE  RELIGION.  By  Prof.  J.  Estlin  Carpenter,  D.Litt.
A  HISTORY  of  FREEDOM  of  THOUGHT.  By  Prof.  J.  B.  Bury,  LL.D.
A  HISTORY  OF  PHILOSOPHY.  By  Clement  Webb,  M.A.

Social  Science

I.  PARLIAMENT
History,  Constitution,  and  Practice.  By  Sir  Courtenay  P.  Ilbert,
K.C.B.,  K.C.S.I.,  Clerk  of  the  House  of  Commons.  u  The  best  book  on  the
history  and  practice  of  the  House  of  Commons  since  Bagehot’s  ‘Constitution.’”—
Yorkshire  Post.
5.  THE  STOCK  EXCHANGE
By  F.  W.  Hirst,  Editor  of  “  The  Economist.”  “  To  an  unfinancial  mind  must
be  a  revelation.  .  .  .  The  book  is  as  clear,  vigorous,  and  sane  as  Bagehot’s  ‘  Lombard ­
  Street,’  than  which  there  is  no  higher  compliment.”—Morning  Leader
6.  IRISH  NATIONALITY
By  Mrs  J.  R.  Green.  “  As  glowing  as  it  is  learned.  No  book  could  be  more
timely.”—Daily  Netos.  “A  powerful  study.  .  .  .  A  magnificent  demonstration
of  the  deserved  vitality  of  the  Gaelic  spirit.”—Freeman  s  Journal.
io.  THE  SOCIALIST  MOVEMENT
By  J.  Ramsay  MacDonald,  M.P.  “Admirably  adapted  for  the  purpose  of
exposition.”—The  Times.  “  Mr  MacDonald  is  a  very  lucid  exponent.  .  .  .  The
volume  will  be  of  great  use  in  dispelling  illusions  about  the  tendencies  of
Socialism  in  this  country.”—The  Nation.
II.  CONSERVATISM
By  Lord  Hugh  Cecil,  M.A.,  M.P.  “One  of  those  great  little  books  which
seldom  appear  more  than  once  in  a  generation.”—Morning  Post.
        <pb n="267" />
        16.  THE  SCIENCE  OF  WEALTH

By  J.  A.  Hobson,  M.A.  “  Mr  J.  A.  Hobson  holds  an  unique  position  among
living  economists.  .  .  .  The  text-book  produced  is  altogether  admirable.
Original,  reasonable,  and  illuminating."—The  Nation.
2i.  LIBERALISM
By  L.  T.  Hobhouse,  M.A.,  Professor  of  Sociology  in  the  University  of  London.
“A  book  of  rare  quality.  .  .  .  We  have  nothing  but  praise  for  the  rapid  and
masterly  summaries  of  the  arguments  from  first  principles  which  form  a  large
part  of  this  book.”—Westminster  Gazette.
24.  THE  EVOLUTION  OF  INDUSTRY
By  D.  H.  MACGREGOR,  M.A.,  Professor  of  Political  Economy  in  the  University
of  Leeds.  “A  volume  so  dispassionate  in  terms  may  be  read  with  profit  by  all
interested  in  the  present  state  of  unrest."—Aberdeen  Journal.
26.  AGRICULTURE
By  Prof.  W.  Somerville,  F.L.S.  “  It  makes  the  results  of  laboratory  work
at  the  University  accessible  to  the  practical  farmer.”—Atheneeum.
30.  ELEMENTS  OF  ENGLISH  LA  W
By  W.  M.  Geldart,  M.A.,  B.C.L.,  Vinerian  Professor  of  English  Law  at
Oxford.  “Contains  a  very  clear  account  of  the  elementary  principles  underlying ­
  the  rules  of  English  law  ;  and  we  can  recommend  it  to  all  who  wish  to
become  acquainted  with  these  elementary  principles  with  a  minimum  of
trouble.”—Scots  Law  Times.
38.  THE  SCHOOL
An  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Education.
By  J.  J.  Findlay,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Education  in  Manchester
University.  “An  amazingly  comprehensive  volume.  .  .  .  It  is  a  remarkable
performance,  distinguished  in  its  crisp,  striking  phraseology  as  well  as  its
inclusiveness  of  subject-matter.”—Morning  Post.
q Q ,  ELEMENTS  OF  POLITICAL  ECONOMY
By  S.  J.  Chapman,  M.A.,  Professor  of  Political  Economy  in  Manchester
University.  A  simple  explanation,  in  the  light  of  the  latest  economic  thought,
of  the  working  of  demand  and  supply  ;  the  nature  of  monopoly  ;  money  and
international  trade  ;  the  relation  of  wages,  profit,  interest,  and  rent  ;  and  the
effects  of  labour  combination—prefaced  by  a  short  sketch  of  economic  study
since  Adam  Smith.
In  Preparation
THE  CRIMINAL  AND  THE  COMMUNITY.  By  Viscount  St.
COMMONSENSE  IN  LAW.  By  Prof.  P.  Vinogradofk,  D.C.L.
THE  CIVIL  SERVICE.  By  Graham  Wallas,  M.A.
PRACTICAL  IDEALISM.  By  Maurice  Hewlett.
NEWSPAPERS.  By  G.  Binney  Dibbi.ee.
ENGLISH  VILLAGE  LIFE.  By  E.  N.  Bennett,  M.A.
CO-PARTNERSHIP  A  :\D  PROFIT-SHARING.  By  Aneurin
Williams,  J.P.
THE  SOCIAL  SETTLEMENT.  By  Jane  Addams  and  R.  A.  Woods.
GREA  T  INVENTIONS.  By  Prof.  J.  L.  Myres,  M.A.,  F.S.A.
TOWN  PLANNING.  By  Raymond  Unwin.
POLITICAL  THOUGHT  IN  ENGLAND  :  From  Bentham  to  J.  S.
Mill.  By  Prof.  W.  L.  Davidson.
POLITICAL  THOUGHT  IN  ENGLAND:  From  Herbert  SJene  er
to  To-day.  By  Ernest  Barker,  M.A.
London:  WILLIAMS  AND  NORGATE
And  of  all  Bookshops  and  Bookstalls.
        <pb n="268" />
        .

wm

TrTT

ïM&amp;amp;t'iïfc'ïï
        <pb n="269" />
        I
I

I
        <pb n="270" />
        5)08427992

206
        <pb n="271" />
        POLITICAL  ECONOMY

172

It  must  be  firmly  grasped  that  any  class
of  employed  agents  in  production  has  a
marginal  worth  which  varies,  other  things
being  equal,  with  its  supply:  the  larger  the
supply,  in  relation  to  given  supplies  of
other  factors,  the  lower  the  marginal  worth.
It  is  these  marginal  worths,  or  their  equivalents, ­
  which  tend  to  accrue  to  the  agents
in  production  as  their  earnings  ;  and  it  is
vital  to  an  understanding  of  the  economic
functioning  of  a  community  to  recognise  that
in  these  payments  the  value  of  the  things
produced  is  expressed.  Workpeople  have  a
value  to  the  employer  because,  in  conjunction ­
  with  other  agents,  they  create  what  has
a  direct  or  indirect  value  to  consumers.
Their  value  to  the  employer  is  in  effect  the
value  of  what  is  made  transmitted  through
the  demand  of  the  employer;  and  the  value
of  what  is  made  may  actually  originate  in
themselves,  because  it  may  be  settled  on  the
one  side  by  their  own  demand  for  goods.
Similarly  the  value  of  every  other  agent  in
production  is  the  transmitted  value  of  what
it  adds  to  production  at  the  margin.
So  we  may  lay  it  down  in  the  rough  that,
subject  to  reservations  arising  out  of  social
friction,  the  sum  which  each  agent  in  production ­
  (apart  from  the  employer,  whose  case
        <pb n="272" />
        <pb n="273" />
        ■
      </div>
    </body>
  </text>
</TEI>
